Search filter
Filter
Reset- Installation drawing (888)
- Product data sheet (787)
- Installation instructions (355)
- Tender texts (294)
- 3D model (181)
- Product scale drawing (146)
- Certificate (111)
- Declarations of performance (91)
- Declaration of conformity (71)
- Cable plan (60)
- Wiring diagram (43)
- Product declaration (LEED, DGNB, EPD) (43)
- User manual (30)
- Supplementary sheet (26)
- Flyer/folder (24)
- Product brochure (23)
- Type examination certificate (11)
- T&C / Data Protection (7)
- Software (5)
- Supplier information (4)
- Safety analysis (2)
- Evaluation/comment (2)
- Customer information (1)
3205 results found
GEZE IQ Bar 100 series Panic & emergency exit push-bar
GEZE IQ Bar 100 Series Panic & Emergency Exit Hardware 143799-02 GB Installation instructions IQ Bar 100 Series Table of Contents … 1 About this document … Product description … Key to symbols … 2 Safety and responsibility … General safety instructions . … Product liability … 3 Product overview … Technical parts list … Hardware range … 4 Fixing and installation … … .1 … .2 … .3 Introduction … IQ Bar 101/ IQ Pad 101 … IQ Bar 102/ IQ Bar 102 A/ IQ Pad 102/ IQ Bar 104 DL … Outside Access Device (OAD) … 12 OAD 100 K with Knob (cylinder cannot be removed) … 12 OAD 100 K EC with Knob and Euro Cylinder … 13 OAD 100 L EC with Lever and Euro Cylinder . … 14 … Notes on installation … 17 … Maintenance instructions … 18 … Drilling templates … 18 … Drilling Template … - to fit the operation / slave unit / OAD 100 K onto the door … 19 Drilling Template … - to fit the outside access device 100 K EC / 100 L EC onto the door … 20 IQ Bar 100 Series … About this document About this document These instructions describe the installation of the GEZE IQ Panic & Emergency Exit hardware. … Product description The GEZE IQ Panic & Emergency Exit hardware devices are designed to give instant escape, when required, by means of either a push bar or push pad on single or double doors, and can be operated from the outside of the door by an outside access device. When the outside access device is locked the door can still be released from the inside. … Key to symbols Symbols used in these instructions Important information and technical notes are emphasised to illustrate the correct operation. Symbol Meaning means “Important note” means “Additional information” XX … Symbol for a user action. Here you have to take an action. Observe the sequence if there are several action steps. Safety and responsibility The GEZE IQ Panic & Emergency Exit hardware device has been designed according to the latest technical standards and acknowledged safety rules and regulations. Dangers can, nevertheless, occur in its installation and use. You must therefore observe the following instructions. … General safety instructions àà àà àà àà àà àà Installation, commissioning and repairs must be performed only by GEZE-authorized specialists. Use only genuine GEZE parts for repairs. GEZE accepts no liability for damage arising from unauthorized modifications to the installation. Primary building safety measures must be taken by the owner. Cables must be laid according to standards VDE 0100 and VDE 0815. Doors with electrical locks along escape routes should be inspected annually by a specialist. The specialist must issue a certificate verifying the periodic inspection, which the owner must submit to the building inspectorate on request. The inspection can be performed by a GEZE service technician or a GEZE-authorized service provider. àà In addition, GEZE recommends a monthly inspection of the exit hardware device for visible damage and faults by the owner. Any identified damage or faults must be rectified immediately by a GEZE service technician or a GEZE-authorized service provider. àà In order to meet the CEN European Standards the door and frame should be of good quality and suitable to support the hardware. àà The safety features of this product are essential to its compliance with EN 179:2008 and EN 1125:2008. No modification of any kind, other than described in these instructions are permitted. Improper use Improper use includes the connection of any products that are not expressly approved by GEZE. … Product liability àà According to manufacturers liability for their products as defined in the German product liability act, the information contained herein and in the associated installation instructions and diagrams must be observed. Non-observation frees the manufacturer from their liability. àà Installation, function testing and maintenance must be performed only by GEZE-authorized personnel. GEZE accepts no liability for damage arising from unauthorized modifications to the installation. àà A combination with third-party devices invalidates GEZE’s warranty. For repair and maintenance, use only original GEZE parts. … Product overview IQ Bar 100 Series … Product overview … Technical parts list Top shoot end plug Push Bar Bottom shoot end plug … Push Pad 1. Top trip plate 2. Top shoot end plug 3. Top trip guide 4. Top shoot tube 5. Tube guide 6. Tube screws 7. Push bar main unit 8. Oval cross bar 9. Slave unit 10. Tube end plug 11. Push pad actuator 12. Push pad main unit 13. Latch keep 14. Bottom shoot tube 15. Adjustable bottom tube guide 16 Bottom shoot end plug 17 Alternative floor plate 18 Body label IQ Bar 100 Series Hardware range Single Door Sets … Point Panic Bolts IQ BAR 102 Push Bar … Point Panic Bolt with shoot bolts IQ BAR 102 A Push Bar … Point Panic Bolt with adjustable shoot bolts PAD 101 PAD 102 IQ BAR 101 Push Bar … Point Panic Latch BAR 102 A BAR 101 BAR 102 … Point Centre Panic Bolt IQ PAD 101 Push Pad … Point Panic Latch IQ PAD 102 Push Pad … Point Panic Bolt with shoot bolts IQ Bar 103 DL Push Bar … Point Double Door Set for rebated double doors BAR 102 BAR 102 BAR 102 Double Door Sets BAR 101 … Product overview IQ Bar 104 DL Push Bar … Point Double Door Set for plain meeting double doors … Fixing and installation IQ Bar 100 Series … Fixing and installation … Introduction àà These exit devices are suitable for right or left hand opening doors of up to 2440mm (8’) high x 1220mm (4’) wide. àà The door must weigh no more than 200kg and be mounted in a good quality well made frame. àà The door/doors should be checked to ensure correct hanging and freedom from binding. àà It is not recommended that the exit device is fitted to hollow core doors. àà The exit devices are not intended for use on double action (double swing) doors. àà Ensure that no weather strips or fixings on the door or door frame stop the device from working properly. àà If the door is to be fitted with a device which allows you to open it from outside, read the instructions provided with that device. àà All measurements are in millimetres. àà For installation of double door sets refer to the instuctions of the relevant single door units. àà IQ Bar 103 V DL àà IQ Bar 104 V DL … = IQ Bar 101 = IQ Bar 102 + IQ Bar 102 + IQ Bar 102 IQ Bar 100 Series … Fixing and installation IQ Bar 101/ IQ Pad 101 These units can be fitted on a single door. IQ Bar 101 can also be fitted on the first opening (active) leaf of the IQ Bar 103 DL double doors set. In this case a revised fitting position for the unit is however required as shown on these installation instructions. In case of using an outside access device (OAD) fit the OAD first before continuing with the installation of the panic device. Step A: Re-handing the panic latch (if required) Supplied as standard the push bar/pad panic latch is assembled to suit right hand opening doors. To reverse the assembly to suit left hand opening doors proceed as follows. XX 1. Remove the panic latch backplate followed by the drive casting and actuating pressing. XX 2. The latch bolt/blanking casting assembly is reversible in the body by compressing between forefinger and thumb and replacing in the required position. XX 3. Reverse the position of the actuating pressing on the drive casting. Refit in the latch body ensuring that the drive casting pivot is correctly located and that the drive casting spigot is fully engaged with the latch bolt pressing. XX … . Refit the backplate and test for correct operation. Step B: Fitting the main/operating unit XX Determine the height of the push bar/pad (A) between 900mm and 1100mm from floor level. Mark this position on the jamb adjacent to the door. XX Establish the mounting position for the panic latch operating unit 10mm from the jamb. Place the template on the door and align the push bar/pad height and the rebate line with the jamb and drill the fixing holes required. Remove the template and fix the operating unit. XX For double doors establish the mounting position for the panic latch operating unit 10mm from the edge of the second door. Position the panic bolt operating unit on the last opening door 35mm from the panic latch operating body and fix. A Push Bar / Push Pad centre height: between 900mm & 1100mm B Push Bar length = B - 8mm Re-handing the panic / emergency exit latch … 1 … Standard latch keep P1601 Step C: Fitting the Keep XX For a single door fit the keep plate to the jamb. Note that only the keep face within the jamb rebate should be recessed to provide flush fitting. XX For double doors fit the box keep 300 to the adjacent (second opening) door. Note the position of the panic bolt unit for this application. … Fixing and installation XX Operate the panic latch and ensure that the latch bolt moves and returns freely, enters the keep fully and allows the door to be opened easily and closed securely. IQ Bar 100 Series Fixing the push bar Step D: Fitting the slave unit & push bar IQ Bar only XX Using the template position the slave unit on the door directly opposite the operating unit and 10mm from the jamb and fix. XX Measure the outside dimension (B) across the operating arms. Subtract 8mm and cut the plain end of the push bar to length. Drill a 10mm dia. hole in the plain end of the push bar on the centre line and 12mm from the end. XX Locate the push bar in the operating arms and ensure that the holes align with the arm clamp screws. Insert the end plugs into both ends of the push bar flush with the operating arms and fully tighten both screws. Step E: Testing the operation XX Test the unit to ensure that when the Push Bar/ Pad is operated the door opens immediately and swings freely. When closed the centre latch engages fully in the keep and holds the door securely shut. Step F: Fitting the name plate and the sign XX Remove backing paper and fit self adhesive body label into the recessed location on the body casting to cover top fixing screws. For push bar: Fit the self adhesive “Push Bar to Open” sign onto the door immediately above the push bar For push pad: Fit the self adhesive “Push Pad to Open” sign onto the door by the push pad. Centre latch keep double door (300) … IQ Bar 100 Series … Fixing and installation IQ Bar 102/ IQ Bar 102 A/ IQ Pad 102/ IQ Bar 104 DL These units can be fitted on a single door or in one of the following double door sets: àà Set IQ Bar 104 DL with IQ Bar 102 fitted on both leafs of non rebated double doors. àà Set IQ Bar 103 DL with IQ Bar 102 fitted on the last opening (inactive) leaf of double rebated doors together with IQ Bar 101 on the first opening (active) leaf. In this case a revised fitting position for this unit is however required, which is shown on the other unit’s installation instructions. In case of using an outside access device (OAD) fit the OAD first before continuing with the installation of the panic device. Step A: Fitting the main/operating unit XX Determine the height of the push bar/pad (A) between 900mm and 1100mm from floor level. Mark this position on the jamb adjacent to the door. XX Establish the mounting position for the panic bolt operating unit 10mm from the jamb. Place the template on the door and align the push bar/pad height and the rebate line with the jamb and drill the fixing holes required. Remove the template and temporarily fix the operating unit. XX For Non-Rebated double doors establish the mounting position for the panic bolt operating unit 10mm from the edge of its door leaf. Repeat the process on the second door. A Push Bar / Push Pad centre height: between 900mm & 1100mm B Push Bar length = B - 8mm Step B: Preparing the shoot tubes XX Refer to the diagram on page 10. Follow the correct procedure for your product: For IQ Bar 102 (standard shoot bolts) XX Accurately Measure the Bottom (short) length dimension (C1). XX When using the easy clean socket (G) or the alternative floor plate (not shown) subtract 8mm from length C1 and cut the plain end of the tube to this length. XX When using the surface mounted bottom keep 3405 (supplied separately) subtract 23mm from length C1 and cut the plain end of the tube to this length. XX Drive the bottom (short) shoot end plug No.P0601 into the cut end. XX The plug must be driven in fully against the tube end. XX Accurately Measure the Top (long) length dimension (C2). XX When using the Top trip plate P0401 (as supplied) subtract 54mm from length C2 and cut the plain end of the tube to this length. … Fixing and installation XX XX XX When Using the Surface mounted top keep 3405A (supplied separately) subtract 69mm from length C2 and cut the plain end of the tube to this length. Drive the top (long) shoot end plug No. P0501 into the cut end. The plug must be driven in fully against the tube end. For IQ Bar 102 A (adjustable shoot bolts) XX Accurately Measure the Bottom (short) length dimension (C1). XX When using the easy clean socket (G) or the alternative floor plate (not shown) subtract 66mm from length C1 and cut the plain end of the tube to this length. XX When using the surface mounted bottom keep 3405 (supplied separately) subtract 81mm from length C1 and cut the plain end of the tube to this length. XX Drive threaded shoot bush No. P0164 into the cut end. The Bush must be driven in fully against the tube end. XX Screw bottom (plain) shoot end No. P0162 into the shoot bush leaving a 4mm gap. XX Accurately Measure the Top (long) length dimension (C2). XX When using the Top trip plate P0401 (as supplied) subtract 61mm from length C2 and cut the plain end of the tube to this length. XX When Using the Surface mounted top keep 3405 (supplied separately) subtract 76mm from length C2 and cut the plain end of the tube to this length. XX Drive threaded shoot bush No. P0164 into the cut end. The Bush must be driven in fully against the tube end. XX Screw the top (grooved) shoot end No. P0159 into the shoot bush leaving a 4mm gap. Step C: Fitting the shoot tubes and guides XX Remove the panic bolt operating unit from the door and fit top & bottom shoot tube assemblies to the panic bolt unit spigots and retain with socket head screws positioned adjacent to the door face. XX Position shoot guides No. P0201 on the shoot tubes (for IQ 102 A use guide No. P0206 for the bottom tube). Refit panic bolt unit and fit guides to the door using the round head screws. Shoots must be vertical and panic bolt unit and guides must be in alignment. XX Keeping the operating arm fully depressed locate the top trip assembly No. P1201 on the top shoot end. Use a 3mm thick spacer between the end of the top shoot and the underside of the head frame to ensure that the shoot is fully withdrawn and secure the top trip guide assembly to the door. 10 IQ Bar 100 Series Adjustable bolt with GAP L C1 C2 D E F G H I J K L Bottom shoot tube length Top shoot tube length Top trip plate Tube Guides Socket head screws Easy clean floor socket No. P0301 Main/operating unit Slave unit Top Trip Guide Assembly Bottom Tube guide (P0201 Non-adjustable bolts / P0206 Adjustable bolts) 55mm (Adjustable Bolts & standard keep) 70mm (Adjustable Bolts & surface mounted keep) 44mm (None-adjustable Bolts & standard keep) 59mm (Non-adjustable Bolts & surface mounted keep) Fixing the push bar IQ Bar 100 Series Step D: Fitting the keeps XX The Top Trip Keep Plate P0401 should be fitted flush in the head frame and with its narrow edge level with the frame rebate. Use the short c´sk. head screws provided. XX Easy clean floor socket No. P0301 for solid floors should be fitted flush with the finished floor surface and with its edge level with the inside door face. Alternative floor plate No. P1301 for wooden floors must be fitted flush with the finished floor surface and with its narrow edge level with the door face. XX Operate the panic bolt and ensure that the top trip device holds both shoots in the fully withdrawn position when the door is open. XX Close the door and ensure that the top trip releases the shoots to engage fully in both top and bottom keeps and holds the door firmly closed in its rebate. Step E: Fitting the slave unit & push bar IQ Bar only XX Using the template position the slave unit on the door directly opposite the operating unit and 10mm from the jamb and fix. XX Measure the outside dimension (B) across the operating arms. Subtract 8mm and cut the plain end of the push bar to length. Drill a 10mm dia. hole in the plain end of the push bar on the centre line and 12mm from the end. XX Locate the push bar in the operating arms and ensure that the holes align with the arm clamp screws. Insert the end plugs into both ends of the push bar flush with the operating arms and fully tighten both screws. Fixing and installation Top Trip Keep Plate P0401 Surface mounted bottom bolt keep 3405 surface mounted top trip keep 3405A Step F: Testing the operation XX Test the unit to ensure that when the Push Bar/ Pad is operated the door opens immediately and swings freely. When closed the bolts engage fully in the keeps and holds the door securely shut. Step G: Fitting the name plate and the sign XX Remove backing paper and fit self adhesive body label into the recessed location on the body casting to cover top fixing screws. For push bar: Fit the self adhesive “Push Bar to Open” sign onto the door immediately above the push bar For push pad: Fit the self adhesive “Push Pad to Open” sign onto the door by the push pad. 11 Fixing and installation Outside Access Device 100 K 58 mm The outside access device provides a lockable entry facility for doors fitted with IQ 100 Series. The outside access device always allows immediate exit regardless of whether device is locked or unlocked. For double door installations with rebated meeting door styles, the outside access device must be fitted on the first opening (last closing) door leaf. XX XX XX XX XX 12 Working on the inside face of the door use the template to establish the fixing position for Panic Bolt or Panic latch as described in the appropriate instruction page. In addition using the template mark and drill the drive spindle hole 14mm dia. and two outside access device mounting holes 7mm through and counterbore 14mm dia. x 6mm deep. Trial fit the c‘sk. head mounting screws/ washers and measure the projection on the outside of the door. Adjust the depth of the counterbore to provide 19mm screw projection. If projection exceeds 19mm cut the screw to length. Locate the drive spindle into the square hole in the outside access device. Pass the spindle through the door and fix the body securely. Ensure that the body is square to the edge of the door and that the drive spindle is centred in the hole and that it rotates freely. Ensure that the drive spindle is fully engaged on the outside access device. Cut the spindle so that 13mm projects from the door face. A minimum of 10mm is required for correct operation. Engage the drive spindle with the square hole in the panic bolt/panic latch and install following the appropriate fitting procedure instruction page. Test the operation of the outside access device. To open the door hold the knob to prevent it turning. Insert the key and turn it anti-clockwise one complete revolution (the key can then be removed if required). Rotate the knob until a slight click is felt. Continue to turn the knob approximately ¼ turn to operate the panic bolt/panic latch. To disengage the outside access device hold the knob and turn the key clockwise one revolution and remove. Check for free and correct operation of the outside access device and the panic bolt/panic latch. 100 mm 18 mm 19 mm 13 mm Ø 14 mm XX 71 mm OAD 100 K with Knob (cylinder cannot be removed) 50 mm … .1 18 mm 23 mm Outside Access Device (OAD) … mm 14 mm … IQ Bar 100 Series Dim. A. Push Bar Height IQ Bar 100 Series … .2 OAD 100 K EC with Knob and Euro Cylinder Fixing and installation Outside Access Device 100 K EC 60 mm Step A: Fitting procedure XX XX XX 37 mm 69 mm 93 mm 30 mm 13 mm Ø 14 mm XX 109 mm XX 178 mm XX Working on the inside face of the door use the template to establish the fixing position for Panic Bolt or Panic latch as described in the appropriate instruction page. In addition using the template mark and drill the drive spindle hole 14mm dia. and three outside access device mounting holes 7mm through. Recess the inside face of the door 5mm deep to allow the mounting plate to be fitted. Trial fit the c’sk. head mounting screws and measure the projection on the outside of the door. Cut the screws to provide 30mm maximum projection. Locate the drive spindle into the sguare hole in the outside access device. Pass the spindle through the door and fix the body securely. Ensure that the body is square to the edge of the door and that the drive spindle is centred in the hole and that it rotates freely. Ensure that the drive spindle is fully engaged in the outside access device. Cut the spindle so that 13mm projects from the door face. A minimum of 10mm is required for correct operation. Engage the drive spindle with the square hole in the panic bolt/panic latch and install following the appropriate fitting procedure instruction page. Test the operation of the outside access device. To open the door insert the key and turn it anticlockwise one complete revolution (the key can then be removed if required). Rotate the knob until it engages and continue to turn approximately 1/4 turn to operate the panic bolt/panic latch. To disengage the outside access device turn the key clockwise one revolution and remove. Check for free and correct operation of the outside access device and the panic bolt/panic latch. 36 mm … mm XX Step B: Cylinder preparation This 100 K EC master keying outside access device is normally supplied complete with cylinder lock but for specific applications will accept most 40mm Euro profile cylinders if required. To suit master keying situations the outside access device can be supplied with pre-formed aperture to suit Euro profile cylinder fitting. The cylinder selected should be drilled and tapped M5 as shown. 19,5 mm Step C: Cylinderfitting Place the cylinder into the shaped body aperture and fix securely through the backplate with the c’sk head M5 screw supplied. Dim. A. Push Bar Height Drill and Tap M5 12 mm 13 Fixing and installation … .3 OAD 100 L EC with Lever and Euro Cylinder IQ Bar 100 Series Diagram … Notes on operation Rotate the key anti-clockwise to unlock the device. Rotate the key clockwise to lock the device. In both cases rotate the key until it stops (‚mechanism clicks‘) then counter-rotate to return to the neutral position to remove the key, do not try to continue rotating the key. When locked the operation of the lever is blocked. When unlocked the lever will move freely and operate the panic / emergency exit device installed on the inside of the door. To protect the device against excessive force a shear screw is used to secure the lever. Step A: Device preparation Lever handing XX Attach the lever to the shank in the correct orientation to suit the door handing (see diagram 1). XX Secure to the device with the supplied shear screw. Use the hex key provided. Do not over tighten. Diagram … Setting the drive spindle handing The drive spindle must be set to suit the required handing / type of exit device. Refer to the diagram … to determine the required position. Follow the procedure below to set the handing. XX Ensure device is unlocked. Fully operate the lever & hold in position. The drive spindle will rotate. XX Using one of the square spindles (in screw pack) Continue to turn the drive spindle (in the direction of rotation) towards the required position until it stops. XX Return the lever to the start position. XX Continue to rotate the drive spindle until the mark on the drive spindle lines up with the appropriate mark in the backplate. The drive spindle is now handed. Installation / replacement of cylinder XX Remove the … cylinder bracket screws as shown in diagram 3. Withdraw the cylinder bracket from the unit. XX Change / install the cylinder. Secure cylinder to bracket with the M5 x 20 cylinder screw provided. XX Replace the bracket / cylinder assembly. Re-secure with the cylinder bracket screws. 14 B / L LH position To suit IQ Bar/Pad 102 regardless of door handing and IQ Bar/Pad 101 used on left hand doors L RH position To suit IQ Bar/Pad 101 used on right hand doors Diagram … IQ Bar 100 Series Fixing and installation Step B: Device installation Establish unit position Working on the inside face of the door. Use the template to establish the fixing position of the panic / emergency exit device. Follow the instructions on the template. Determine height 900mm to 1100mm from floor. Align template correctly with the edge of frame (for single door) or the edge of 2nd opening door (for double doors). For existing installations where access device is to be retrofitted remove the exit device and align template with the existing exit device fixing holes. Door preparation XX Pilot the exit device fixing holes. Drill ø16mm spindle hole through the door. XX For timber doors: drill through … off clearance holes for access device fixings. For improved strength the mortice mounting plate can be used. The plate must be mortised flush into door face. XX For steel doors: drill through … off clearance holes for access device fixings. Countersink these holes directly on the inside face of the door. Preparing the fixing screws XX Trial fit the … off M5 x 70 fixing screws. Cut the screws to provide a maximum projection of 15mm from the outside face of the door. Select & prepare spindle XX Select the correct type of spindle to suit the panic / emergency exit device being used. For latch type fit the spindle adaptor (see diagrams). Ensure it is fully inserted into the square drive of the panic / emergency exit latch unit. XX Fit the access device using the previously prepared screws. XX Insert the correct drive spindle through the door and locate into the square drive / adaptor in the access device. XX Mark 13mm projection from the inside door face. Note: when using the mortice mounting plate measure from the face of the door not the plate. XX Cut the spindle to length. De-burr the cut end. Note: cut the square end when using the latch spindle. Plain square (bolt) spindle for shoot bolt versions Reduced end (latch) spindle for latch versions only Install the exit device XX Continue to install the exit device follow the instructions (on the appropriate pages) for that device. Check / test installation XX Test the operation of the finished installation. Check for free and correct operation of both the outside access device and the panic / emergency exit hardware. 15 Replacing the shear screw XX Carefully unscrew the broken shear pin head. Note: use square ended (none ball end) 3mm hex key. XX Pull the lever off to remove (avoid rotating). XX Clear the remaining shear screw from the shank. Note: push out from the none sheared side. XX Inspect the shank & lever for damage. Remove any burrs to allow the lever to re-fit. Note: replacement levers are available. XX Re-fit lever with a new shear screw. 16 Outside Access Device 100 L EC … Notes on installation As part of the requirements of EN1125: 2008 (Panic Exit devices) / EN179: 2008 (Emergency Exit devices) we must provide you with the following additional information. The safety features of this product are essential to its compliance with EN179 / EN1125: 2008. No modifications of any kind, other than described in these instructions are permitted. (Some of the information below may be duplicated in this Installation instructions). àà All devices are suitable for use on double / single doors up to 2440mm x 1220mm, door mass up to 200kg. àà Before fitting an exit device to a door, the door should be checked to ensure correct hanging and freedom from binding. A maximum of 5mm door distortion is allowed. We do not recommend that any of our exit devices be fitted to hollow core doors. It is recommended to verify that the door construction allows the use of the device, i.e. verify that: àà Offset hinges and engaging leaves allow both leaves to be opened simultaneously. àà The gap between door leaves does not differ from that which is specified in the main installation instructions (if stated). àà The operating elements do not interfere. NOTE: Panic / Emergency exit devices manufactured in accordance with EN1125 & EN179 will provide a high degree of safety and reasonable security provided that they are fitted to doors and door frames that are in good condition. àà Before fitting a Panic / Emergency exit device to a fire / smoke resisting door, the fire certification of the fire door assembly on which the exit device has been tested (to prove suitability for use on fire doors) should be examined. It is of utmost importance that an exit device is not used on a fire door assembly of a greater fire resistance time than it is approved for. àà Care should be taken to ensure that any seals or weather-stripping fitted to the complete door assembly, does not inhibit the correct operations of the Panic / Emergency exit device. àà On double door sets with rebated meeting stiles and where both leaves are fitted with Panic / Emergency exit devices, it is essential to check that either leaf will open when its exit device is activated and also that both leaves will open freely when both exit devices are operated simultaneously. àà These Panic / Emergency exit devices are manufacture in one size. àà Category … (standard projection) Panic / Emergency exit devices should be used in situations where there is restricted width for escape, or where the doors to be fitted with the Panic / Emergency exit devices are not able to open beyond 90°. àà Where an exit device is to be fitted to a glazed door, it is essential that the glazing is tempered or laminated glass. àà Different fixings are available for fitting Panic / Emergency exit devices to metal doors, etc. Timber fixings are supplied as standard. Note: Exit devices suffixed ‘SD’ (101 SD) include steel door fixings as standard. àà None of our Panic / Emergency exit devices are intended for use on double action (double swing) doors. àà The fixing instructions should be carefully followed during installation. These instructions should be passed on by the installer to the user. àà The horizontal bar (EN1125 devices) / operating element (EN179 devices) should normally be installed at a height of between 900 mm and 1100 mm from the finished floor level, when the door is in the secured position. Where it is known that the majority of the occupants of the premises will be young children, consideration should be given to reducing the height of the bar / operating element accordingly. àà The horizontal bar should be installed so as to provide the maximum effective length (EN1125 devices) àà When installing (EN179) lever operated Emergency exit devices, particularly on doors with raised or recessed surfaces, consideration should be given to minimizing any potential safety risks, such as the trapping of fingers or clothing. àà The bolt heads / latches and keepers should be fitted to provide secure engagement. Care should be taken to ensure that no projection of the bolt heads / latches, when in the withdrawn position, can prevent the door swinging freely. àà Where exit devices are to be fitted to double doorsets with rebated meeting stiles and self closing devices, a door coordinator device in accordance with EN 1158 should be fitted to ensure the correct closing sequence of the doors. This recommendation is particularly important with regard to fire/smoke resisting door assemblies. àà No additional devices for securing the door in the closed position should be fitted. This does not preclude the installation of self closing devices. àà If a door closing device is to be used to return the door to the closed position, care should be taken not to impair the use of the doorway by the young, elderly and infirm. àà Any keepers or protection plates provided should be fitted in order to ensure compliance with EN1125 / EN179. àà EN1125 Panic exit devices: the provided sign which reads; “Push bar to open” should be affixed on the inside face of the door immediately above the horizontal bar. àà EN179 Emergency exit devices: the provided sign which reads; “Push Pad to open” should be affixed on the inside face of the door immediately above the Push Pad operating element. 17 … Maintenance instructions It is important that all a panic and emergency exit hardware devices are inspected and maintained properly to ensure safety is maintained when exiting a building in any situation. Once the device is fitted regular maintenance is recommended. Weekly: XX Make sure the Exit Device functions correctly. XX Any fixings that have worked loose should be re-secured XX Any damaged components should be replaced. XX Ensure there are no obstructions which prevent the panic unit from functioning correctly. Every three months: XX Check for wear, any visible worn components should be replaced. The following is the routine maintenance procedure as recommended by EN1125 / EN179:XX Inspect and operate the exit device to ensure that all components are in a satisfactory working condition. If possible using a force gauge, measure and record the operating forces to release the exit device. XX Ensure the keeper(s) is (are) free from obstruction. XX Check that the exit device is lubricated in accordance with the producer’s instructions. XX Check that no additional locking devices have been added to the door since its original installation. XX Check periodically that all components of the system are still correct in accordance with the list of approved components originally supplied with the system. XX Check periodically that the operating element is correctly tightened and, If possible using a force gauge, measure the operating forces to release the exit device. Check that the operating forces have not changed significantly from the operating forces recorded when originally installed. … Drilling templates Overview àà Drilling Template … - to fit the operation / slave unit / OAD 100 K onto the door àà Drilling Template … - to fit the outside access device OAD 100 K EC / 100 L EC 18 … EDGE OF DOOR (SINGLE DOOR) / EDGE OF 2ND OPENING DOOR (DOUBLE DOORS) Drilling Template … - to fit the operation / slave unit / OAD 100 K onto the door NOTE:3 HOLES ONLY REQUIRED FOR 100 K OUTSIDE ACCESS DEVICE. … HOLES CSK INSIDE DOOR FACE. EDGE OF DOOR (SINGLE DOOR) / EDGE OF 2ND OPENING DOOR (DOUBLE DOORS) 10mm 10mm 1000mm ± 100mm FROM FLOOR 19 20 EDGE OF DOOR (SINGLE DOOR) / EDGE OF 2ND OPENING DOOR (DOUBLE DOORS) … Drilling Template … - to fit the outside access device 100 K EC / 100 L EC onto the door NOTE:HOLES & RECESS ONLY REQUIRED FOR OUTSIDE ACCESS DEVICE. 1000mm ± 100mm FROM FLOOR EDGE OF DOOR (SINGLE DOOR) / EDGE OF 2ND OPENING DOOR (DOUBLE DOORS) 10mm 10mm LISTED ACCESSORIES Only the accessories listed below can be used with this product range. The use of any other accessory may invalidate the relevant products EN1125 / EN179 CE certification. PRODUCT No. DESCRIPTION COMPATIBILITY 3404 OUTSIDE ACCESS DEVICES Knob operated Outside Access Device Knob operated Outside Access Device with Euro cylinder Knob operated Outside Access Device with Oval aperture (cylinder not supplied) KEEPS Standard Latch Keep – Steel Door (Similar to P1601) 3405 Surface mounted Bottom bolt Keep 3405A Surface mounted Top Trip Keep 300 ED150 Double door latch keep (As Supplied with: IQ Bar 103 DL) Single & Double Door Latch Keep –Surface Mounted. P0401 Standard Top Trip Plate P1301 Standard Floor Plate bolt keep. P1601 Standard Latch Keep – Timber Door (Similar to 3404) 100K 100 K EC 100 L EC (Replaces 3404 / P1601 on single doors. Replaces 300 on double doors.) Use with all GEZE IQ Bar 100 series range for use with IQ Bar 101, IQ Pad 101 on steel doors IQ Pad 102, IQ Bar 102, IQ Bar 104 DL, IQ Bar 103 DL IQ Pad 102, IQ Bar 102, IQ Bar 104 DL, IQ Bar 103 DL IQ Bar 101, IQ Pad 101 IQ Bar 101, IQ Pad 101 IQ Pad 102, IQ Bar 102, IQ Bar 103 DL, IQ Bar 104 DL IQ Pad 102, IQ Bar 102, IQ Bar 103 DL, IQ Bar 104 DL IQ Bar 101, IQ Pad 101 Unless other wise stated compatibility is assumed with all the various suffixed variations (e.g. ‘A’, ‘SD’, ‘MS’) of the basic product. CE MARKING All devices are intended for use on single / double outward opening route escape doors, fire / none-fire rated dependant on device (see below). Where fire rated; devices are certified for use on the following door assemblies for the stated times: 60 minutes on Timber door assemblies (doorsets to EN 1634-1 Codes: TT, ITT and ITC). 240 minutes on Steel door assemblies (doorsets to EN 1634-1 Codes: IMM, and MM). Minimum resistance for all devices: a maximum pulling force of 1000N was achieved against the fixings under the abuse test. Below is the CE marking information for the entire range. Applicable products are clearly listed below their relevant markings. 1121 EN 1125: 2008 PANIC EXIT DEVICES … 7 … B … 3 … 2 A A AAA041 11 1121 EN 179: 2008 PANIC EXIT DEVICES … 7 … B … 3 … 2 B A ABB048 11 Category … Projection. Category … Projection. Field of Door application: Category A (Single & Double) Field of Door application: Category A (Single & Double) Suitable for use on fire / smoke doors. Suitable for use on fire / smoke doors. Applicable to Products: IQ Bar 102, IQ Bar 102A, IQ Bar 101, IQ Bar 104 DL, IQ Bar 103 DL Applicable to Products: IQ Pad 102, IQ Pad 101 GEZE GmbH, Reinhold-Vöster-Str. 21-29, D-71229 Leonberg 21 Notes: 22 Notes: 23 Germany GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Süd-West Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 594 E-Mail: leonberg.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Süd-Ost Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6440 E-Mail: muenchen.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Ost Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6840 E-Mail: berlin.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Mitte/Luxemburg Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6888 E-Mail: frankfurt.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung West Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6770 E-Mail: duesseldorf.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Nord Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6600 E-Mail: hamburg.de@geze.com GEZE Service GmbH Tel. +49 (0) 1802 923392 E-Mail: service-info.de@geze.com Austria GEZE Austria E-Mail: austria.at@geze.com www.geze.at Hungary GEZE Hungary Kft. E-Mail: office-hungary@geze.com www.geze.hu Scandinavia – Sweden GEZE Scandinavia AB E-Mail: sverige.se@geze.com www.geze.se Baltic States – Lithuania / Latvia / Estonia E-Mail: baltic-states@geze.com Iberia GEZE Iberia S.R.L. E-Mail: info.es@geze.com www.geze.es Scandinavia – Norway GEZE Scandinavia AB avd. Norge E-Mail: norge.se@geze.com www.geze.no Benelux GEZE Benelux B.V. E-Mail: benelux.nl@geze.com www.geze.be www.geze.nl India GEZE India Private Ltd. E-Mail: office-india@geze.com www.geze.in Scandinavia – Denmark GEZE Danmark E-Mail: danmark.se@geze.com www.geze.dk Bulgaria GEZE Bulgaria - Trade E-Mail: office-bulgaria@geze.com www.geze.bg Italy GEZE Italia S.r.l E-Mail: italia.it@geze.com www.geze.it Singapore GEZE (Asia Pacific) Pte, Ltd. E-Mail: gezesea@geze.com.sg www.geze.com China GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE Engineering Roma S.r.l E-Mail: italia.it@geze.com www.geze.it South Africa GEZE South Africa (Pty) Ltd. E-Mail: info@gezesa.co.za www.geze.co.za GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Shanghai E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Guangzhou E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Beijing E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn France GEZE France S.A.R.L. E-Mail: france.fr@geze.com www.geze.fr Korea GEZE Korea Ltd. E-Mail: info.kr@geze.com www.geze.com Poland GEZE Polska Sp.z o.o. E-Mail: geze.pl@geze.com www.geze.pl Romania GEZE Romania S.R.L. E-Mail: office-romania@geze.com www.geze.ro Russia OOO GEZE RUS E-Mail: office-russia@geze.com www.geze.ru Switzerland GEZE Schweiz AG E-Mail: schweiz.ch@geze.com www.geze.ch Turkey GEZE Kapı ve Pencere Sistemleri E-Mail: office-turkey@geze.com www.geze.com Ukraine LLC GEZE Ukraine E-Mail: office-ukraine@geze.com www.geze.ua United Arab Emirates/GCC GEZE Middle East E-Mail: gezeme@geze.com www.geze.ae United Kingdom GEZE UK Ltd. E-Mail: info.uk@geze.com www.geze.com GEZE GmbH Reinhold-Vöster-Straße 21–29 71229 Leonberg Germany Tel.: 0049 7152 203 … Fax.: 0049 7152 203 310 www.geze.com
PDF | 1 MB
Installation instructions GEZE SecuLogic FTV 320 escape door lock
DE | Deutsch Produktbeschreibung GB | English Product description Die Fluchttürverriegelung FTV 320 ist Bestandteil des GEZE SecuLogic Rettungswegsystems und dient der Steuerung und Überwachung von elektrisch verriegelten Türen im Verlauf von Flucht-und Rettungswegen. Nach berechtigter Freischaltung oder durch Drücken der Nottaste der GEZE Türzentralen TZ 300 / TZ 320 entriegelt die FTV 320 die Tür elektrisch und gibt diese frei. Sicherheitshinweise GEZE SecuLogic FTV 320 DE Montagehinweise GB Installation instructions FR Consignes de montage Fluchttürverriegelung Emergency exit lock Verrou d‘issue de secours Germany GEZE Sonderkonstruktionen GmbH Planken … 97944 Boxberg-Schweigern Tel. +49 (0) 7930 9294 … Fax +49 (0) 7930 9294 10 E-Mail: sk.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Süd-West Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 594 E-Mail: leonberg.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Süd-Ost Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6440 E-Mail: muenchen.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Ost Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6840 E-Mail: berlin.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Mitte/Luxemburg Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6888 E-Mail: frankfurt.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung West Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6770 E-Mail: essen.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Nord Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6600 E-Mail: hamburg.de@geze.com GEZE Service GmbH Tel. +49 (0) 1802 923392 E-Mail: service-info.de@geze.com China GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn Russia OOO GEZE RUS E-Mail: office-russia@geze.com www.geze.ru GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Shanghai E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn Scandinavia – Sweden GEZE Scandinavia AB E-Mail: sverige.se@geze.com www.geze.se GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Guangzhou E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn Scandinavia – Norway GEZE Scandinavia AB avd. Norge E-Mail: norge.se@geze.com www.geze.no GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Beijing E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn Scandinavia – Denmark GEZE Danmark E-Mail: danmark.se@geze.com www.geze.dk France GEZE France S.A.R.L. E-Mail: france.fr@geze.com www.geze.fr Singapore GEZE (Asia Pacific) Pte, Ltd. E-Mail: gezesea@geze.com.sg www.geze.com Hungary GEZE Hungary Kft. E-Mail: office-hungary@geze.com www.geze.hu South Africa GEZE Distributors (Pty) Ltd. E-Mail: info@gezesa.co.za www.geze.co.za Iberia GEZE Iberia S.R.L. E-Mail: info@geze.es www.geze.es Switzerland GEZE Schweiz AG E-Mail: schweiz.ch@geze.com www.geze.ch India GEZE India Private Ltd. E-Mail: office-india@geze.com www.geze.in Turkey GEZE Kapı ve Pencere Sistemleri E-Mail: office-turkey@geze.com www.geze.com Austria GEZE Austria E-Mail: austria.at@geze.com www.geze.at Italy GEZE Italia S.r.l E-Mail: italia.it@geze.com www.geze.it Ukraine LLC GEZE Ukraine E-Mail: office-ukraine@geze.com www.geze.ua Baltic States GEZE GmbH Baltic States office E-Mail: office-latvia@geze.com www.geze.com GEZE Engineering Roma S.r.l E-Mail: roma@geze.biz www.geze.it United Arab Emirates/GCC GEZE Middle East E-Mail: gezeme@geze.com www.geze.ae Benelux GEZE Benelux B.V. E-Mail: benelux.nl@geze.com www.geze.be www.geze.nl Bulgaria GEZE Bulgaria - Trade E-Mail: office-bulgaria@geze.com www.geze.bg Poland GEZE Polska Sp.z o.o. E-Mail: geze.pl@geze.com www.geze.pl Romania GEZE Romania S.R.L. E-Mail: office-romania@geze.com www.geze.ro GEZE GmbH Reinhold-Vöster-Straße 21–29 71229 Leonberg Germany United Kingdom GEZE UK Ltd. E-Mail: info.uk@geze.com www.geze.com Tel.: 0049 7152 203 … Fax: 0049 7152 203 310 www.geze.com The emergency exit lock FTV 320 is part of the GEZE SecuLogic emergency exit system and is used to control and monitor electrically locked doors on emergency exits. The FTV 320 unlocks the door electrically following authorised activation or by pushing the emergency push button on the GEZE door control units TZ 300 / TZ 320 and releases it. Safety instructions Für die Sicherheit von Personen ist es wichtig, nachstehenden Hinweisen Folge zu leisten. Diese Anweisungen sind aufzubewahren! àà Die FTV 320 ist nach geltenden Normen und Bestimmungen geprüft und als geeignet anerkannt: EltVTR; EN 1670; EN 61000. àà Die Montage an Feuer- und Rauchschutztüren ist nur erlaubt, wenn die Verwendbarkeitsnachweise für diese Türen dieses vorsehen und deren Maßgaben beachtet werden. àà Es sind die Sicherheitshinweise des zugelassenen Rettungswegsystems zu beachten. Produkthaftung 159494-00 FR | Français Description du produit àà Gemäß der im Produkthaftungsgesetz definierten Haftung des Herstellers für seine Produkte sind die hier enthaltenen Hinweise zu beachten. Die Nichtbeachtung entbindet den Hersteller von seiner Haftungspflicht. àà Jede elektrische Verriegelung einer Tür im Verlauf eines Rettungsweges bedarf einer Befreiung von entgegenstehenden Vorschriften im Einzelfall. àà Nur Sachkundige, die von GEZE autorisiert sind, dürfen Montagen, Funktionsprüfungen und Wartungen durchführen. àà Es dürfen keinerlei mechanische oder elektrische Veränderungen vorgenommen werden. Auch das Entfernen oder Austauschen des Stulps schließt jede Haftung von GEZE für daraus resultierende Schäden aus. Montagehinweise Consignes de sécurité générales To ensure personal safety it is important to follow the notes below. These instructions must be kept. àà The FTV 320 has been tested according to applicable standards and stipulations and found to be suitable: EltVTR; EN 1670; EN 61000. àà Installation on fire and smoke protection doors is only permitted if the proofs of application suitability for these doors include this and their specifications are heeded. àà The safety instructions for the approved emergency exit system must be followed. Product liability Technische Daten àà In compliance with the manufacturer’s product liability as defined in the German “Product Liability Act”, the instructions included here must be noted and followed. Failure to comply releases the manufacturer from his statutory liability. àà Every electrical locking of a door on a rescue route must be exempted from contradictory regulations in individual cases. àà Only specialists authorised by GEZE are permitted to carry out installation, function checks and after-sales service maintenance work. àà No mechanical or electrical modifications may be made. GEZE shall not be liable for injuries or damage resulting from the removal or replacement of the front metal. 15,2 x 138,8 x 37,3 24 àà Conformément à la responsabilité du fabricant vis-à-vis de son produit définie dans la loi relative à la responsabilité du fait des produits, les informations contenues dans le présent document doivent être respectées. Le non-respect libère le fabricant de son devoir de responsabilité. àà Chaque verrouillage électrique d’une porte dans une issue de secours nécessite exonération des dispositions contraires au cas pas cas. àà Seules les personnes qualifiées dûment autorisées par GEZE doivent réaliser les opérations de montage, de contrôle du fonctionnement et de maintenance. àà Aucune modification mécanique ou électrique ne doit être apportée. Le retrait ou le remplacement de la battée libère GEZE de son devoir de responsabilité pour les dommages consécutifs. Consignes de montage àà The FTV 320 is installed on the left hand (ISO 6) or right hand (ISO 5) side, horizontally or vertically, in the door leaf or frame. àà The tapered side of the control latch must be pointing in the direction of closing movement when installed. àà Care must be taken that no foreign material or filings get into the locking element. àà The use of lubrication or gliding agents is prohibited. àà Fixing screws are not supplied by GEZE and must be selected according to the specific material. àà The latches of the FTV 320 must be able to engage freely in the strike plate so that the door can close perfectly. àà Genuine GEZE accessories must be used. Technical data Hauptmaße [mm] (B x H x T) Betriebsspannung [V DC] Stromaufnahme [mA] in verriegelten Zustand kurzzeitig bei Verriegelungsvorgang Betriebstemperatur [°C] Pour la sécurité des personnes, il est essentiel de respecter les consignes suivantes. Ces instructions sont à conserver ! àà Le FTV 320 est certifié selon les normes et dispositions applicables et reconnues comme adaptées : EltVTR; EN 1670; EN 61000. àà Le montage sur des portes coupe-feu et pare-fumée n’est autorisé que si ces portes disposent d’une preuve de conformité et que les conditions prévues sont respectées. àà Les consignes de sécurité du système pour issues de secours homologué doivent être respectées. Responsabilité du fait des produits Installation details àà Die Montage der FTV 320 erfolgt DIN links, DIN rechts, waagerecht oder senkrecht, in Türblatt oder -rahmen. àà Die abgeschrägte Seite der Steuerfalle muss beim Einbau in Schließrichtung zeigen. àà Es ist darauf zu achten, dass keine Fremdteile oder Feilspäne in das Verriegelungselement gelangen. àà Das Anwenden von Schmier- oder Gleitmittel ist untersagt. àà Befestigungsschrauben sind nicht im Lieferumfang enthalten und müssen materialspezifisch ausgewählt werden. àà Die Fallen der FTV 320 müssen ungehindert in das Schließblech greifen können, sodass die Tür einwandfrei schließt. àà Es ist original GEZE-Zubehör zu verwenden. Le verrouillage pour issue de secours FTV 320 fait partie du système pour issues de secours GEZE SecuLogic et sert à commander et à contrôler les portes à verrouillage électrique dans les issues de secours. Une fois le déclenchement autorisé ou une fois le bouton de secours enfoncé sur la centrale de la porte GEZE TZ 300 / TZ 320, le système FTV 320 déverrouille la porte et la débloque. àà Le montage du système FTV 320 peut être effectué selon DIN à gauche, selon DIN à droite, à l’horizontale ou à la verticale, dans le vantail de la porte ou dans le dormant. àà Le côté biseauté du pêne de commande doit indiquer le sens de fermeture lors du montage. àà Il est nécessaire de veiller à ce qu’aucune pièce externe et aucun élément de limaille ne se coince dans l’élément de verrouillage. àà L’utilisation de graisse lubrifiante ou de lubrifiant est interdite. àà Les vis de fixation ne sont pas fournies à la livraison et doivent être choisies de façon spécifique en fonction du matériel. àà Les pênes du système FTV 320 doivent pouvoir s’insérer sans obstacle dans la tôle de fermeture afin que la porte puisse se fermer sans difficulté. àà Des accessoires d’origine GEZE doivent être utilisés. Caractéristiques techniques … x … x … 24 100 240 -20/+60 Main dimensions [mm] (W x H x D) Operating voltage [V DC] Current consumption [mA] in locked state briefly during the locking process Operating temperature [°C] 100 240 -20/+60 Dimensions [mm] (L x H x P) Tension de service [V DC] Consommation de courant [mA] dans un état verrouillé À court terme lors du processus de verrouillage Température de service [°C] Eignungsnachweis EltVTR Aufbruchfestigkeit [N] … Fallenvorlast [N] Spaltmaß [mm] 100 240 -20/+60 Suitability certificate EltVTR Certificat de conformité EltVTR Break-open resistance [N] … Résistance à la rupture [N] … Latch sideload [N] … Précontrainte du pêne [N] … 5±2 Gap dimensions [mm] 5±2 Écartement de la fente [mm] 5±2 Weitere Informationen und Support im Internet unter www.geze.com Visit www.geze.com for further information and support. 15,2 x 138,8 x 37,3 24 Plus d‘informations et de conseils sur Internet sur www.geze.com TZ 300 TZ 320 FTV 320 FTV 320 TZ 300 TZ 320 FTV 320 FTV 320 Li-Y(ST)Y … x 0,25 mm2, max. 100 m J-Y(ST)Y … x … x 0,6 mm, max. 100 m TZ 300 / TZ 320 FTV 320 X101 / X106 (orange) + … 5 - … 6 verriegelt / locked / verrouillé 14 24 V DC … 14 Verriegelungszustand Locking mode … État du verrouillage geschlossen / closed / fermé 15 Verriegelung Locking Verrouillage + 24 V - GND Eingang / Input / Entrée COM1 15 Türzustand Door mode … État de la porte COM2 … COM1 SA Sabotage … 1 NO NO optional / en option … 52 53 … 2 NO 2x 5×35 2x M5×20 … 2
PDF | 3 MB
GEZE TZ 300 emergency exit system door control unit
GEZE SECULOGIC TZ300 EN Installation and Commissioning Instructions with Wiring Diagram Emergency Exit System Door Control Unit … SECULOGIC TZ300 Contents … 1. About this document … … . … . … . … . Product description … Related documents … Key to symbols … Abbreviations … 2. Safety and responsibility … … . … . … . General safety instructions . … Target readership and qualifications … Product liability … 3. Installation and assembly … … . … . … . … . … . Preconditions … Installing the flush-mounted door control unit … Fitting the surface-mounted door control unit … Replacing the lock cylinder … 11 Fitting a safety cylinder, length 40/10 … 11 4. Commissioning … 12 … . … . … . … . Preconditions . … 12 Settings … 12 Description of basic functions … 12 Fire detection system (BMA), hazard alert system (GMA), smoke and heat extraction system (RWA) … 13 5. Operation … 14 … . … . … . … . … . … . Controlling door control unit TZ300 with the key switch … 15 Opening doors in emergencies and triggering alarm … 16 Cancelling alarms … 17 Alarm signal … 18 Removing alarms and system faults … 19 Mains failure … 19 6. Wiring diagram … 20 … . … . … . … . … . … . … . … . … . General information … 20 Markings … 20 Current consumption … 20 Door control units … 21 Locking elements … 26 Key switch … 29 Access control … 32 Timer … 33 IQ Lock EM, lever locks … 34 7. … . … . … . Appendix … 36 Commissioning check list … 36 Glossary of terms … 37 Data sheets … 38 SECULOGIC TZ300 … About this document About this document These instructions describe the installation and commissioning of the GEZE TZ300 door control unit. … Product description The GEZE door control unit is part of the SecuLogic emergency exit system. It is designed for controlling and monitoring electrically interlocked emergency exit doors. It secures doors along emergency exit routes against unauthorized access. At the same time the built-in emergency stop pushbutton allows instant passage in the event of an emergency. Through a built-in interface a smoke and heat extraction, burglar alarm or hazard alert system can be connected, which unlocks the door in an emergency to allow an escape from the building. External signal transmitters, such as alarm bells or warning lights can be connected as well as an alarm signalling interface to the building services management system. Built-in buzzers and LEDs provide visual and audible indication when an alarm has been triggered. … Related documents All components are supplied with data sheets containing their technical specifications. These data sheets, as well as further documentation, is available on the Internet under www.geze.de/SecuLogic. … Key to symbols Warning In these instructions, warnings are used to warn against material damage and injuries. XX Always read and observe these warnings. XX Follow all instructions marked with the warning symbol and the word WARNING. Warning symbol Warning WARNING Meaning Danger for people. Serious or fatal injury can occur if these instructions are not observed. Further symbols used in these instructions Important information and technical notes are emphasised to illustrate the correct operation. Symbol Meaning means “Important note” means “Additional information” XX Symbol for a user action. Observe the sequence if there are several action steps. … About this document … Abbreviations Abbreviation AKRR BLE220 BMA FS FTÖ GCDU100 GCDU200 GCFP401 GCRR200 GCVR200 GLT GMA IQ Lock C IQ Lock EL IQ Lock EM IQ Lock M KZF MA500 NC NO NOT320 PSU OKFF RR RWA SCT221 SCT222 SCT320 SHB220 SLE220 SLH220 TZ300S TZ300S ZSU … SECULOGIC TZ300 Meaning Feedback contact interlocked (actuated by the anchor) Flashlight Fire detection system Latch lock Emergency exit door opener Single-door unit Door unit Fingerprint RFiD card reader RFiD card reader Building services management Hazard alert system Self-locking contact lock Self-locking motor lock Self-locking lever lock Self-locking mechanical panic lock Short-term release Holding magnet Floating NC (normally closed) contact Floating NO (normally open) contact Emergency button Power supply unit Upper edge of finished floor “Door closed” feedback contact (actuated through sliders on the latch) Smoke and heat extraction system Key-operated pushbutton, single-pole pushbutton (NO), extendable to single-pole reversing (two NO) Key switch with LED indicator, single-pole reversing (two NO) Key switch, single-pole reversing (two NO) Alarm bell with flashlight Signal lamp Alarm bell Door control unit with key switch (connection through ribbon cable) Door control unit with key switch and built-in PSU Timer SECULOGIC TZ300 … Safety and responsibility Safety and responsibility The GEZE door control unit has been designed according to the latest technical standards and acknowledged safety rules and regulations. Dangers can, nevertheless, occur in its installation and use. You must therefore observe the following instructions. … General safety instructions XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX Installation, commissioning and repairs must be performed only by GEZE-authorized specialists. Use only genuine GEZE parts for repairs. GEZE accepts no liability for damage arising from unauthorized modifications to the installation. Primary building safety measures must be taken by the owner. Cables must be laid according to standards VDE 0100 and VDE 0815. To prevent unauthorized access, never leave the key in the key switch. Doors with electrical locks along escape routes should be inspected annually by a specialist. The specialist must issue a certificate verifying the periodic inspection, which the owner must submit to the building inspectorate on request. The inspection can be performed by a GEZE service technician or a GEZE-authorized service provider as part of a maintenance contract. In addition, GEZE recommends a monthly inspection of the emergency exit system for visible damage and faults by the owner. Any identified damage or faults must be rectified immediately by a GEZE service technician or a GEZE-authorized service provider. Intended use The GEZE door control unit is intended for controlling and monitoring electrically locked emergency exits. Thirdparty products must be used only after consultation with GEZE. Improper use Improper use includes the connection of any products that are not expressly approved by GEZE. … Target readership and qualifications Installation, assembly, commissioning and repairs must be performed only by GEZE-authorized specialists. … Product liability àà According to manufacturers’ liability for their products as defined in the German product liability act, the information contained herein and in the associated installation instructions and wiring diagrams (product information and intended use, incorrect use, product performance, product maintenance, obligation to inform and obligation to provide instruction) must be observed. Non-observation frees the manufacturer from their liability. àà Installation, function testing and maintenance must be performed only by GEZE-authorized personnel. GEZE accepts no liability for damage arising from unauthorized modifications to the installation. àà A combination with third-party devices invalidates GEZE’s warranty. For repair and maintenance, use only original GEZE parts. … Installation and assembly … SECULOGIC TZ300 Installation and assembly Warning! Risk of death through electric shock. XX Installation and assembly must be performed only by GEZE-approved specialist personnel. XX Check that all cables are voltage-free before installation. … Preconditions àà àà àà àà àà … Cables are routed according to GEZE cabling diagram Miniature circuit-breakers as primary, mains-side disconnectors Observation of standards VDE 0100 und VDE 0815 for laying cables Tamper-proof cable routing according to VDE 0833 (surface-mounted cables in steel conduit) For flush-mounted cabling, flush-mounted sockets (depth … mm) at a mounting height of 850 mm from floor surface and up to 1200 mm for the emergency button Installing the flush-mounted door control unit These instructions describe the recommended installation of the a flush-mounted door control unit using the TZ300SN as an example. … 2 … 7 … 6 … 1 … 3 … 5 … 7 … Emergency exit label Frame PSU NET220 Terminal blocks Ribbon cable Control unit with emergency pushbutton TST300 Key switch SCT320 SECULOGIC TZ300 XX XX Installation and assembly Lay mains cable and ribbon cable in the flush-mounted sockets. Connect cable to terminal blocks according to wiring diagram. ,5 62 60 850 - 1200 71 XX XX 71 Connect and fit the PSU. Connect the key switch door control module with the ribbon cable. … Installation and assembly XX SECULOGIC TZ300 Fit the terminal blocks to the back of the door control unit. C D C D XX Fit the door control unit. Fit the green adhesive frame. XX Test the unit’s function. XX … SECULOGIC TZ300 … Installation and assembly Fitting the surface-mounted door control unit … 1 Door control unit TZ300SN … Terminal blocks … XX Open the housing. … Installation and assembly Fit the wall-mounting bracket near the door (height of emergency button: 850 mm – 1200 mm from floor surface). 850 - 1200 XX SECULOGIC TZ300 Take off the mains connection cover. Connect the 230 V cable to the screw terminals of the PSU and refit the cover. XX Connect cable to terminal blocks according to wiring diagram. XX Fit the terminal blocks to the back of the door control unit. XX Secure loose cables with cable ties. XX XX Hook in housing and secure with screws. Fit the cover of the emergency button. XX Test the unit’s function. XX Apply the labels “EMERGENCY” and “Press only in emergency” in the required language on the provided fields on the emergency exit sign. The required adhesive labels are supplied separately in English, French, German and Norwegian. XX XX 10 SECULOGIC TZ300 … Replacing the lock cylinder The lock cylinder must fulfil the following requirements: àà Profile half-cylinder, 40 mm (30/10) àà Eight-way adjustable When the plant is in operation, disable tamper switch. àà To do this, turn key to left for ten seconds. Right LED lights up green. The left LED goes out. Tamper alarm function is disabled for two minutes. XX Take housing off the wall bracket. XX Unscrew key switch. XX Release cap screw and remove the lock cylinder. XX … Fitting a safety cylinder, length 40/10 If using a safety cylinder with 50 mm (40/10), use the spacers between key switch and housing. Fit the spacers before the carrier plate; this moves the complete fixture to the back by 10 mm. The spacer set is not included as standard with the door control unit. The set also contains four longer screws, which must be used instead of the existing screws. XX XX XX XX Replace the lock cylinder. Fit a new lock cylinder and secure with cap screw. Reassemble the door control unit in reverse order to disassembly. Test the unit’s function. 11 Commissioning … Commissioning … Preconditions SECULOGIC TZ300 Doors with electrical locks along escape routes must be taken into operation after the manufacturer has certified their suitability for the intended purpose. In addition, the correct installation and correct function of the electrical lock must be verified by a specialist. … .1 Tamper switch TST300 When operating voltage is applied to the TZ300, a tamper alarm is triggered if the emergency button’s hood is not fitted. … .2 Tamper switch SCT320 (on UP only) When operating voltage is applied to the TZ300, a tamper alarm is triggered if the emergency button’s hood is not fitted. If the tamper switch of the key switch is not to be evaluated, you must fit a jumper between terminals … and 54. … .3 Disabling the tamper alarm For maintenance, the tamper alarm can be disabled for a limited time. To do this, turn the built-in key switch to the left for about ten seconds. This disables the tamper alarm for about two minutes. While it is disabled, the right LED is lit green and the left LED is off. To reenable the tamper alarm before the two minutes are up, turn the built-in key switch to the right. The door control unit is then unlocked. To lock it, turn the key switch to the right again. … Settings No settings can be made or changed on the door control unit. All values, such as short-term release, cancelling, pre-alarm, etc. are permanently set. … Description of basic functions … .1 Short-term release (KZF) Short-term release releases the emergency door protection for a limited time. During this time, access through the door is possible without triggering an alarm. It is activated with the built-in key switch or an external actuator connected to the short-term release input. The short-term release duration is about 20 seconds. … .2 Cancellation of short-term release When short-term release is active, the door locks prematurely when it is closed before the short-term release time has expired. This prevents unauthorized access through the door after an authorized person has gone through. … .3 Retriggering on short-term release If the short-term release function is triggered again while the function is still active, the short-term release period starts again. … .4 Pre-alarm If the door is passed through after the short-term release time has expired, an audible signal is issued to warn the user that the short-term release time has expired. The pre-alarm duration is 60 seconds. If the door is closed while a pre-alarm is active, the door is locked again automatically and the pre-alarm is reset. 12 SECULOGIC TZ300 … .5 Commissioning Door alarm If the pre-alarm time is exceeded, the door alarm is triggered. This must then be reset with the built-in key switch or with a new short-term release command. If the door is closed while the door alarm is active, it locks and can be unlocked again only after the alarm has been reset (except when the emergency button is pressed or emergency unlocking is triggered). The door alarm is also triggered when the door is opened forcefully. … .6 Unlocked The power supply to the locking element is permanently interrupted. The door can be passed through without triggering an alarm. … .7 Locked The locking element is energized through the door control unit. The emergency door protection is active and unauthorized people can open the door only by pressing the emergency button, which triggers an alarm. … .8 Emergency unlocking The TZ300 can be unlocked in an emergency by the fire detection, burglar alarm or hazard alert system. This is a non-safety-relevant interruption of the power supply to the locking element. When the BMA, GMA or RWA signal is cancelled, the alarm is automatically reset after 60 seconds. … .9 Direct unlocking (according to EltVTR) Safety-relevant interruption of the power supply to the electrical lock through an NC contact when the emergency button is pressed. … Fire detection system (BMA), hazard alert system (GMA), smoke and heat extraction system (RWA) … .1 Alarm triggers If the BMA, GMA or RWA signal of a door control unit is applied, it is unlocked and a local alarm is triggered (audible through built-in buzzer and visual through built-in LED). The system remains unlocked as long as the signal is applied and until the alarm has been reset. See … .3, “Resetting the alarm”. The alarm is triggered through a floating NC contact. If no BMA, GMA or RWA exists, a 2K resistor must be fitted across the Fire Detection System input (terminals … and 10, orange terminal field. This is the as-supplied state. If a BMA or GMA system is connected, the 2K resistor at the emergency unlocking input of the TZ300 (terminals … and 10) must be removed and connected in series with the NC contact of the BMA or GMA. … .2 Cable monitoring according to prEN 13637 For installations according to prEN 13637 the cable between fire detection system and door control unit must be monitored. A 2k resistor must be fitted in series with the NC contact at the fire detection system output for this purpose. … .3 Resetting/acknowledging the alarm When the BMA signal is cancelled, the alarm is automatically reset after 60 seconds. The visual and audible signal at the TZ300 goes out and the door control unit locks the door. The system can be reset before the 60 seconds have expired with the built-in key switch of the TZ300. To unlock the system after a reset, turn the key to the left for more than one second. To lock the system after a reset, turn the key to the right. 13 Operation … SECULOGIC TZ300 Operation … 2 … Emergency exit label … Key switch … Control unit with emergency button … “Locked” LED … “Door state” LED … “Alarm” LED … No. … 2 … 14 Indicator Colour Meaning Red Locked Green Unlocked Green flashing (every second) Short-term release Red Door closed Green Door open Yellow Alarm Yellow flashing (every second) Pre-alarm Yellow flashing Fault SECULOGIC TZ300 … Operation Controlling door control unit TZ300 with the key switch Unlocking the door When the system is unlocked, the locking elements are disabled and the door can be opened. XX Turn the key to the left and hold it for about one second. … 1 … LED … lights up green. The door is unlocked. Locking the door When the system is unlocked, the locking elements are enabled and the door can not be be opened. Preconditions: The door is closed; otherwise a pre-alarm is triggered. XX … Turn the key to the right. … 3 LEDs … and … light up red. The door is locked. 15 Operation SECULOGIC TZ300 Unlocking the door temporarily (short-term release = 20 seconds) With the short-term release function, the door can be unlocked with the key switch for 20 seconds. When this time has expired, the door is locked again. àà If the door is not closed after short-term release time has expired, a pre-alarm is issued. àà If the door is closed after the short-term release time has expired, the door is locked again. àà If the short-term release function is triggered again while the function is still active, the short-term release period starts again (is retriggered). Precondition: The door is locked. XX Turn the key to the right. … 2 … LED … flashes green. The door remains unlocked for the set period of 20 seconds. On cancellation the LED lights up red. … Opening doors in emergencies and triggering alarm When the emergency button is pressed the door’s locking elements are de-energized and the door can be opened (direct unlocking). If a connected fire detection or similar system triggers, the locking elements are de-energized automatically to release the door (emergency unlocking). XX … Press the emergency button. … 3 LED … lights up green and LED … lights up yellow. The door is unlocked. The alarm is triggered. 16 SECULOGIC TZ300 … Operation Cancelling alarms Alarms of the door control unit remain active until their cause has been eliminated and the alarm is acknowledged at the door control unit. (Exception: emergency unlocking through BMA,GMA or RWA, after which the alarm is automatically reset after 60 seconds; see section … .3.) … .1 Resetting emergency button When the emergency has passed, the emergency button must be reset. XX Remove emergency button cover. XX Turn emergency button to the right. The emergency button returns to its normal state. XX Refit the cover. XX Acknowledge the alarm. … .2 Acknowledge alarm Precondition: The alarm cause has been eliminated. To acknowledge the alarm and lock the door XX Turn the key to the right To acknowledge the alarm and unlock the door XX Turn the key to the left The door alarm can also be acknowledged through the short-term release input. A tamper alarm can be acknowledged only 30 seconds after the alarm cause has been eliminated. For the duration of the tamper alarm the TZ300 remains locked. It can, however, be unlocked with the emergency button. If the alarm can not be acknowledged with the key switch, a new alarm may be active. If, for example, the cover was not refitted after resetting the emergency button, a tamper alarm is triggered when emergency unlocking is acknowledged, and the door control unit locks the door. This is indicated by a change in the sound of the audible signal. 17 Operation … SECULOGIC TZ300 Alarm signal Misuse of the system and emergency situations are indicated by a built-in buzzer and yellow alarm LED 3. An alarm can, in principle, be acknowledged only when its cause has been removed. Alarm Pre-alarm Alarm LED Alarm bell Yellow flashing light Acoustic signal, … beeps (1 s on, … s off) Door alarm Yellow continuous light Acoustic signal, … seconds continuous Tamper alarm Yellow continuous light Acoustic signal, … beeps Alarm Yellow continuous light Acoustic signal, … seconds continuous - Unlocking through emergency button - Triggering trough BMA/GMA System fault 18 Yellow flashing light No acoustic signal at … second interval SECULOGIC TZ300 … Operation Removing alarms and system faults Alarm state Cause of alarm Pre-alarm Door not closed after unlocking period has expired. No closed signal No closed signal Door alarm Elimination of alarm cause XX XX XX XX Tamper alarm No locked signal Tamper switch of door control unit not closed (on UP only). XX XX XX XX Alarm Key switch tamper switch not closed. Emergency button of TZ300 pressed (direct unlocking). Fuse in TST300 blown. XX XX XX Emergency unlocking through connected BMA, GMA or RWA. XX XX 2K resistor between terminals … and 10 not set and no BMA, GMA or RWA connected. Locking element connected with reversed polarity. Emergency button LED goes on and off. Other LEDs remain off. (With PSUs NET220 und NT19.2-24. With larger PSUs the fuse blows.) Locking element not connected. Jumper on FTÖ331U was not removed. FTÖ332 is connected without RP220. Short-circuit in the supply line of the lockingelement. XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX Controller defective XX Close door. Unlock door. Close door. Check door contact. Check locking element. Close contact. Fit cover. After suppression time,acknowledge alarm. Reset door control unit emergency button. Check fuse. Replace fuse. Check BMA, GMA or RWA and switch off emergency unlocking signal. Check input of affected door control unit. Fit a 2K resistor between terminals … and 10. Immediately isolate from the power supply and connect correctly. Connect locking element. Remove jumper on FTÖ331. Check locking element supply line for short-circuit. Connect FTÖ332 with RP220. Press emergency button. Release (pull out) emergency button. Replace door control unit. When the alarm cause has been remedied, the alarm must be acknowledged with the built-in key switch. … Mains failure When mains power is restored, the door control unit is always in operating state Locked. If an alarm is active when mains power is restored, the door control unit is in operating state Alarm. Operating mode before mains failure Operating mode after mains failure Locked Permanent unlocking Short-term release Alarm Locked Locked Locked Alarm or acknowledge alarm if cause no longer exists 19 Wiring diagram SECULOGIC TZ300 … Wiring diagram … General information Unless otherwise stated, the wiring diagrams apply to surface-mounting versions and flush-mounting versions from TS300, software version … . … Markings The wiring in these wiring diagrams are marked as follows: … Colour Former designation to DIN 47002 New designation to DIN IEC 757 Colour Former designation to DIN 47002 New designation to DIN IEC 757 Black Brown Red Orange Yellow Green sw br rt or ge gn BK BN RD OG YE GN Blue Violet Grey White Pink Turquoise bl vi gr ws rs tk BU VT GY WH PK TQ Current consumption When connecting external devices, observe the overall power consumption. àà Output rating for external devices through standard PSU: àà Flush-mounted version (NET220): 24 V DC, max. 350 mA àà Surface-mounted version (NT19.2-24): 24 V DC, max. 650 mA àà Output rating for external devices through external PSU (Net24-5, Logo): … A … .1 Consumer Consumption in mA (approx.) Consumer Consumption in mA (approx.) Door control unit TZ300 Control module TST300 120 100 Holding magnet MA500 Emergency exit door opener FTÖ331 Emergency exit door opener FTÖ332 Relay card RP220 250 160 105 10 Numerical code lock CTI / CTS V Signal lamp SLE220 Flashlight BLE220 Alarm bell with flashlight Alarm bell SLE220 Key switch with LED SCT222 50 85 90 110 16 30 Single-door unit GCDU100 Door unit GCDU200 Master unit GCMU200 GCMDU200 Master unit GCMU524 30 120 120 120 130 Fingerprint reader GCFP401 Card reader GCRR200 Card reader GCVR200 Smoke switch RS5 200 100 100 19 IQ Lock EM / EM DL, 24 V version IQ Lock EL / EL DL with controller MST210 210 250 Examples for calculating the total power consumption Example 1: Single-leaf emergency door with 1×TZ300SN UP (120 mA), 1× FTÖ331 (160 mA) and 1× SLE220 (85 mA). Total current consumption of all devices = 365 mA; external devices = 245 mA (without TZ300) Conclusion: PSU NET220 with 500 mA of the TZ300SN UP is sufficient. Example 2: Two-leaf emergency door with TZ300SN AP (120 mA), 2× MA500 (250 mA), SCT222 (30 mA) and RP220 (10 mA) IQ Lock EM DL 24V (210 mA) Total current consumption of all devices = 870 mA; external devices = 750 mA (without TZ300) Conclusion: PSU NT19.2-24 with 800 mA of the TZ320SN AP is not sufficient. Solution 1: For IQ Lock EM DL, use separate PSU (NT6.3-24, 260 mA, No. 109637) Solution 2: Use TZ300S without PSU and draw power from external PSU. (e.g. NT24-5, 24 V, … A No. 111182 or Siemens Logo 24 V, … A, No. 078401) 20 SECULOGIC TZ300 … Wiring diagram Door control units Programming interface orange Door LED blue Latch LED Emergency button LED red Tamper switch Buzzer Alarm LEDs … .1 Door control unit TZ300 (terminals, fuses) Fuse Name Value Meaning F1 … A, SMF 125 V, quick-acting 24 V external Operator control and display elements àà Latch LED àà Door LED àà Alarm LED àà Buzzer (75 dB at about 50 cm distance) Technical specifications Current consumption: 100mA Supply voltage for external devices: àà with standard PSU of the TZ300: àà with external PSU: UP: NET220, max. 350 mA; AP: NT19.2-24, max. 650 mA max. 800 mA (use only GEZE-approved PSUs) Terminal assignment Max. cable cross-section for screw and plug-in terminals: … mm² X103 X100 X101 X102 Terminal blade terminal for GEZE key switch red terminal field … 3 orange terminal field … 6 14 15 … 2 … 10 … Blue terminal field … 22 21 20 … Function Supply GND 24 V DC supply Locking element, +, 24 V DC Locking element, -, GND Door locked feedback Door closed feedback 24 V DC 24 V DC Brief unlocking input Emergency unlocking input 24 V DC 24 V DC NO, alarm output Com, alarm output Max. … A, 24 V DC NC, alarm output GND 21 Wiring diagram … .2 SECULOGIC TZ300 Notes about the wiring diagram The notes apply for the following wiring diagram of the various versions of the TZ300. 1) Building mains fuse. 2) The primary and secondary sides must be spatially separated. For the TZ300S the PSU must be fitted externally. 3) TZ300SN UP: Protection class II, PE (protective earth) conductor is not connected. TZ300SN AP: Protection class I with PE conductor testing according to VDE0100. 4) In delivery state the 2K resistor is fitted. When connecting a BMA, GMA or RWA, remove the resistor and connect it in series with the NC contact of the BMA, GMA or RWA (see plan “Emergency unlocking through BMA, GMA or RWA”). 5) Contact closed when door closed. 6) When a GEZE alarm bell or siren is fitted, a jumper must be set. 22 SECULOGIC TZ300 … .3 Wiring diagram Door control unit TZ300S, TZ300SN blue For notes about the wiring diagram, see section … .2 23 Wiring diagram … .4 SECULOGIC TZ300 TZ300SN, TZ300S: Door monitor without locking element For use, for example, as door monitor Function: The door can be opened at any time through the panic handle. Opening the door without authorization triggers the door alarm, which, in turn, triggers a visual and acoustic alarm through the built-in signal generators. The door alarm remains active until the door is closed again and the alarm is reset with the built-in key switch or through the Short-term release input. Authorized access is possible with short-term release function or by permanently unlocking the door. X102 (blue) X100 (red) 24 V DC Lock SCT, KZF, acknowledge Unlock SCT, acknowledge Tamper GEZE SCT320 Key switch X102 or X103 Ribbon cable Connection to TST300 X103 TST300 Plug for GEZE key switch X100 (red terminal strip) Power supply unit Screw terminal Supply GND 24 V DC supply Relay card RP220 Nr. 102355 X101 (orange terminal strip) Locking + Locking Door locked Door contact 24 V DC Door closed 24 V DC Brief unlocking input Emergency unlocking input 24 V DC Temporary unlocking through: - External key switch - Access control - Cylinder contact - Button, etc. Floating NO contact required Caution: Order of terminals not as on terminal strip X102 (blue terminal strip) Alarm output max. … A, 24 V DC Signal lamp Alarm bell Optionally for additional acoustic and/or visual alarm signalling. Observe max. total power consumption of TZ300SN. 24 SECULOGIC TZ300 … .5 Wiring diagram Emergency unlocking through BMA, GMA or RWA For notes about the wiring diagram, see section … .2 25 Wiring diagram … SECULOGIC TZ300 Locking elements If the door has several unlocking elements, connect the coils in parallel and the feedback signal cables in series. (blue) Programming interface red … .1 Holding magnet MA500 (single-leaf doors) TST300 - X101 (orange terminal strip) Locking + Locking Door locked 24 V DC Door closed 5) Door contact 24 V DC … .2 Holding magnet MA500 (two-leaf doors) TST300 – X101 (orange terminal strip) Locking + Locking Door locked 24 V DC Door closed Door contact 26 Door contact SECULOGIC TZ300 … .3 Wiring diagram Emergency door opener TYP331U DIN right/left (single-leaf doors) X101 (orange terminal strip) FTÖ331U Locking + … 1 + Locking - … 2 - Door locked 14 … NO 24 V DC … 7 COM Door closed 15 … NC 24 V DC … 5 NO … COM … NC XX … .4 AKRR RR Caution: Sever red wire jumper (1–7) behind the terminal field of the FTÖ331U. Emergency door opener TYP331U DIN right/left (two-leaf doors) X101 (orange terminal strip) A B FTÖ331U FTÖ331U … 1 + A … + Locking - … 2 - B … - Door locked 14 … NO … NO 24 V DC … 7 COM … COM Door closed 15 … NC … NC … NO … NO … COM … COM … NC … NC Locking + XX … .5 AKRR RR AKRR RR Caution: Sever red wire jumper (1–7) behind the terminal field of the FTÖ331U. Emergency door opener TYP331 DIN right/left (single-leaf doors) FTÖ331 DIN right X101 (orange terminal strip) FTÖ331 DIN left Locking + … 5 + … Locking - … 6 - Door locked 14 … NO 24 V DC … 2 COM Door closed 15 … NC 24 V DC … RD NO GN COM BU NC … + … 1 - 14 … NO … 5 COM … NC RD NO GN COM BU NC 15 AKRR RR For notes about the wiring diagram, see section … .2 27 Wiring diagram … .6 SECULOGIC TZ300 Emergency door opener TYP331 DIN right (two-leaf doors) X101 (orange terminal strip) A B Locking + … 5 + A … + Locking - … 6 - B … - Door locked 14 … NO … NO 24 V DC … 2 COM … COM Door closed 15 … .7 AKRR … NC … NC RD NO RD NO GN COM GN COM BU NC BU NC … + RR A B Locking + … 2 + A Locking - … 1 - B Door locked 14 … NO 24 V DC … 5 COM Door closed 15 … NC RD NO GN COM BU NC AKRR RR Emergency door opener TYP332 (1-leaf doors) X101 (orange terminal strip) Locking + Locking Door closed 24 V DC 24 V DC Door locked Relay card RP220 No. 102355 28 RR Emergency door opener TYP331 DIN left (two-leaf doors) X101 (orange terminal strip) … .8 AKRR … - … NO … COM … NC RD NO GN COM BU NC AKRR RR SECULOGIC TZ300 Wiring diagram … Key switch … .1 Key switch SCT320 to short-term release AS … .2 Key switch SCT220 to short-term release orange terminal strip 24 V DC COM Brief unlocking input Closed on right Closed on left No. 115937, UP Jung AS500, WW No. 094170, UP Jung LS990, stainless steel No. 094012, UP GIRA E2, pure white … .3 Key switch SCT221/SCT to short-term release (orange terminal strip) 24 V DC Brief unlocking input SCT No. 117996 + 024467 UP AS500 SCT No. 117996 + 024467 + 120503 AP AS500 SCT221 No. 054240 + 024467 without PHZ UP SCT221 No. 054532 + 024467 without PHZ AP SCT221 No. 054245 + 024467 with PHZ UP SCT221 No. 054533 + 024467 with PHZ AP No. 094170, UP Jung LS990, stainless steel No. 094012, UP GIRA E2, pure white 29 Wiring diagram … .4 SECULOGIC TZ300 Key switch SCT320 for external control – unlocking, locking, short-term release unlocking and acknowledging alarms Connected through SCT320 of door control unit TZ300 key switch key switch 24 V DC 24 V DC Lock SCT, KZF, acknowledge Lock SCT, KZF, acknowledge Unlock SCT, acknowledge Unlock SCT, acknowledge Tamper Tamper No. 130370, UP GIRA E2, pure white No. 132278, UP GIRA E2, anthracite No. 131984, UP Jung AS500, WW … .5 Key switch SCT220 for external control – unlocking, locking, short-term release and acknowledging alarms Connected through SCT320 of door control unit TZ300 key switch 24 V DC COM Lock SCT, KZF, acknowledge Closed on right Unlock SCT, acknowledge Closed on left Tamper 30 No. 115937, UP Jung AS500, WW No. 094170, UP Jung LS990, stainless steel No. 094012, UP GIRA E2, pure white SECULOGIC TZ300 … .6 Wiring diagram Key switch with indicator SCT222 For connecting the SCT222, relay card RP220 is required in addition. red terminal strip Power supply unit Screw terminal Supply GND 24 V DC supply orange terminal strip Locking + Locking Door locked 24 V DC Door closed 24 V DC Door contact Brief unlocking input Emergency unlocking input 24 V DC Caution: Sever red wire jumper (1–7) behind terminal field of FTÖ331U Caution: Order of terminals not as on terminal strip Relay card RP220 Nr. 102355 blue terminal strip 24 V DC Alarm output max. … A, 24 V DC green-red LED Ribbon cable yellow LED Plug for GEZE key switch right contact Key switch Connection to TST300 24 V DC Lock SCT, KZF, acknowledge Unlock SCT, acknowledge left contact SCT222 UP No. 100064 SCT222 AP No. 100065 Tamper For notes about the wiring diagram, see section … .2 31 Wiring diagram SECULOGIC TZ300 … Access control … .1 Numerical code lock Toplock CTI, CTI B X102 (blue) or X100 (red) X101 (orange terminal strip) Brief unlocking input … .2 Numerical codelock Toplock CTS V, CTS BV Number codelock Toplock CTS V, CTS BV (orange terminal strip) 24 V DC Brief unlocking input 32 Evaluation unit SECULOGIC TZ300 … .3 Wiring diagram Access control Single-door control unit GCDU100 Door control unit GCDU200 (orange terminal strip) 24 V DC Brief unlocking input Optionally the GCDU100 can be supplied with power through the TZ300. Observe total power consumption! X100 (red terminal strip) Supply GND 24 V DC supply … Timer (orange terminal strip) 24 V DC Brief unlocking input Floating NO contact The door control unit is temporarily unlocked for the duration of the contact. 33 Wiring diagram SECULOGIC TZ300 … IQ Lock EM, lever locks … .1 IQ Lock EM power from TZ300 For connecting the IQ Lock EM, relay card RP220 is required in addition. X100 (red terminal strip) Power supply unit Screw terminal Supply GND 24 V DC supply X101 (orange terminal strip) Locking + Locking Door locked 24 V DC Door closed 24 V DC Door contact Brief unlocking input Emergency unlocking input 24 V DC Caution: Sever red wire jumper (1–7) behind terminal field of FTÖ331U Caution: Order of terminals not as on terminal strip Relay card RP220 Nr. 102355 Lock connection cable X102 (blue terminal strip) red wire Magnet + black wire Magnet - red/blue wire COM cylinder contact grey/pink wire NO cylinder contact Temporary unlocking through: - External key switch - Access control - Button, etc. Floating NO contact required Function: When the TZ300 is locked, the outer lever handle of the IQ Lock EM is disengaged. When the TZ300 is temporarily or permanently unlocked, the outer lever handle is engaged. Option 1: When the cylinder contact of IQ Lock is connected to the Temporary Unlocking input, cylinder operation through the key triggers temporary unlocking. At the same time, the TZ300 engages the outer lever handle. *) Observe total power consumption of the TZ300. If necessary, use a separate power supply unit. 34 SECULOGIC TZ300 … .2 Wiring diagram IQ Lock EM power from separate PSU For connecting the IQ Lock EM, relay card RP220 is required in addition. Power supply unit No. 109637 Function: When the TZ300 is locked, the outer lever handle of the IQ Lock EM is disengaged. When the TZ300 is temporarily or permanently unlocked, the outer lever handle is engaged. Option 1: When the cylinder contact of IQ Lock is connected to the Temporary Unlocking input, cylinder operation through the key triggers temporary unlocking. At the same time, the TZ300 engages the outer lever handle. For notes about the wiring diagram, see section … .2 35 Appendix … Appendix … Commissioning check list SECULOGIC TZ300 Yes Power supply OK Upper edge of all emergency buttons between 850 and 1200 mm from floor surface All emergency button labels applied Cables laid according to DIN VDE 0833, tamper-protected All screws of magnet mounting tightened Rubber buffers on screws of magnetic disc OK Magnet surfaces cleaned Door passage lights at least 2000 mm Emergency door opener fitted correctly and tamper-protected All cables connected, exposed cables insulated Emergency button illumination working “Emergency button” function OK Tamper switches working correctly Unlocking through key switch is working correctly Locking through key switch is working correctly Feedback from magnet and/or door opener working correctly Additional door contacts working correctly Door Leaf Open/Closed LED working correctly Door Locked/Unlocked LED working correctly Alarm/Fault LED working correctly 2K resistor correctly set if BMA, GMA or RWA connected Magnets working; door openers are locking All access possibilities OK (access control, etc.) Emergency exit doors OK External key switch OK External alarm generator/alarm generator combination working correctly Uninterruptible power supply working correctly 36 No Not fitted SECULOGIC TZ300 … Appendix Glossary of terms Direct unlocking (according to EltVTR) Safety-relevant interruption of the power supply to the electrical lock through an NC contact when the emergency button is pressed. Unlocking (according to EltVTR) Non-safety-relevant interruption of the power supply to the electrical lock, for example with a key switch. Unlocking (according to EltVTR) Non-safety-relevant interruption of the power supply to the electrical lock, for example by a hazard alert system (GMA) or similar automatic triggering system. Pre-alarm If the door is passed through after the short-term release time has expired, an audible signal is issued to warn the user that the short-term release time has expired. The pre-alarm duration is 60 seconds. If the door is closed while a pre-alarm is active, the door is locked automatically and the pre-alarm is reset. Door alarm If the pre-alarm time is exceeded, the door alarm is triggered. This must then be reset with the built-in key switch or with a new short-term release command. If the door is closed while the door alarm is active, it locks and can be unlocked again only after the alarm has been reset (except when the emergency button is pressed). The door alarm is also triggered when the door is opened forcefully. Cancelling short-term release If the door is closed before the short-term release time has expired, short-term release is terminated and the door locked again. This prevents unauthorized access through the door after an authorized person has passed through it. Retriggering short-term release If the short-term release function is triggered again while the function is still active, the short-term release period starts again. 37 Appendix … Data sheets … .1 Door control unit TZ300 UP Technical specifications Device name Function Dimensions Installation Operating voltage Power consumption Total power consumption Protection class Mounting location Ambient temperature Directives Package content Display elements Fuse 38 SECULOGIC TZ300 Door control unit TZ300 UP Monitoring and controlling an emergency exit door 55 × 55 × 37 (w × h × d) w × h: Button face d: Distance from support ring upper edge to terminal rear edge UP socket, diameter 60 mm, depth … mm 24 V DC (±10 %) 100 mA at 24 V DC (w/o peripherals) … A at 24 V DC (depending on PSU used) II according to EN 60950 (in built-in state) Dry rooms -10 to 50 °C German “Guideline on Electrical Locking Systems of Doors in Escape Routes (EltVTR) – Version December 1997”. Control unit, terminals and replacement fuse Catch LED, door LED, alarm LED, buzzer Buzzer, 75 dB (at about 50 cm distance) F1, … A, SMF 125 V, fast-acting, 24 V, external SECULOGIC TZ300 … .2 Appendix Door control unit TZ300 AP Technical specifications Device name Versions Function Dimensions Installation Operating voltage Power consumption Total power consumption Protection class Mounting location Ambient temperature Directives Package content Display elements Fuse Door control unit TZ300 AP TZ 300SN with built-in key switch and PSU TZ 300S with built-in key switch Monitoring and controlling an emergency exit door 72 × 197 × 88 (w × h × d) Wall mounting Versions with PSU: 230 V, 50 Hz Versions without PSU: 24 V DC (±10 %) 100 mA at 24 V DC (w/o peripherals) Versions with PSU: 800 mA Versions without PSU: Max. 1A (depending on PSU used) Versions with PSU: I according to EN 60950 Versions without PSU: II according to EN 60950 Dry rooms -10 to 50 °C German “Guideline on Electrical Locking Systems of Doors in Escape Routes (EltVTR) – Version December 1997”. Mounting plate, preaasembled housing, mounting accessories, terminals and replacement fuse Catch LED, door LED, alarm LED, buzzer Buzzer, 75 dB (at about 50 cm distance) F1, … A, SMF 125 V, fast-acting, 24 V, external 39 … .3 SECULOGIC TZ300 Emergency exit sign FWS320UP Technical specifications Device name Function Dimensions Installation Mounting location Ambient temperature Package content … .4 In UP socket, 60 mm, depth … mm Dry rooms -10 to 50 °C Emergency exit sign module, green border Key switch SCT320UP Technical specifications Device name Versions Function Dimensions Installation Operating voltage Protection class Mounting location Ambient temperature Package content 40 Emergency exit sign FWS320UP (non-illuminated) Emergency exit label 55 × 55 × 16 (w × h × d) w × h: Emergency exit label d: Distance from support ring upper edge to fitted ribbon cable Key switch SCT320UP White Anthracite Pure white Key switch with tamper monitor 55 × 55 × 41 (w × h × d) w × h: Cover d: Distance from support ring upper edge to fitted terminal In UP socket, 60 mm, depth … mm 24 V DC (±10 %) II according to EN 60950 (in built-in state) Dry rooms -10 to 50 °C Key switch module, terminal and ribbon cable SECULOGIC TZ300 41 42 SECULOGIC TZ300 SECULOGIC TZ300 43 Germany GEZE Sonderkonstruktionen GmbH Planken … 97944 Boxberg-Schweigern Tel. +49 (0) 7930-9294-0 Fax +49 (0) 7930-9294-10 E-Mail: sk.de@geze.com Germany GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Nord/Ost Bühringstraße … 13086 Berlin (Weissensee) Tel. +49 (0) 30-47 89 90-0 Fax +49 (0) 30-47 89 90-17 E-Mail: berlin.de@geze.com Germany GEZE GmbH Niederlassung West Nordsternstraße 65 45329 Essen Tel. +49 (0) 201-83082-0 Fax +49 (0) 201-83082-20 E-Mail: essen.de@geze.com Germany GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Mitte Adenauerallee … 61440 Oberursel (b. Frankfurt) Tel. +49 (0) 6171-63610-0 Fax +49 (0) 6171-63610-1 E-Mail: frankfurt.de@geze.com Germany GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Süd Reinhold-Vöster-Straße 21-29 71229 Leonberg Tel. +49 (0) 7152-203-594 Fax +49 (0) 7152-203-438 E-Mail: leonberg.de@geze.com Germany GEZE Service GmbH Reinhold-Vöster-Straße 25 71229 Leonberg Tel. +49 (0) 7152-9233-0 Fax +49 (0) 7152-9233-60 E-Mail: service-info.de@geze.com Germany GEZE Service GmbH Niederlassung Berlin Bühringstraße … 13086 Berlin (Weissensee) Tel. +49 (0) 30-470217-30 Fax +49 (0) 30-470217-33 E-Mail: service-info.de@geze.com Austria GEZE Austria GmbH Mayrwiesstraße 12 5300 Hallwang b. Salzburg Tel. +43-(0)662-663142 Fax +43-(0)662-663142-15 E-Mail: austria.at@geze.com Baltic States GEZE GmbH Baltic States office Dzelzavas iela 120 S 1021 Riga Tel. +371 (0) 67 89 60 35 Fax +371 (0) 67 89 60 36 E-Mail: office-latvia@geze.com GEZE GmbH P.O.Box 1363 Reinhold-Vöster-Straße 21–29 71229 Leonberg Germany Benelux GEZE Benelux B.V. Leemkuil … Industrieterrein Kapelbeemd 5626 EA Eindhoven Tel. +31-(0)40-26290-80 Fax +31-(0)40-26 290-85 E-Mail: benelux.nl@geze.com Bulgaria GEZE Bulgaria - Trade Representative Office 61 Pirinski Prohod, entrance „B“, 4th floor, office 5, 1680 Sofia Tel. +359 (0) 24 70 43 73 Fax +359 (0) 24 70 62 62 E-Mail: office-bulgaria@geze.com China GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Shuangchenzhong Road Beichen Economic Development Area (BEDA) Tianjin 300400, P.R. China Tel. +86(0)22-26973995-0 Fax +86(0)22-26972702 E-Mail: Sales-info@geze.com.cn China GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Shanghai Unit 25N, Cross Region Plaza No. 899, Ling Ling Road, XuHui District 200030 Shanghai, P.R. China Tel. +86 (0)21-523 40 960 Fax +86 (0)21-644 72 007 E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn China GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Guangzhou Room 17C3 Everbright Bank Building, No.689 Tian He Bei Road 510630 Guangzhou, P.R. China Tel. +86(0)20-38731842 Fax +86(0)20-38731834 E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn China GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Beijing Rm3A02, Building 3, ZhuBang 2000 Business Plaza, No. 98, Balizhuang xili, Chaoyang District, 100025 Beijing, P.R.China Tel. +86-(0)10-8797 5177/-78 Fax +86-(0)10-8797 5171 E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn Iberia GEZE Iberia S.R.L. Pol. Ind. El Pla C/Comerc, 2-22, Nave 12 08980 Sant Feliu de Llobregat (Barcelona) Tel. +34(0)9-02194036 Fax +34(0)9-02194035 E-Mail: info@geze.es India GEZE India Private Ltd. MF2 & 3, Guindy Industrial Estate Ekkattuthangal Chennai - 600 097 Tamilnadu Tel. +91 (0) 44 30 61 69 00 Fax +91 (0) 44 30 61 69 01 E-Mail: office-india@geze.com Italy GEZE Italia Srl Via Giotto, … 20040 Cambiago (MI) Tel. +3902950695-11 Fax +3902950695-33 E-Mail: italia.it@geze.com Italy GEZE Engineering Roma Srl Via Lucrezia Romana, 91 00178 Roma Tel. +3906-7265311 Fax +3906-72653136 E-Mail: roma@geze.biz Kazakhstan GEZE Central Asia 050061, Almaty, Kasakhstan Rayimbek ave. 348, A, office 310 Tel. +7 (0) 72 72 44 78 03 Fax +7 (0) 72 72 44 78 03 E-Mail: office-kazakhstan@geze.com Poland GEZE Polska Sp.z o.o. ul. Annopol 21 03-236 Warszawa Tel. +48 (0)22 440 … 440 Fax +48 (0)22 440 … 400 E-Mail: geze.pl@geze.com Romania GEZE Romania S.R.L. IRIDE Business Park Building nr. 10, level … Str. Dimitrie Pompei nr. 9–9a RO-020335 Bucharest, sector … Tel. +40 (0) 316 201 257 Fax +40 (0) 316 201 258 E-Mail: office-romania@geze.com France GEZE France S.A.R.L. ZAC de l’Orme Rond RN 19 77170 Servon Tel. +33-(0)1-606260-70 Fax +33-(0)1-606260-71 E-Mail: france.fr@geze.com Russian Federation GEZE GmbH Representative Office Russia Kolodesnij pereulok3, str. 25 Office Nr. 5201-5203 107076 Moskau Tel. +7 (0) 49 55 89 90 52 Fax +7 (0) 49 55 89 90 51 E-Mail: office-russia@geze.com Hungary GEZE Hungary Kft. Bartók Béla út 105-113. Budapest H-1115 Tel. +36 (1) 481 4670 Fax +36 (1) 481 4671 E-Mail: office-hungary@geze.com Scandinavia GEZE Scandinavia AB Mallslingan 10 Box 7060 18711 Täby, Sweden Tel. +46(0)8-7323-400 Fax +46(0)8-7323-499 E-Mail: sverige.se@geze.com Tel.: 0049 7152 203-0 Fax.: 0049 7152 203-310 www.geze.com 137352-00 Scandinavia GEZE Norway Industriveien 34 B 2072 Dal Tel. +47(0)639-57200 Fax +47(0)639-57173 E-Mail: norge.se@geze.com Scandinavia GEZE Finland Postbox 20 15871 Hollola Tel. +358(0)10-4005100 Fax +358(0)10-4005120 E-Mail: finland.se@geze.com Scandinavia GEZE Denmark Høje Taastrup Boulevard 53 2630 Taastrup Tel. +45(0)46-323324 Fax +45(0)46-323326 E-Mail: danmark.se@geze.com South Africa DCLSA Distributors (Pty.) Ltd. 118 Richards Drive, Midrand, Halfway House Ext. 111 P.O. Box 7934 Midrand 1685 Tel. +27(0)113158286 Fax +27(0)113158261 E-Mail: info@dclsa.co.za Switzerland GEZE Schweiz AG Bodenackerstrasse 79 4657 Dulliken Tel. +41-(0)62-2855400 Fax +41-(0)62-2855401 E-Mail: schweiz.ch@geze.com Turkey GEZE GmbH Türkiye - İstanbul İrtibat Bürosu Ataşehir Bulvarı, Ata 2/3 Plaza Kat: … D: 84 Ataşehir Kadıköy / İstanbul Tel. + 90 (0) 21 64 55 43 15 Fax + 90 (0) 21 64 55 82 15 E-Mail: office-turkey@geze.com Ukraine Repräsentanz GEZE GmbH Ukraine ul. Vikentiya Hvoyki, 21, office 151 04080 Kiev Tel. +38 (0) 44 49 97 725 Fax +38 (0) 44 49 97 725 E-Mail: office-ukraine@geze.com United Arab Emirates/GCC GEZE Middle East P.O. Box 17903 Jebel Ali Free Zone Dubai Tel. +971(0)4-8833112 Fax +971(0)4-8833240 E-Mail: geze@emirates.net.ae United Kingdom GEZE UK Ltd. Blenheim Way Fradley Park Lichfield Staffordshire WS13 8SY Tel. +44(0)1543443000 Fax +44(0)1543443001 E-Mail: info.uk@geze.com
PDF | 2 MB
Toplock
D 1. Vorbereitung F Türflügel GB I Montageanleitung Schaltschloss 2. Befestigung Blechschraube ST 4,2 x 13mm DIN 7982 Schraube M5 x 12mm DIN 965 3. Schaltschlossachse senkrecht über Achse des Gewindelochs (Treibriegelschloss, Anti-Panik-Gegenkasten) Blindnietmutter M5 nicht im Lieferumfang enthalten 4. Ermittlung der Stangenlänge L Panikgegenkasten Vollblatt Panikgegenkasten Vollblatt mit Stangenantrieb IQ AUT Panikgegenkasten lang Panikgegenkasten lang mit Stangenantrieb IQ AUT L = X - 41 L = X - 604 Panikgegenkasten kurz Panikgegenkasten kurz mit Stangenantrieb IQ AUT L = X - 73 L = X - 636 5. Einschlagen des Gleitstopfens nur im „nichtmontierten“-Zustand. Gewinde am Stangenende nicht beschädigen! 6. Treibriegelstange eindrehen und Schaltschloss montieren. Bei der Montage der Treibriegelstangen muss das Anzugsdrehmoment … - … Nm betragen. 8. Ausrichtung des Schaltschlosses 9. Funktionsprobe L = X - 126 L = X - 672 3-6 mm 7. Bei großer Türluft Stulp unterfüttern Achtung: Schließblech im Bereich des Fallenaufschlages anfasen Zum Einbau des Schaltschlosses dürfen nur Artikel verwendet werden, welche in der Montageanleitung beschrieben sind. Die Anleitungen bzw. Anweisungen müssen vom Monteur an den Benutzer weitergegeben und von diesem bis zum Ende der Nutzung aufbewahrt werden. 1. Die Flügel und der Rahmen des Türelementes müssen aus ausreichend stabilen Werkstoffen (z.B. geschweißter Stahl oder Aluminiumprofil) bestehen. Die Verformung des Türelementes ist so gering zu halten, dass die Funktion der Verschlusselemente nicht beeinträchtigt wird. 2. Es dürfen nur Elemente erstellt werden, deren Flügelhöhe von 3000 mm, Flügelbreite von 1500 mm und Flügelgewicht von 300 kg nicht überschritten wird. 3. Das Verschlusssystem ist nach Feuerwiderstandsklasse EI60 (T60) in zweiflügeligen Stahl- und Aluminiumtüren geprüft. Bei Verklemmung, siehe Abb. … und … 4. Schlüsselbetätigte Halb- oder Doppelzylinder sowie mechanische oder elektronische Knaufzylinder, mit oder ohne Schlüsselbetätigung, haben keinen Einfluss auf die Paniktürfunktion des Schlosses (auch bei steckendem Schlüssel). Lediglich der Knauf eines mechanischen oder elektronischen Knaufzylinders kann in Abhängigkeit von der Knaufform und –größe die Funktion der Stangengriffe beeinflussen. Bei einigen Stangengriffen ist die Gefahr durch Quetschoder Scherstellen gegeben. Deshalb ist es wichtig, dass zwischen der Außenseite des Knaufs bis zum Hebelarm des Stangengriffs, oder eines anderen auslösenden Beschlagteils, ein Freiraum von mindestens 10 mm sichergestellt wird. D GB Installation instructions for switching lock F1. PreparationIof door leaf 2. Fixing self lapping screw screw ST 4,2 x 13mm M5 x 12mm DIN 7982 DIN 965 3. Align axle of switching lock perpendicularly above axle of tapped hole (espagnolette lock, panic keep) riv nut M5 not included 4. Determining the length (L) of the shoot bolt Panic keep full leaf Panic keep full leaf with rod drive IQ AUT Panic keep long Panic keep long with rod drive IQ AUT L = X - 41 L = X - 604 Panic keep short Panic keep short with rod drive IQ AUT L = X - 73 L = X - 636 5. Drive in sliding stopper only in unscrewed status. Do not damage the thread at the end of the bolt 6. Turn shoot bolt in and mount switching lock. During mounting the shoot bolts the locking torque has to be 5-8 Nm. 8. Align switching lock 9. Function test L = X - 126 L = X - 672 3-6 mm 7. Shim forend if there is more door clearance Attention: Chamfer striking plate where latch bolt hits Only use articles which are describe in these instructions. These instructions and directions should be passed to the end user by the installer and keep reliably up to the end of the working life. 1. The leaves and the frame of the door element must be made of sufficiently sturdy materials (e.g. welded steel or aluminum profile). Make sure that any deformation in the door element is kept to a minimum to ensure that the locking element will work properly. 2. The leaf dimensions in the door elements produced may not exceed 3000 mm in height, 1500 mm in width or 300 kg in weight. 3. The locking system complies with fire rating EI60 (T60) for double-leaf steel and aluminum doors. If jammed, see point … and … 4. Key-operated half- or double cylinders as well as mechanical or electronic knob cylinder (with or without key operation) have no effect on the lock’s panic door function (even when the key is inserted). Only the knob of a mechanical or electronic knob cylinder can affect the push bar’s functioning, depending on the knob shape and size. Some push bars pose the risk of pinch or shearing points. That’s why it’s important to keep a clearance of at least 10mm between the outside of the knob up to the lever arm or other activating fitting. Leaving technical details.
PDF | 634 KB
GEZE IQ Bar 300 series panic door hardware
GEZE IQ Bar 300 Series Panic Exit Hardware 143801-01 GB Installation instructions IQ Bar 300 Series Table of Contents … 1 About this document … Product description … Key to symbols … 2 Safety and responsibility … General safety instructions . … Product liability … 3 Product overview … Hardware range … Panic device contents list … Screw pack(s) contents list … 4 Fixing and installation … Introduction … IQ Bar 361 / IQ Bar 361 AL / IQ Bar 391 … IQ Bar 362 V / IQ Bar 362 V AL / IQ Bar 392 V / IQ Bar 364 DL … IQ Bar 363 V / IQ Bar 393 V … 12 Outside Access Devices (Overview) … 14 Fitting the 300 K … 14 Fitting the 300 L EC … 15 … Notes on installation … 17 … Maintenance instructions … 18 … Drilling templates … 18 IQ Bar 300 Series … About this document About this document These instructions describe the installation of the GEZE IQ Panic Exit hardware. … Product description The GEZE IQ Panic Exit hardware devices are designed to give instant escape, when required, by a touch-bar panic device for either standard or flush doors on single or double doors, and can be operated from the outside of the door by an outside access device. When the outside access device is locked the door can still be released from the inside. … Key to symbols Symbols used in these instructions Important information and technical notes are emphasised to illustrate the correct operation. Symbol Meaning means “Important note” means “Additional information” XX … Symbol for a user action. Here you have to take an action. Observe the sequence if there are several action steps. Safety and responsibility The GEZE IQ Panic Exit hardware device has been designed according to the latest technical standards and acknowledged safety rules and regulations. Dangers can, nevertheless, occur in its installation and use. You must therefore observe the following instructions. … General safety instructions àà àà àà àà àà àà Installation, commissioning and repairs must be performed only by GEZE-authorized specialists. Use only genuine GEZE parts for repairs. GEZE accepts no liability for damage arising from unauthorized modifications to the installation. Primary building safety measures must be taken by the owner. Cables must be laid according to standards VDE 0100 and VDE 0815. Doors with electrical locks along escape routes should be inspected annually by a specialist. The specialist must issue a certificate verifying the periodic inspection, which the owner must submit to the building inspectorate on request. The inspection can be performed by a GEZE service technician or a GEZE-authorized service provider. àà In addition, GEZE recommends a monthly inspection of the exit hardware device for visible damage and faults by the owner. Any identified damage or faults must be rectified immediately by a GEZE service technician or a GEZE-authorized service provider. àà In order to meet the CEN European Standards the door and frame should be of good quality and suitable to support the hardware. Improper use Improper use includes the connection of any products that are not expressly approved by GEZE. … Product liability àà According to manufacturers liability for their products as defined in the German product liability act, the information contained herein and in the associated installation instructions and diagrams must be observed. Non-observation frees the manufacturer from their liability. àà Installation, function testing and maintenance must be performed only by GEZE-authorized personnel. GEZE accepts no liability for damage arising from unauthorized modifications to the installation. àà A combination with third-party devices invalidates GEZE’s warranty. For repair and maintenance, use only original GEZE parts. … Product overview IQ Bar 300 Series … Product overview … Hardware range Alarm Wide (900-1200mm) BAR 361 BAR 361 AL Standard IQ Bar 361 AL Touch Bar … Point Panic Latch with alarm IQ Bar 391 Touch Bar … Point Panic Latch BAR 362 V AL BAR 362 V IQ Bar 361 Touch Bar … Point Panic Latch IQ Bar 362 V AL Touch Bar … Point Pullman Catches IQ Bar 392 V Touch Bar … Point Pullman Catches BAR 363 V IQ Bar 362 V Touch Bar … Point Pullman Catches IQ Bar 363 V Touch Bar … Point Pullman Catches IQ Bar 393 V Touch Bar … Point Pullman Catches IQ Bar 363 DL Touch Bar … Point Double Door Set for Rebated Double Doors for doors up to 900mm IQ Bar 361+ IQ Bar 362 V … BAR 362 V BAR 362 V BAR 362 V BAR 361 Double Door Sets IQ Bar 364 DL Touch Bar … Point Double Door Set for Non Rebated Double Doors for doors up to 900mm IQ Bar 362 V + IQ Bar 362 V IQ Bar 300 Series … Product overview Panic device contents list IQ Bar 361 IQ Bar 361 AL IQ Bar 391 Touch bar … IQ Bar 362 V IQ Bar 362 V AL IQ Bar 392 V … IQ Bar 363 V IQ Bar 393 V … (Note: … point unit shown head end will vary dependant on model) Rod covers - … 2 Rods - … 2 Vertical Pullman catches - … 2 supplied separately (see note) Not used with … point units supplied separately (see note) Latch keep … for flush doors 406 B (supplied with various packers) (Note: Suppliied only with double door unit IQ Bar 363 DL otherwise supplied separately) Latch keep … for standard doors … - … Pullman keep … 406 A (Supplied with various packers) - supplied separately supplied separately Pullman keep … - … 2 … Fixing and installation IQ Bar 300 Series Screw D Pozi Countersunk Head Machine Screws (M4 x 6mm) … Screw E Pozi Countersunk Head Machine Screws (M3 x 6mm) … 6 (Note: Suppliied assembled, securing head / pullman covers) … 1 (Note: Suppliied assembled, securing end cap cover) Screw pack(s) contents list IQ Bar 361 IQ Bar 361 AL IQ Bar 391 IQ Bar 362 V IQ Bar 362 V AL IQ Bar 392 V IQ Bar 363 V IQ Bar 393 V Screw A Pozi Countersunk Head Wood Screw (No.8 x … 1/2“) … 13 13 Screw B Pozi-Round-Head Woodscrews (No: … x 1“) … 2 … Nut F Hexagon Nuts (M6) - … 6 „Push bar to open“ sign … 1 … 4 Fixing and installation … Introduction àà àà àà àà àà àà àà These exit devices are suitable for right or left hand opening doors. The 900mm device is for doors measuring up to 2440mm high and 700 to 900mm wide. The 1200mm device is for doors measuring up to 2440mm high and 900 to 1200mm wide. The door must weigh no more than 200kg and be mounted in a good-quality well-made frame. The door/doors should be checked to ensure correct hanging and freedom from binding. Ensure that no weather strips or fixings on the door or door frame stop the device from working properly. If the door is to be fitted with a device which allows you to open it from outside, read the instructions provided with that device. àà All measurements are in millimetres. àà For installation of double door sets refer to the instuctions of the relevant single door units. àà IQ Bar 363 V DL = IQ Bar 361 + IQ Bar 362 V àà IQ Bar 364 V DL = IQ Bar 362 V + IQ Bar 362 V … Step A: Fitting the touch-bar panic device Make sure you have everything on the panic device contents list and the screw pack contents list. Then get together everything you need for the job. You will need the following: àà Tape measure àà A pencil àà Sticky tape (to stick the templates to the door) àà Spirit level àà Pozi head screwdrivers (No.1 & No.2 blades) àà Bradawl àà A drill with 3mm and 19mm bits XX Remove the head cover from the touch bar by removing the two screws D (see diagram 1). Also remove the end cap by taking out the one screw E (see diagram 3). You must use the templates to make sure you fix all the parts of the device in the correct place. XX XX BAR 362 V These units can be fitted on a single door. IQ Bar 361 can be also fitted on the first opening (active) leaf of an IQ Bar 363 DL … point double door set for rebated double doors. In this case a revised fitting position for the unit is however required. BAR 361 IQ Bar 361 / IQ Bar 361 AL / IQ Bar 391 A … Fixing and installation BAR 361 IQ Bar 300 Series A Unit Centre Height: between 900mm & 1100mm Diagram … Diagram … Choose the correct template for your door type: Use Template … for single door arrangements. Use Template … for rebated double door arrangements. Determine the required height of the Touchbar(s) centreline between 900 & 1100mm from the floor. For single doors: XX Follow the instructions on Template … to determine the templates correct orientation and alignment to suit the door stile and handing. Align as appropriate at the required height and stick it to the door. XX Using a bradawl mark the main fixing holes: … holes marked A1 for standard door arrangements or … holes marked A2 for flush door arrangements. Also mark the centre of the correct Ø19mm hole. XX Drill the correct … main fixing holes Ø3mm to suit the supplied wood screws. Drill the Ø19mm hole 16mm deep. For Rebated Double doors (Active Leaf): XX Follow the instructions on Template … to determine the templates correct position and orientation to suit your door handing. Align the template with the edge of the 2nd opening leaf at the required height and stick it to the door. XX Using a bradawl mark the main fixing holes for both devices (6 holes marked A) Also mark the Diagram … (Note: Use No.1 Pozi screwdriver) … Fixing and installation XX centre of the two Ø19mm holes. Drill the … main fixing Ø3mm holes to suit the supplied wood screws. Drill the two Ø19mm x 16mm deep holes. IQ Bar 300 Series Diagram … Flush doors with latch keep … (supplied separately) In case of using an outside access device (OAD) pause the installation of the panic device and fit the OAD before continuing with the installation. Refer to chapter “Outside Access Device (OAD)“. Fitting the touchbar(s): XX Fit the touchbar to the door. Ensure that the touchbar’s protruding drive spindle (see diagram 1) is located in Ø19mm x 16mm deep clearance hole. Secure to the door with … off screw A (see diagram 2) into one of the holes drilled by the template. XX Level the touchbar up across the door using a spirit level. Hold in position and use a bradawl to mark the position of the two holes in the end of the unit as shown in diagram 3. Drill these holes and secure with two off Screws B. XX Secure the touchbar with the remaining two Screws A and tighten all … screws. XX Refit the Head cover and End Cap and secure using the screws as removed in the first step. Diagram … Standard doors with latch keep … (as supplied) For rebated double door arrangements follow the appropriate instructions for the 2nd device to complete its installation however position the device with the holes as drilled with Template 2. Step B: Fitting the keeps For flush doors: XX Position latch keep … (supplied separately) on the door frame with the ‘lip’ against edge of the frame. Centre the keep about the latch (which should be located in the recessed area against the plastic plug). Ensure the antitamper bolt (see diagram 2) is located against one of the flat areas on the latch keep. XX Using a bradawl mark the positions of the fixing holes. Drill the holes and fix in place using the screws provided with the keep (Screws B). Fit and adjust with the packers provided until the correct engagement is achieved. For rebated double doors XX Position latch keep … (supplied in set IQ Bar 363 DL) on last opening door leaf with the ‘lip’ against edge of door. Centre the keep about the latch (which should be located in the recessed area against the plastic plug). Ensure the anti-tamper bolt (see diagram 2) is located against one of the flat areas on the latch keep. XX Using a bradawl mark the positions of the fixing holes. Drill the holes and fix in place using the screws provided with the keep (Screws B). Fit and adjust with the packers provided until the correct engagement is achieved. … For standard doors: XX Position latch keep … against the side face of the frame. Centre the keep around the latch (which should be located in the recess against the plastic plug). Ensure the anti-tamper bolt (see diagram 2) is located against one of the flat areas on the latch keep. XX Using a bradawl, mark the positions of the screw holes. Drill the holes and fix the latch keep in place with two Screws A. Step C: Testing the operation & fitting the sign. XX Test the unit to ensure that when the touch bar is operated the door opens immediately and swings freely. When closed the centre latch engages fully in the keep and holds the door securely shut. XX Fit the green self adhesive ‘Push Bar to Open’ sign onto the door positioned immediately above the touch bar. IQ Bar 300 Series … Fixing and installation IQ Bar 362 V / IQ Bar 362 V AL / IQ Bar 392 V / IQ Bar 364 DL These units can be fitted on a single door. IQ Bar 362 V can be also fitted on the last opening (pasive) leaf of an IQ Bar 363 DL set for rebated double doors or on both leafs of an IQ Bar 364 DL set for non rebated double doors. Step A: Fitting the touch-bar panic device XX Make sure you have everything on the panic device contents list and the screw pack contents list. Then get together everything you need for the job. You will need the following: àà Tape measure àà A pencil àà Sticky tape (to stick the templates to the door) àà Spirit level àà Pozi head screwdrivers (No.1 & No.2 blades) àà Two 10mm Open Ended Spanners. àà Bradawl àà A drill with 3mm and 19mm bits àà A Hacksaw XX Remove the head cover from the touch bar by removing the two screws D (see diagram 1). Also remove the end cap by taking out the one screw E (see diagram 3). You must use the templates to make sure you fix all the parts of the device in the correct place. XX XX A Unit centre height: between 900mm & 1100mm Diagram … Diagram … Choose the correct template for your door type: Use Template … for single door arrangements and non-rebated double door arrangements. Use Template … for rebated double door arrangements. Determine the required height of the Touchbar(s) centreline between 900 & 1100mm from the floor. For single doors: XX Follow the instructions on Template … to determine the templates correct: orientation and alignment to suit the; door stile and handing. Align as appropriate at the required height and stick it to the door. XX Using a bradawl mark the main fixing holes: … holes marked A1 for standard door arrangements or … holes marked A2 for flush door arrangements. Also mark the centre of the correct Ø19mm hole. XX Drill the correct … main fixing holes Ø3mm to suit the supplied wood screws. Drill the Ø19mm hole 16mm deep. Diagram … For Rebated Double doors (Inactive leaf): Note: The Active device should be fitted first. XX Follow the instructions for the Active device. The Inactive units fixing holes are drilled at the same time as those used for the Active device. (Note: Use No.1 Pozi screwdriver) … Fixing and installation For Non-Rebated Double doors: XX Follow the instructions on Template … to determine the templates correct orientation to suit the door handing. Align the template with the edge of the door leaf that the unit is to be fitted to at the required height and stick it to the door. XX Using a bradawl mark the main fixing holes: … holes marked A2. Also mark the centre of the correct Ø19mm hole. XX Drill the … main fixing Ø3mm holes to suit the supplied wood screws. Drill the Ø19mm hole 16mm deep. XX Repeat the process for the other leaf. IQ Bar 300 Series Diagram … Touch bar with Pullman catches and rod covers In case of using an outside access device (OAD) pause the installation of the panic device and fit the OAD before continuing with the installation. Refer to chapter “Outside Access Device (OAD)“. Fitting the touchbar(s): XX Fit the touchbar to the door. Ensure that the touchbar’s protruding drive spindle (see diagram 1) is located in Ø19mm x 16mm deep clearance hole. Secure to the door with … off screw A (see diagram 2) into one of the holes drilled by the template. XX Level the touchbar up across the door using a spirit level. Hold in position and use a bradawl to mark the position of the two holes in the end of the unit as shown in diagram 3. Drill these holes and secure with two off Screws B. XX Secure the touchbar with the remaining two Screws A and tighten all … screws. Diagram … Flush doors with Pullman keep … (406A) (supplied separately) Note: Do not re-fit the head cover at this stage. Step B: Positioning and fitting the pullman catches. XX Remove the covers from the Pullman catches by removing the two screws D. XX Follow the instructions on Template … to determine the templates correct position and alignment to suit your door stile & arrangement. Align as appropriate and stick it to the door. XX Using a bradawl mark the appropriate fixing holes: … holes marked A for each Pullman catch unit. XX Drill the holes Ø3mm to suit the supplied wood screws. XX Fit the Pullman catches. Secure to the door with screws A. Step C: Preparing the rods & rod covers. XX Referring to Template … or … as appropriate and Template … locate the relevant edges marked ‘X’. Top Pullman rod & cover: XX Measure accurately between the edges marked ‘X’ between the Touchbar and the top Pullman catch. 10 Diagram … Standard doors with Pullman keep … IQ Bar 300 Series XX XX Accurately cut one rod cover to this length. From the measured dimension add 20mm and cut the rod to this length. Bottom Pullman rod & cover: XX Repeat the steps above but accurately measuring between the edges on the Touchbar & the bottom Pullman catch. Step D: Fitting the rods & rod covers. XX Refit the Head cover and End Cap and secure using the screws as removed in the first step. XX Screw one off Nut F onto each end of both threaded Rods. Approximately 30mm from each end. Fitting Top Rod: XX Screw one end of the rod into the top Pullman catch until it clears the top bracket on the Touchbar. XX Unscrew the rod from the Pullman catch guiding it through the hole in the top bracket until it is approximately 10mm through the top bracket. At this point hold the top rod up to ensure that the Pullman catch is fully extended. XX XX XX Fixing and installation XX Using a bradawl mark the positions of the fixing holes. Drill the holes and fix in place using the screws provided with the keep (Screws B). Fit and adjust with the packers provided until the correct engagement is achieved. For: standard doors, rebated & non-rebated double doors: XX Position Pullman keep … on the frame / sill / floor as appropriate with the flat face against the door. Centre the keep about the latch (which should be located in the recessed area against the plastic plug). XX Using a bradawl mark the positions of the fixing holes. Drill the holes and fix in place using the screws provided with the keep (Screws A). Step F: Testing the operation & fitting the sign. XX Test the unit to ensure that when the touch bar is operated the door opens immediately and swings freely and when the door is closed the pullman catches engage fully in the keeps and hold the door securely closed. XX Fit the green self adhesive ‘Push bar to open’ sign onto the door positioned immediately above the touch bar. Screw one Nut F onto the end of the rod until it contacts the top bracket. Screw the 2nd Nut F onto the other side of the top bracket. Use … 10mm spanners to tighten. Screw the 3rd Nut F up until it contacts the Pullman catch slide and lock up with 10mm Spanner. Fitting Bottom Rod: XX Repeat the steps above to fit the bottom rod to the bottom Pullman catch and bottom bracket. Ensure that the bottom Pullman catch is fully extended down when fitting. Fitting top rod cover: XX Fit the prepared top rod cover into the top aperture of the head cover. Align with top Pullman catch and hold in place. Retain the rod cover by re-fitting the Pullman cover using the screws removed previously. Fitting bottom rod cover: XX Repeat the previous steps to fit the bottom rod cover. Step E: Fitting the keeps For flush doors: XX Position Pullman keep … (supplied separately) on the frame with the ‘lip’ against edge of frame. Centre the keep about the Pullman latch (which should be located against the plastic plug). 11 Fixing and installation … IQ Bar 300 Series IQ Bar 363 V / IQ Bar 393 V Step A: Fitting the touch-bar panic device XX Make sure you have everything on the panic device contents list and the screw pack contents list. Then get together everything you need for the job. You will need the following: àà Tape measure àà A pencil àà Sticky tape (to stick the templates to the door) àà Spirit level àà Pozi head screwdrivers (No.1 & No.2 blades) àà Two 10mm Open Ended Spanners. àà Bradawl àà A drill with 3mm and 19mm bits àà A Hacksaw XX Remove the head cover from the touch bar by removing the two screws D (see diagram 1). Also remove the end cap by taking out the one screw E (see diagram 3). A Unit centre height: between 900mm & 1100mm Diagram … You must use the templates to make sure you fix all the parts of the device in the correct place. XX XX XX XX Determine the required height of the Touchbar centreline between 900 & 1100mm from the floor. Follow the instructions on Template … to determine the templates correct: orientation and alignment to suit the; door stile and handing. Align as appropriate at the required height and stick it to the door. Using a bradawl mark the main fixing holes: … holes marked A1 for standard door arrangements or … holes marked A2 for flush door arrangements. Also mark the centre of the correct Ø19mm hole. Drill the correct … main fixing holes Ø3mm to suit the supplied wood screws. Drill the Ø19mm hole 16mm deep. Diagram … In case of using an outside access device (OAD) pause the installation of the panic device and fit the OAD before continuing with the installation. Refer to chapter “Outside Access Device (OAD)“. Fitting the Touchbar(s): XX Fit the Touchbar to the door. Ensure that the touchbar’s protruding drive spindle (see diagram 1) is located in Ø19mm x 16mm deep clearance hole. Secure to the door with … off screw A (see diagram 2) into one of the holes drilled by the template. XX Level the Touchbar up across the door using a spirit level. Hold in position and use a bradawl to mark the position of the two holes in the end of the unit as shown in diagram 3. Drill these holes and secure with two off Screws B. XX Secure the Touchbar with the remaining two Screws A and tighten all … screws Note: Do not re-fit the head cover at this stage. 12 Diagram … (Note: Use No.1 Pozi screwdriver) IQ Bar 300 Series Step B: Positioning and fitting the pullman catches. XX Remove the covers from the Pullman catches by removing the two screws D. XX Follow the instructions on Template … to determine the templates correct position and alignment to suit your door stile. Align as appropriate and stick it to the door. XX Using a bradawl mark the appropriate fixing holes: … holes marked A for each Pullman catch unit. XX Drill the holes Ø3mm to suit the supplied wood screws. XX Fit the Pullman catches. Secure to the door with screws A Fixing and installation Diagram … Touch bar with Pullman catches and rod covers Step C: Preparing the rods & rod covers. XX Referring to Template … or … as appropriate and Template … locate the relevant edges marked ‘X’. Top Pullman rod & cover: XX Measure accurately between the edges marked ‘X’ between the Touchbar and the top Pullman catch. XX Accurately cut one rod cover to this length. XX From the measured dimension add 20mm and cut the rod to this length. Bottom Pullman rod & cover: XX Repeat the steps above but accurately measuring between the edges on the Touchbar & the bottom Pullman catch. Diagram … Flush doors with latch keep 406A (supplied separately) Step D: Fitting the rods & rod covers. XX Refit the Head cover and End Cap and secure using the screws as removed in the first step. XX Screw one off Nut F onto each end of both threaded Rods. Approximately 30mm from each end. Fitting Top Rod: XX Screw one end of the rod into the top Pullman catch until it clears the top bracket on the Touchbar. XX Unscrew the rod from the Pullman catch guiding it through the hole in the top bracket until it is approximately 10mm through the top bracket. At this point hold the top rod up to ensure that the Pullman catch is fully extended. XX XX XX Diagram … Standard doors with latch keep … Screw one Nut F onto the end of the rod until it contacts the top bracket. Screw the 2nd Nut F onto the other side of the top bracket. Use … 10mm spanners to tighten. Screw the 3rd Nut F up until it contacts the Pullman catch slide and lock up with 10mm Spanner. Fitting Bottom Rod: XX Repeat the steps above to fit the bottom rod to the bottom Pullman catch and bottom bracket. 13 Fixing and installation Ensure that the bottom Pullman catch is fully extended down when fitting. Fitting top rod cover: XX Fit the prepared top rod cover into the top aperture of the head cover. Align with top Pullman catch and hold in place. Retain the rod cover by re-fitting the Pullman cover using the screws removed previously. Fitting bottom rod cover: XX Repeat the previous steps to fit the bottom rod cover. Step E: Fitting the keeps For flush doors: XX Position Pullman keep … (supplied separately) on the frame with the ‘lip’ against edge of frame. Centre the keep about the Pullman latch (which should be located against the plastic plug). XX Using a bradawl mark the positions of the fixing holes. Drill the holes and fix in place using the screws provided with the keep (Screws B). Fit and adjust with the packers provided until the correct engagement is achieved. XX Position latch keep … (supplied separately) on the door frame with the ‘lip’ against edge of the frame. Centre the keep about the latch (which should be located in the recessed area against the plastic plug). Ensure the anti-tamper bolt (see diagram 2) is located against one of the flat areas on the latch keep. XX Using a bradawl mark the positions of the fixing holes. Drill the holes and fix in place using the screws provided with the keep (Screws B). Fit and adjust with the packers provided until the correct engagement is achieved. For: standard doors: XX Position Pullman keep … on the frame / sill / floor as appropriate with the flat face against the door. Centre the keep about the latch (which should be located in the recessed area against the plastic plug). XX Using a bradawl mark the positions of the fixing holes. Drill the holes and fix in place using the screws provided with the keep (Screws A). XX Position latch keep … against the side face of the frame. Centre the keep around the latch (which should be located in the recess against the plastic plug). Ensure the anti-tamper bolt (see diagram 2) is located against one of the flat areas on the latch keep XX Using a bradawl, mark the positions of the screw holes. Drill the holes and fix the latch keep in place with two Screws A. 14 IQ Bar 300 Series Step F: Testing the operation & fitting the sign. XX Test the unit to ensure that when the touch bar is operated the door opens immediately and swings freely and when the door is closed the centre latch and the pullman catches engage fully in the keeps and hold the door securely closed. XX Fit the green self adhesive ‘Push bar to open’ sign onto the door positioned immediately above the touch bar. … Outside Access Devices (Overview) There are two outside access devices (OAD) available: àà 300 L EC with Lever àà 300 K with Knob. The cylinder in the 300 L EC is changeable. The cylinder In the 300 K cannot be removed. Both of these outside access devices provide a lockable entry facility for doors fitted with IQ Bar 300 Series. Outside access devices always allow immediate exit regardless of whether the device is locked or unlocked. For double door installations with rebated meeting door stiles, the outside access device must be fitted on the first opening (last closing) door leaf. … Fitting the 300 K Step A: Positioning the device XX Working on the inside face of the door establish the position for the Outside Access Device. Single door: Centreline 37mm from the jamb. Flush door: Centreline 26mm from thejamb. Double doors: Centreline 25mm from the last opening door edge. XX Choose the correct template (template 5). Stick the template to the door as explained on that template. Align the template with the touch bar mounting holes and the clearance hole. Mark the positions of the inner top and bottom outside access device mounting holes. XX Drill three 5mm dia fixing holes (Holes B) XX Drill 19mm dia. clearance (Hole A) hole through the door. XX Countersink all three holes (Holes B) 10mm dia. for timber doors (when using the dished washers, for steel doors countersink to suit) on the inside door face. XX Counterbore all three holes (Holes B) from the OUTSIDE of the door 8mm dia. x 22mm deep. (see diagram 1) XX Prepare three M4 c’sk. head screws. Measure the door thickness, subtract 8mm and cut to length (see diagram 1). XX Prepare the drive spindle. Measure the door IQ Bar 300 Series XX XX XX XX Fixing and installation thickness add12mm to this and cut the drive spindle to this length. Fit the drive spindle into the square hole (see diagram 1). Using the dished washers (for timber doors) and two screws. Secure the outside access device to the door using the top inner and bottom centre holes only. Ensure that drive spindle is positioned centrally in the clearance hole and that the body of the outside access device is square to the edge of the door. Install the touch bar panic device. Locate the drive spindle. Use the remaining screw in the top outer fixing hole to secure both the touch bar and the outside access device. Complete the installation of the touch bar as described in the appropriate fitting procedure sheet. Step B: Testing the device Once the panic device has been installed test for free and correct operation of both the outside access device & the panic device/s. … Fitting the 300 L EC Step A: Setting the outside access device’s lever handing The outside access device is supplied with the lever in a neutral position. To set the lever to suit left hand or right hand opening doors follow the procedure below: XX First establish the lever hand required by checking the position on the door. Remove the label from the outside access device and start to rotate the lever towards the required position. Feel the drive assembly engage with aclick, continue to move the lever against spring pressure until it reaches a horizontal position (3 o‘clock or … o‘clock position as required). XX Insert the lever set pin provided through the hole in the back plate situated below the square drive location. Engage the thread and thighten fully. Step B: Re-setting the outside access device’s lever if set the wrong way in error (see diagram 2) XX Operate the cylinder lock key in an anti-clockwise direction to lock the unit (disengage the mechanism).Remove the key. XX Remove the backplate assembly (4 screws).Taking care not to displace the drive spindle from the lever boss. XX Remove the lever set pin (if it has been fitted). XX Look inside the body. Locate the lever drive pin. Depress the spring loaded lever drive pin to disengage the lever from, the sprung disc. XX Gently rotate the lever towards the correct po- XX XX sition until the drive lever drive pin re-engages. Taking care not to rotate the sprung disc. Continue to move the lever against the spring pressure until it’s just past the horizontal position and the lever drive pin engages in the new position. Fit the lever set pin to retain the lever in its new position. Refit the backplate assembly (4 screws). Line up the setting marks on the drive spindle with those on the backplate assembly. Test the operation of the unit. Step C: Changing the cylinder lock To change the cylinder follow the steps below. XX Remove the backplate assembly (4 screws). Taking care not to displace the drive spindle from the lever boss. XX Remove the existing cylinder by removing the screw. Take care not to lose the tubular spacer. XX Place the new cylinder lock flat on the back plate locate the tubular spacer between the cylinder and fixing tag and secure with the screw. XX Refit the backplate assembly and test operation. Step D: Positioning the device XX Working on the inside face of the door establish the position for the Outside Access Device. Single door: Centreline 37mm from the jamb. Flush door: Centreline 26mm from the jamb. Double doors: Centreline 25mm from the last opening door edge. XX Choose the correct template (template 4). Stick 15 Fixing and installation the template to the door as explained on that template. Align the template with the touchbar mounting holes and the clearance hole. Mark the positions of the inner top and bottom outside access device mounting holes. For added security a 5th mounting screw (hole F on the template) is provided for an additional outside access device fixing. However this extra screw is only hidden from view when used in conjunction with two & three point panic units,but is visible on the inside face of the door on single point (latch) versions. XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX Drill four / five (see above) 5mm dia fixing holes (Holes B, C, D, E & F). Drill the 19mm dia. clearance hole through the door (Hole A). Countersink the two inner holes (and the 5th hole if used) 10mm dia. for timber doors (when using the dished washers, for steel doors countersink to suit) on the inside door face (Holes C, D & F). Counterbore both top holes (see diagram A) from the OUTSIDE 8mm dia. x 22mm deep (Holes B & C). Prepare two (short) M4 c’sk. head screws for the top mounting holes (see diagram 3). Measure the door thickness, subtract 5mm and cut to length. Prepare two/three (long) M4 c’sk. head screws for the bottom mounting holes (see diagram 3). Take the door thickness dimension, add 12mm and cut to length. Prepare the drive spindle. Measure the door thickness add 12mm to this and cut the drive spindle to this length. Fit the drive spindle in to the square hole (see diagram 3). Ensure that the setting marks are in alignment. Using dished washers (for timber doors) and one short an one long c’sk. head screw. Secure the outside access device using the inner holes only. Ensure that the drive spindle is positioned centrally in the clearance hole and that the body of the outside access device is square to the edge of the door. Install the touch bar panic device. Locate the drive spindle. Use the two remaining screws, short (top) and long (bottom) in the outer fixing holes to secure both the touch bar and the outside access device. Complete the installation of the touchbar as described in the appropriate fitting procedure sheet. Step H: Testing the device Once the panic device has been installed test for free and correct operation of both the outside access device & the panic device/s. 16 IQ Bar 300 Series IQ Bar 300 Series … Notes on installation Notes on installation As part of the requirements of EN1125: 2008 we must provide you with the following additional information. (Note: some of the information below may be duplicated in this Installation instructions): The safety features of this product are essential to its compliance with EN 1125. No modification of any kind, other than those described in these instructions, are permitted. àà The fixing arrangements for the door types for which the exit device is designed, are specified in this Installation instructions. àà Before fitting an exit device to a door, the door should be checked to ensure correct hanging and freedom from binding. àà A maximum of 5mm door distortion is allowed. àà We do not recommend that any of our exit devices be fitted to hollow core doors. àà It is recommended to verify that the door construction allows the use of the device, i.e. verify that: àà Offset hinges and engaging leaves allow both leaves to be opened simultaneously. àà The gap between door leaves does not differ from that which is specified in the installation instructions. àà The operating elements do not interfere. NOTE: Panic exit devices manufactured in accordance with EN1125 will provide a high degree of safety and reasonable security provided that they are fitted to doors and door frames that are in good condition. àà Before fitting a Panic exit device to a fire / smoke resisting door, the fire certification of the fire door assembly on which the exit device has been tested (to prove suitability for use on fire doors) should be examined. àà It is of utmost importance that an exit device is not used on a fire door assembly of a greater fire resistance time than it is approved for. àà Care should be taken to ensure that any seals or weather-stripping fitted to the complete door assembly, does not inhibit the correct operations of the Panic exit device. àà On double doorsets with rebated meeting stiles and where both leaves are fitted with Panic exit devices, it is essential to check that either leaf will open when its exit device is activated and also that both leaves will open freely when both exit devices are operated simultaneously. àà These Panic exit devices are manufactured in more than one size; it is important that the correct size is selected: àà All versions suitable for use on double / single doors up to 2440mm high, doors mass up to 200kg. àà 900mm device (measures 653mm O/A) suitable for use on doors: 700 to 900mm wide. àà 1200mm device (measures 833mm O/A) suitable for use on doors: 900 to 1200mm wide. àà Category … (standard projection) Panic exit devices should be used in situations where there is restricted width for escape, or where the doors to be fitted with the Panic exit devices are not able to open beyond 90°. àà Where an exit device is to be fitted to a glazed door, it is essential that the glazing is tempered or laminated glass. àà Different fixings are available (on request) for fitting these Panic exit devices to metal doors, etc. Timber fixings are supplied as standard. àà None of our Panic exit devices are intended for use on double action (double swing) doors. àà The fixing instructions should be carefully followed during installation. The instructions should be passed on by the installer to the user. àà The Touchbar should normally be installed at a height of between 900 mm and 1100 mm from the finished floor level, when the door is in the secured position. Where it is known that the majority of the occupants of the premises will be young children, consideration should be given to reducing the height of the bar / operating element accordingly. àà The correct size of Touchbar should be installed to provide the maximum effective length. Note: The size of the Touchbars operating element should be a minimum of 60% of the width of the door face. àà The latches and keepers should be fitted to provide secure engagement. Care should be taken to ensure that no projection of the latches, when in the withdrawn position, can prevent the door swinging freely. àà Where exit devices are to be fitted to double doorsets with rebated meeting stiles and self closing devices, a door coordinator device in accordance with EN 1158 should be fitted to ensure the correct closing sequence of the doors. This recommendation is particularly important with regard to fire/smoke resisting door assemblies. àà No additional devices for securing the door in the closed position should be fitted. This does not preclude the installation of self closing devices. àà If a door closing device is to be used to return the door to the closed position, care should be taken not to impair the use of the doorway by the young, elderly and infirm. àà Any keepers or protection plates provided should be fitted in order to ensure compliance with EN1125. àà The provided sign which reads; “Push bar to open” should be affixed on the inside face of the door immediately above the Touchbar. 17 Maintenance instructions … IQ Bar 300 Series Maintenance instructions It is important that all a panic and emergency exit hardware devices are inspected and maintained properly to ensure safety is maintained when exiting a building in any situation. Once the device is fitted regular maintenance is recommended. Weekly: XX Make sure the Exit Device functions correctly. XX Any fixings that have worked loose should be re-secured XX Any damaged components should be replaced. XX Ensure there are no obstructions which prevent the panic unit from functioning correctly. Every three months: XX Check for wear, any visible worn components should be replaced. The following is the routine maintenance procedure as recommended by EN1125 XX Inspect and operate the exit device to ensure that all components are in a satisfactory working condition. If possible using a force gauge, measure and record the operating forces to release the exit device. XX Ensure the keeper(s) is (are) free from obstruction. XX Check that the exit device is lubricated in accordance with the producer’s instructions. XX Check that no additional locking devices have been added to the door since its original installation. XX Check periodically that all components of the system are still correct in accordance with the list of approved components originally supplied with the system. XX Check periodically that the operating element is correctly tightened and, If possible using a force gauge, measure the operating forces to release the exit device. Check that the operating forces have not changed significantly from the operating forces recorded when originally installed. … Drilling templates Overview àà àà àà àà àà 18 Drilling Template … - for fitting Touchbar unit onto single doors - 19 Drilling Template … - for fitting Touchbar units onto rebated double doors - 20 Drilling Template … - for fitting Pullman catches (all door types) - 21 Drilling Template … - for fitting the Lever 300 L EC Outside Access Device (OAD) - 22 Drilling Template … - for fitting the Lever 300 K EC Outside Access Device (OAD) - 23 A2 26 mm EDGE OF NON-REBATED DOUBLE DOOR LEAF THAT UNIT IS FITTED TO EDGE OF FLUSH DOOR FRAME / A2 FOR PULLMAN UNITS ONLY MEASURE FROM THE EDGE MARKED 'X' ON THE TOUCHBAR TO THE CORRESPONDING EDGE ON THE PULLMAN CATCH UNIT (SEE TEMPLATE 3) REFER TO THE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS TO USE THESE MEASUREMENTS TO DETERMINE THE ROD & COVER LENGTHS. 900 to 1100mm FROM FLOOR THIS SIDE THIS WAY UP FOR: RIGHT HAND FLUSH DOOR / NON-REBATED DOUBLE DOOR LEAF (HINGED ON LEFT, OPENING OUTWARDS) X A2 19 mm x 16mm DEEP. X 11 mm (HINGED ON RIGHT, OPENING OUTWARDS) X A1 19 mm x 16mm DEEP. (HINGED ON LEFT, OPENING OUTWARDS) THIS SIDE THIS WAY UP FOR: RIGHT HAND STANDARD DOOR X 900 to 1100mm FROM FLOOR FOR FITTING TOUCHBAR UNIT ON SINGLE DOORS AND NON-REBATED DOUBLE DOORS. THIS SIDE THIS WAY UP FOR: LEFT HAND FLUSH DOOR / NON-REBATED DOUBLE DOOR LEAF TEMPLATE … FOR FITTING TOUCHBAR UNIT ON SINGLE DOORS AND NON-REBATED DOUBLE DOORS. THIS SIDE THIS WAY UP FOR: LEFT HAND STANDARD DOOR (HINGED ON RIGHT, OPENING OUTWARDS) A1 A1 FOR PULLMAN UNITS ONLY MEASURE FROM THE EDGE MARKED 'X' ON THE TOUCHBAR TO THE CORRESPONDING EDGE ON THE PULLMAN CATCH UNIT (SEE TEMPLATE 3) REFER TO THE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS TO USE THESE MEASUREMENTS TO DETERMINE THE ROD & COVER LENGTHS. 37 mm 22 mm TEMPLATE … EDGE OF STANDARD DOOR FRAME 19 900 to 1100mm FROM FLOOR (ACTIVE LEAF HINGED ON RIGHT, OPENING OUTWARDS) INACTIVE (2PT) DEVICE ONLY MEASURE FROM THE EDGES MARKED 'X' ON THE TOUCHBAR TO THE CORRESPONDING EDGES ON THE PULLMAN CATCH UNIT (SEE TEMPLATE 3) REFER TO INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS TO USE THIS TO DETERMINE ROD & COVER LENGTHS. A 19 mm x 16mm DEEP. THIS WAY UP FOR: REBATED DOUBLE DOOR ARRANGEMENT WITH LEFT HAND ACTIVE (1ST OPENING) LEAF. 26 mm X A A X FOR FITTING TOUCHBAR UNITS ON REBATED DOUBLE DOORS A A 35 mm 50 mm TEMPLATE … TEMPLATE … FOR FITTING TOUCHBAR UNITS ON REBATED DOUBLE DOORS THIS WAY UP FOR: REBATED DOUBLE DOOR ARRANGEMENT WITH RIGHT HAND ACTIVE (1ST OPENING) LEAF. 11 mm (ACTIVE LEAF HINGED ON LEFT, OPENING OUTWARDS) INACTIVE (2PT) DEVICE ONLY MEASURE FROM THE EDGES MARKED 'X' ON THE TOUCHBAR TO THE CORRESPONDING EDGES ON THE PULLMAN CATCH UNIT (SEE TEMPLATE 3) REFER TO INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS TO USE THIS TO DETERMINE ROD & COVER LENGTHS. A 19 mm x 16mm DEEP. 900 to 1100mm FROM FLOOR EDGE OF INACTIVE (2ND OPENING) LEAF MEASURE FROM THE EDGES MARKED 'X' ON THE PULLMAN CATCH UNIT TO THE CORRESPONDING EDGE ON THE TOUCHBAR (SEE TEMPLATE … / 2) REFER TO THE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS TO USE THESE MEASUREMENTS TO DETERMINE THE ROD & COVER LENGTHS. FOR FITTING PULLMAN CATCHES (ALL DOOR TYPES) TEMPLATE … EDGE OF FLUSH SINGLE DOOR FRAME A X X A EDGE OF FLUSH SINGLE DOOR FRAME A A EDGE OF FLUSH FRAME / SILL 50 mm EDGE OF STANDARD SINGLE DOOR FRAME 26 mm 37 mm EDGE OF FLUSH FRAME / SILL 13 mm A A 23 mm EDGE OF STANDARD FRAME / SILL / FLOOR 50 mm EDGE OF STANDARD SINGLE DOOR FRAME 13 mm REBATED DOUBLE DOOR: EDGE OF INACTIVE (2nd OPENING) DOOR LEAF 26 mm 37 mm EDGE OF STANDARD FRAME / SILL / FLOOR 23 mm A A X X EDGE OF LEFT HAND STANDARD DOOR FRAME (FOR REFERANCE) 22 E B A F D C USE FOR LEFT HAND DOOR TEMPLATE … PREPARE SQUARE SPINDLE: MEASURE DOOR THICKNESS ADD 12mm. CUT SPINDLE TO THIS LENGTH. PREPARE TWO / THREE LONG SCREWS: MEASURE DOOR THICKNESS ADD 12mm. CUT SCREWS TO THIS LENGTH. USE IN HOLES: E, D & F (IF USED) PREPARE TWO SHORT SCREWS: MEASURE DOOR THICKNESS SUBTRACT 5mm. CUT SCREWS TO THIS LENGTH. USE IN HOLES: B & C HOLES B & C: FROM OUTSIDE FACE OF DOOR COUTERBORE HOLES Ø8 x 22mm DEEP. HOLES C, D & F (IF USED): ON INSIDE FACE OF DOOR COUTERSINK HOLES Ø10mm. HOLES B, C, D, E & F (IF USED): DRILL Ø5mm THROUGH THE DOOR. HOLE A: DRILL ONE HOLE Ø19mm THROUGH THE DOOR. IMPORTANT: PLEASE REFER TO THE INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE USE OF HOLE F USE THIS WAY UP ON INSIDE FACE OF DOOR FOR FITTING 300 L EC LEVER OUTSIDE ACCESS DEVICE D C A F E B USE FOR RIGHT HAND DOOR EDGE OF LEFT HAND STANDARD DOOR FRAME (FOR REFERANCE) EDGE OF LEFT HAND STANDARD DOOR FRAME (FOR REFERANCE) 23 B B A B USE FOR LEFT HAND DOOR TEMPLATE … PREPARE SQUARE SPINDLE: MEASURE DOOR THICKNESS ADD 14mm. CUT SPINDLE TO THIS LENGTH. PREPARE THREE SCREWS: MEASURE DOOR THICKNESS SUBTRACT 8mm. CUT SCREWS TO THIS LENGTH. HOLES B: DRILL Ø5mm THROUGH THE DOOR. ON INSIDE FACE OF DOOR COUTERSINK Ø10mm. FROM OUTSIDE FACE OF DOOR COUTERBORE Ø8 x 22mm DEEP. HOLE A: DRILL ONE HOLE Ø19mm THROUGH THE DOOR. USE THIS WAY UP ON INSIDE FACE OF DOOR FOR FITTING 300 K KNOB OUTSIDE ACCESS DEVICE B A B B USE FOR RIGHT HAND DOOR EDGE OF LEFT HAND STANDARD DOOR FRAME (FOR REFERANCE) LISTED ACCESSORIES Only the accessories listed below can be used with this product range. The use of any other accessory may invalidate the relevant products EN1125 CE certification. PRODUCT No. DESCRIPTION 406A OUTSIDE ACCESS DEVICES Knob operated Outside Access Device Lever operated Outside Access Device with Euro cylinder KEEPS Pullman Latch Keep for flush doors / frames 406B Centre Latch Keep for rebated double / flush doors 3402 Standard Pullman Latch Keep 4401 Standard Centre Latch Keep 300 K 300 L EC COMPATIBILITY use with all GEZE IQ Bar 300 series range Use with: IQ Bar 362 V, IQ Bar 392 V, IQ Bar 363 V, IQ Bar 393 V, IQ Bar 362 AL, IQ Bar 363 DL, IQ Bar 364 DL Use with: IQ Bar 361, IQ Bar 391, IQ Bar 363 V, IQ Bar 393 V As supplied with IQ Bar 363 DL IQ Bar 362 V, IQ Bar 392 V, IQ Bar 363 V, IQ Bar 393 V, IQ Bar 362 AL, IQ Bar 363 DL, IQ Bar 364 DL As supplied with: IQ Bar 361, IQ Bar 391, IQ Bar 363 V, IQ Bar 393 V Unless other wise stated compatibility is assumed with all the various suffixed variations (e.g. ‘AL’ & ‘MS’) of the basic product. CE MARKING All devices are intended for use on single / double outward opening route escape doors, fire / none-fire rated dependant on device (see below). Where fire rated; devices are certified for use on the following door assemblies for the stated times: 60 minutes on Timber door assemblies (doorsets to EN 1634-1 Codes: TT, ITT and ITC). 240 minutes on Steel door assemblies (doorsets to EN 1634-1 Codes: IMM, and MM). Minimum resistance for all devices: a maximum pulling force of 1000N was achieved against the fixings under the abuse test. Below is the CE marking information for the entire range. Applicable products are clearly listed below their relevant markings. 1121 EN 1125: 2008 PANIC EXIT DEVICES … 7 … B … 3 … 2 B A AAA042 11 Category … Projection. Field of Door application: Category A (Single & Double) Suitable for use on fire / smoke doors. Applicable to Products: IQ Bar 361, IQ Bar 391, IQ Bar 362 V, IQ Bar 392 V, IQ Bar 363V, IQ Bar 393 V, IQ Bar 361 AL, IQ Bar 362 AL, IQ Bar 363 DL, IQ Bar 364 DL GEZE GmbH, Reinhold-Vöster-Str. 21-29, D-71229 Leonberg The product codes listed above refer to the Exidor OEM product model numbers. These are as appear on the main installation instruction sheet. It is taken as read that these also include all the suffixed versions of the basic models for: ‘AL’ (alarm), ‘MS’ (microswitch) where applicable. These are as listed on the relevant CE certificates. FDMI-0035-400-1 Issue2 24 25 26 27 Germany GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Süd-West Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 594 E-Mail: leonberg.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Süd-Ost Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6440 E-Mail: muenchen.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Ost Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6840 E-Mail: berlin.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Mitte/Luxemburg Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6888 E-Mail: frankfurt.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung West Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6770 E-Mail: duesseldorf.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Nord Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6600 E-Mail: hamburg.de@geze.com GEZE Service GmbH Tel. +49 (0) 1802 923392 E-Mail: service-info.de@geze.com Austria GEZE Austria E-Mail: austria.at@geze.com www.geze.at Hungary GEZE Hungary Kft. E-Mail: office-hungary@geze.com www.geze.hu Scandinavia – Sweden GEZE Scandinavia AB E-Mail: sverige.se@geze.com www.geze.se Baltic States – Lithuania / Latvia / Estonia E-Mail: baltic-states@geze.com Iberia GEZE Iberia S.R.L. E-Mail: info.es@geze.com www.geze.es Scandinavia – Norway GEZE Scandinavia AB avd. Norge E-Mail: norge.se@geze.com www.geze.no Benelux GEZE Benelux B.V. E-Mail: benelux.nl@geze.com www.geze.be www.geze.nl India GEZE India Private Ltd. E-Mail: office-india@geze.com www.geze.in Scandinavia – Denmark GEZE Danmark E-Mail: danmark.se@geze.com www.geze.dk Bulgaria GEZE Bulgaria - Trade E-Mail: office-bulgaria@geze.com www.geze.bg Italy GEZE Italia S.r.l E-Mail: italia.it@geze.com www.geze.it Singapore GEZE (Asia Pacific) Pte, Ltd. E-Mail: gezesea@geze.com.sg www.geze.com China GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE Engineering Roma S.r.l E-Mail: italia.it@geze.com www.geze.it South Africa GEZE South Africa (Pty) Ltd. E-Mail: info@gezesa.co.za www.geze.co.za GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Shanghai E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Guangzhou E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Beijing E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn France GEZE France S.A.R.L. E-Mail: france.fr@geze.com www.geze.fr Korea GEZE Korea Ltd. E-Mail: info.kr@geze.com www.geze.com Poland GEZE Polska Sp.z o.o. E-Mail: geze.pl@geze.com www.geze.pl Romania GEZE Romania S.R.L. E-Mail: office-romania@geze.com www.geze.ro Russia OOO GEZE RUS E-Mail: office-russia@geze.com www.geze.ru Switzerland GEZE Schweiz AG E-Mail: schweiz.ch@geze.com www.geze.ch Turkey GEZE Kapı ve Pencere Sistemleri E-Mail: office-turkey@geze.com www.geze.com Ukraine LLC GEZE Ukraine E-Mail: office-ukraine@geze.com www.geze.ua United Arab Emirates/GCC GEZE Middle East E-Mail: gezeme@geze.com www.geze.ae United Kingdom GEZE UK Ltd. E-Mail: info.uk@geze.com www.geze.com GEZE GmbH Reinhold-Vöster-Straße 21–29 71229 Leonberg Germany Tel.: 0049 7152 203 … Fax.: 0049 7152 203 310 www.geze.com
PDF | 1 MB
Installation instructions GEZE IQ Bar 200 series Panic & emergency exit Push-bar
GEZE IQ Bar 200 Series Panic & Emergency Exit Hardware 143800-01 GB Installation instructions IQ Bar 200 Series Table of Contents … 1 About this document … Product description … Key to symbols … 2 Safety and responsibility … General safety instructions . … Product liability … 3 Product overview … Technical parts list … Hardware range … 4 Fixing and installation … … .1 … .2 Introduction … IQ Bar 201/ IQ Pad 201 … IQ Bar 202 V A / IQ Bar 203 V A / IQ Pad 202 V A / IQ Bar 204 V DL … IQ Bar 203 H / IQ Pad 203 H … 12 IQ Bar 202 V … 14 Lever 200 L - Outside Access Device (OAD) … 16 Preparing the device … 17 Fitting the device … 17 … Notes on installation … 19 … Maintenance instructions … 20 … Drilling templates … 21 … Drilling Template 0071 - Main Unit / Slave Fitting Template … 22 Drilling Template 0072 - Flush Doors / 1st Opening Double Door … 23 Drilling Template 0073 - Vertical Pullman Catches Fitting Template … 24 Drilling Template 0074 - Horizontal Pullman Catches Fitting Template … 25 Drilling Template 0075 - Lever 200 L - Template for positioning optional 3rd aditional fixing hole … 26 IQ Bar 200 Series … About this document About this document These instructions describe the installation of the GEZE IQ Panic & Emergency Exit hardware. … Product description The GEZE IQ Panic & Emergency Exit hardware devices are designed to give instant escape, when required, by means of either a push bar or push pad on single or double doors, and can be operated from the outside of the door by an outside access device. When the outside access device is locked the door can still be released from the inside. … Key to symbols Symbols used in these instructions Important information and technical notes are emphasised to illustrate the correct operation. Symbol Meaning means “Important note” means “Additional information” XX … Symbol for a user action. Here you have to take an action. Observe the sequence if there are several action steps. Safety and responsibility The GEZE IQ Panic & Emergency Exit hardware device has been designed according to the latest technical standards and acknowledged safety rules and regulations. Dangers can, nevertheless, occur in its installation and use. You must therefore observe the following instructions. … General safety instructions àà àà àà àà àà àà Installation, commissioning and repairs must be performed only by GEZE-authorized specialists. Use only genuine GEZE parts for repairs. GEZE accepts no liability for damage arising from unauthorized modifications to the installation. Primary building safety measures must be taken by the owner. Cables must be laid according to standards VDE 0100 and VDE 0815. Doors with electrical locks along escape routes should be inspected annually by a specialist. The specialist must issue a certificate verifying the periodic inspection, which the owner must submit to the building inspectorate on request. The inspection can be performed by a GEZE service technician or a GEZE-authorized service provider. àà In addition, GEZE recommends a monthly inspection of the exit hardware device for visible damage and faults by the owner. Any identified damage or faults must be rectified immediately by a GEZE service technician or a GEZE-authorized service provider. àà In order to meet the CEN European Standards the door and frame should be of good quality and suitable to support the hardware. Improper use Improper use includes the connection of any products that are not expressly approved by GEZE. … Product liability àà According to manufacturers liability for their products as defined in the German product liability act, the information contained herein and in the associated installation instructions and diagrams must be observed. Non-observation frees the manufacturer from their liability. àà Installation, function testing and maintenance must be performed only by GEZE-authorized personnel. GEZE accepts no liability for damage arising from unauthorized modifications to the installation. àà A combination with third-party devices invalidates GEZE’s warranty. For repair and maintenance, use only original GEZE parts. … Product overview IQ Bar 200 Series … Product overview … Technical parts list 10 15 … 8 14 17 16 … Adjustable Shoot Bolt Vertical Pullman catches Horizontal Pullman catches … 4 … 6 … 5 … Push Bar … 4 … Push Pad 1. Oval push bar 2. Top shoot tube 3. Bottom shoot tube 4. Tube guide 5. Push bar main unit 6. Slave unit 7. Push pad main unit 8. Shoot bush 9. Top trip guide 10. Top shoot end plug 11. Bottom shoot end plug 12. Adjustable bottom tube guide 13. Alternative floor plate 14. Vertical pullman catch cover 15. Vertical pullman latch 16 Horizontal pullman latch 17 Horizontal pullman catch cover IQ Bar 200 Series Hardware range Horizontal Pullman Catches IQ BAR 202 V A Push Bar … Point Panic Bolt adjustable shoot bolts IQ BAR 203 H Push Bar … Point Panic Bolt horizontal pullman catches IQ BAR 202 V Push Bar … Point Panic Bolt vertical pullman catches BAR 203 V A IQ BAR 201 Push Bar … Point Panic Latch Vertical Pullman Catches BAR 202 V BAR 201 BAR 202 V A Adjustable Bolts BAR 203 H Single Door Sets Centre Latch PAD 201 PAD 203 H IQ BAR 203 V A Push Bar … Point Panic Bolt adjustable shoot bolts IQ PAD 201 Push Pad … Point Emergency Exit Latch IQ PAD 202 V A Push Pad … Point Emergency Exit Bolt adjustable shoot bolts IQ PAD 203 H Push Pad … Point Emergency Exit Bolt horizontal pullman catches IQ Bar 203 V DL Push Bar … Point Double Door Set for rebated double doors BAR 202 V A BAR 202 V A BAR 202 V Double Door Sets BAR 201 … Product overview IQ Bar 204 V DL Push Bar … Point Double Door Set for non rebated double doors IQ Pad 203 V DL Push Pad … Point Double Door Set for rebated double doors … Fixing and installation IQ Bar 200 Series … Fixing and installation … Introduction àà This exit devices are suitable for right or left hand opening doors of up to 2440mm (8’) high x 1220mm (4’) wide. àà The door must weigh no more than 200kg and be mounted in a good quality well made frame. àà The door/doors should be checked to ensure correct hanging and freedom from binding. àà It is not recommended that the exit device is fitted to hollow core doors. àà The exit devices are not intended for use on double action (double swing) doors. àà Ensure that no weather strips or fixings on the door or door frame stop the device from working properly. àà If the door is to be fitted with a device which allows you to open it from outside, read the instructions provided with that device. àà All measurements are in millimetres. àà For installation of double door sets refer to the instuctions of the relevant single door units. àà IQ Bar 203 V DL àà IQ Bar 204 V DL àà IQ Pad 203 V DL … = IQ Bar 201 = IQ Bar 202 V A = IQ Pad 201 + IQ Bar 202 V + IQ Bar 202 V A + IQ Pad 202 V A A These units can be fitted on a single door or on the first opening (active) leaf of one of the following rebated double doors sets. àà Set IQ Bar 203 V DL together with IQ Bar 202 V fitted on the last opening (inactive) leaf. àà Set IQ Pad 203 V DL with IQ Pad 202 V A fitted on the last opening (inactive) leaf. If the unit is to be fitted on double rebated doors a revised fitting position for the unit is however required as shown in these installation instructions. BAR 201 IQ Bar 201/ IQ Pad 201 A … Fixing and installation PAD 201 IQ Bar 200 Series 22mm 22mm 22mm Step A: Preparing the device XX Hand the main unit by removing the packaging and gently rotate the arm in the required direction (see diagram Step G) until it clicks. The unit is now handed. If handed incorrectly by mistake refer to Step G. XX Remove the mounting plate from the bottom of the main operating unit (pull out). Step B: Fitting the mounting plate XX Determine the centre height (A) of the unit between 930mm and 1130mm from floor level. Mark this position on the edge of the door frame on both sides of the inside of the door. For double doors also mark this position on the edge of the inactive leaf. Note: The centre of the Push Bar/Pad will fall approximately 30mm below this. XX XX XX Starting at the opening edge, place the template (DT-0071) on the door and slide into the jamb rebate (you may need to cut or fold the template) align with the unit centre line and the jamb line and stick to the door with sticky tape. For rebated double doors align the correct line on the double door template (DT-0072) with the edge of the inactive leaf and the unit centre line. Mark the positions of the holes for the mounting plate. Follow the instructions on the relevant template and drill the required holes. Fix the mounting plate to the door. All … fixing holes must be used and screw heads must not project above plate. IQ Bar 201 only XX Hand the slave, same process as the main unit (Step A), but the opposite hand. XX Repeat the steps above to fit the slave unit mounting plate to the hinge side of the door. Fix this mounting plate to the door also using all … fixing screws. In case of using an outside access device (lever) pause the installation of the exit device and fit the lever before continuing with the installation. Refer to chapter “Lever 200 L - (OAD) C B A B C D E Unit Centre Height: between 930mm & 1130mm Oval Push Bar Length = B + 61mm Centre Latch Keep No. 0140 Distance from the edge of the last opening leaf to Tube Centre Line = minimum 50mm Rebated Double Door Keep No. 0144 B 22mm 10mm D 22mm E … Fixing and installation Step C: Fitting the main operating unit Rotate the mounting plate cam to the correct position (see template) and fit the main operating unit onto the mounting plate. XX Secure using … off M5 x … CSK Screws provided. Step D: Fitting the keep Single door XX With the door closed, position the included centre latch keep No. 0140 (C) centred about the latch with the flat face against the door face. XX Mark the positions of the fixing holes. XX Fix in place using the countersunk screws provided. Rebated Double doors XX For rebated double doors use the included keep No. 0144 (E). Position on last opening leaf with ‘lip’ against edge of door and centre about the latch (see diagram). XX Mark the positions of the fixing holes. XX Fix in place using the screws provided. XX Fit as shown and adjust with the packers provided until the correct engagement is achieved. Step E: Fitting the slave unit & oval cross bar IQ Bar 201 only XX Temporarily fit the slave unit onto the mounting plate. XX Measure accurately the arm gap (B) (see diagram) add 61mm to this dimension and cut oval cross bar to this length. XX Remove slave unit from its mounting plate insert one end of oval cross bar into the main unit arm and the other into the slave unit arm. XX Refit the slave unit onto the mounting plate and secure using three of M5x8 CSK Screws provided. XX Secure the cross bar with the two of M4x6 set screws one in each arm. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN Step F: Testing the operation & fitting the sign. XX Test the unit to ensure that when the Push Bar/ Pad is operated the door opens immediately and swings freely. When closed the centre latch engages fully in the keep and holds the door securely shut. XX Fit the green self adhesive ‘Push Bar to Open’ / ‘Push Pad to Open’ sign onto the door positioned immediately above the Push Bar/Pad. … IQ Bar 200 Series Step G: Re-Handing the unit (If required) If either unit is handed the wrong way in error, please follow these instructions. XX Turn the unit upside down & pull out the mounting plate to remove it (if required) XX Slide a small flat bladed screwdriver into the smaller bit of the large aperture along the inside face of the steel chassis inserting it between the chassis and the handing cam (see the diagram). XX Gently lever the cam forward until it disengages from the arm spindle. XX Rotate the arm to re-hand the unit the required way (ensure the cam is fully engaged). 22mm A BAR 203 V A A These units can be fitted on a single door or in one of the following double door sets: àà Set IQ Bar 204 V DL with IQ Bar 202 V A fitted on both leafs of non rebated double doors. àà Set IQ Pad 203 V DL with IQ Pad 202 V A fitted on the last opening (inactive) leaf of double rebated doors together with IQ Bar 201 on the first opening (active) leaf. In this case a revised fitting position for this unit is however required, which is shown in the relevent section of these instructions relating to that device. BAR 202 V A IQ Bar 202 V A / IQ Bar 203 V A / IQ Pad 202 V A / IQ Bar 204 V DL A … Fixing and installation PAD 202 V A IQ Bar 200 Series 22mm 22mm Step A: Preparing the device XX Hand the main unit by removing the packaging and gently rotate the arm in the required direction (see diagram Step I) until it clicks. The unit is now handed. If handed incorrectly by mistake refer to Step I. XX Remove the mounting plate from the bottom of the main operating unit (pull out). XX XX XX A Unit Centre Height: between 930mm & 1130mm B Oval Push Bar Length = B + 61mm Starting at the opening edge, place the template (DT-0071) on the door and slide into the jamb rebate (you may need to cut or fold the template) align with the unit centre line and the jamb line and stick to the door with sticky tape. For Non-Rebated double doors align the correct line on the template (DT-0071) with the edge of its door leaf. Repeat the process on the second door. Mark the positions of the holes for the mounting plate. Follow the instructions on the relevant template and drill the required holes. Fix the mounting plate to the door. Repeat the process on the second door. All … fixing holes must be used and screw heads must not project above plate. IQ Bar 202 V A & 203 V A only XX Hand the slave, same process as the main unit (Step A), but the opposite hand. XX Repeat the steps above to fit the slave unit mounting plate to the hinge side of the door. Fix this mounting plate to the door also using all … fixing screws. BAR 202 V A XX B BAR 202 V A Step B: Fitting the mounting plate XX Determine the centre height (A) of the unit between 930mm and 1130mm from floor level. Mark this position on the edge of the door frame on both sides of the inside of the door. For double doors also mark this position on the edge of the inactive leaf. Note: The centre of the Push Bar/Pad will fall approximately 30mm below this. B 22mm 22mm 22mm 22mm … Fixing and installation In case of using an outside access device (lever) pause the installation of the exit device and fit the lever before continuing with the installation. Refer to chapter Lever 200 L - (OAD) Step C: Preparing the shoot tubes. Rotate the mounting plate cam to the correct position (see template) and fit the main unit onto the mounting plate. XX Temporarily secure using one of the supplied M5 x … CSK screws. XX Measure accurately the bottom length (F) (from bottom spigot shoulder to floor / frame / face of keep), subtract 70mm and cut the plain end of the shorter tube to this length. XX Drive one of the threaded bushes into cut end of this tube. Bush must be driven in fully against the tube end. Screw in the bottom (plain) shoot end plug, leaving an 8mm Gap. XX Measure accurately the top length (G) (from top spigot shoulder to frame / face of keep), subtract 66mm and cut the plain end of the longer tube to this length. XX Drive the second threaded bush into cut end of this tube. Bush must be driven in fully against the tube end. Screw in the top (grooved) shoot end plug, leaving an 8mm gap. Step D: Fitting the shoot tubes, bottom guides & main operating unit. XX Remove the main operating unit from the door. XX Fit the previously prepared top & bottom shoot tubes (section B) onto the operating unit’s shoot spigots. Secure with the M5x10 cap head screws provided, with the screw heads facing the door face. XX Slide one standard (narrow) guide onto the top tube. XX Slide one standard (narrow) guide followed by the wide guide onto the bottom tube. XX Ensure the mounting plate cam is in the correct position (approximately … o’clock or 10 o’clock position, dependant on handing, see template). XX Fit unit back onto the mounting plate and secure using … M5x8 CSK Screws provided. XX Locate the adjustable bottom tube guide the correct distance from the floor / frame (see diagram) and secure using the round headed screws provided. XX Locate the bottom middle guide equidistant on the tube (see diagram) and secure using the round headed screws provided. Ensuring the tube is vertical and the guides are in alignment. 10 IQ Bar 200 Series 3mm D 8mm GAP. K K C D E F G H I J K Adjustable Bottom Tube Guide Top Trip Guide Centre Latch Keep (IQ Bar 203 V A only) Bottom Shoot Tube Length Top Shoot Tube Length Top Trip Plate Easy Clean Socket Centre Latch (IQ Bar 203 V A only) Tube Guides IQ Bar 200 Series Step E: Fitting the top trip & top guide. XX Keeping the operating arm fully depressed. Locate the top trip guide device on the top shoot end plug. Use a 3mm thick spacer between the end of the top shoot and the underside of the frame / face of keep, to ensure that the shoot is fully withdrawn. Secure top trip guide to door using the round headed screws provided. XX Locate the top middle guide equidistant on the tube (see diagram) and secure using the round headed screws provided. Ensuring the tube is vertical and the guide and top trip are in alignment. XX Operate the exit device to ensure the top trip guide holds both shoots in the fully withdrawn position when the door is open. Step F: Fitting the keeps. XX Fit the top trip plate (H) morticed flush into the frame, with its narrow edge level with the door rebate (see diagram). Fix with the short (3/4” Long) countersunk screws provided. XX For solid floors fit the easy clean socket. Fit flush with the finished floor surface with its edge level with the inside door face. For wooden floors fit the alternative floor plate. Fit flush with the finished floor surface with the narrow edge level with the inside door face. Fixing and installation Step H: Testing the operation & fitting the sign. Test the unit to ensure that when the Push Bar/ Pad is operated the door opens immediately and swings freely. When the door is open the shoots are held fully withdrawn and when closed the shoots (and centre latch if present) engage fully in their keepers and hold the door securely closed. XX Fit the green self adhesive ‘Push Bar to Open’ / ‘Push Pad to Open’ sign onto the door positioned immediately above the Push Bar/Pad. Step I: Re-Handing the unit (If required) If either unit is handed the wrong way in error, please follow these instructions. XX Turn the unit upside down & pull out the mounting plate to remove it (if required) XX Slide a small flat bladed screwdriver into the smaller bit of the large aperture along the inside face of the steel chassis inserting it between the chassis and the handing cam (see the diagram). XX Gently lever the cam forward until it disengages from the arm spindle. XX Rotate the arm to re-hand the unit the required way (ensure the cam is fully engaged). XX IQ Bar 203 V A only XX With the door closed, position the centre latch keep (E) centred about the latch (J) with the flat face against the door face. Mark the positions of the fixing holes. Fix in place using the countersunk screws provided.“ XX Step G: Fitting the slave unit & oval cross bar. IQ Bar 202 V A & 203 V A only XX Temporarily fit the slave unit onto the mounting plate. XX Measure accurately the Arm Gap B (see diagram) add 61mm to this dimension and cut oval cross bar to this length. XX Remove slave unit from its mounting plate insert one end of oval cross bar into the main unit arm and the other into the slave unit arm. XX Refit the slave unit onto the mounting plate and secure using three of M5x8 CSK Screws provided. XX Secure the cross bar with the two of M4x6 set screws one in each arm. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN 11 A Step A: Preparing the device XX Hand the main unit by removing the packaging and gently rotate the arm in the required direction (see diagram Step I) until it clicks. The unit is now handed. If handed incorrectly by mistake refer to Step I. XX Remove the mounting plate from the bottom of the main operating unit (pull out). BAR 203 H IQ Bar 203 H / IQ Pad 203 H A … IQ Bar 200 Series PAD 203 H Fixing and installation Step B: Fitting the mounting plate XX Determine the centre height (A) of the unit between 930mm and 1130mm from floor level. Mark this position on the edge of the door frame on both sides of the inside of the door. Note: The centre of the Push Bar/Pad will fall approximately 30mm below this. XX XX XX Starting at the opening edge, place the template (DT-0071) on the door and slide into the jamb rebate (you may need to cut or fold the template) align with the unit centre line and the jamb line and stick to the door with sticky tape. Mark the positions of the holes for the mounting plate. Follow the instructions on the template and drill the required holes. Fix the mounting plate to the door. All … fixing holes must be used and screw heads must not project above plate. IQ Bar 203 H only XX Hand the slave, same process as the main unit (Step A), but the opposite hand. XX Repeat the steps above to fit the slave unit mounting plate to the hinge side of the door. Fix this mounting plate to the door also using all six fixing screws. In case of using an outside access device (lever) pause the installation of the exit device and fit the lever before continuing with the installation. Refer to chapter Lever 200 L - (OAD) Step C: Positioning and fitting the pullman catches. XX Determine the height of the catches on the door. XX Place the template (DT-0074) on the door. Line up the appropriate lines. Mark the corresponding holes. XX Follow the instructions on the relevant template and drill the required holes. XX Remove the covers from the pullman units (2 cover screws). XX Fit each pullman catch using all three CSK screws provided. Note: to access two of the three screw holes; move the slide plate mechanism. Screw heads must be fully in the countersunk holes and not stand proud. 12 A Unit Centre Height: A = between 930mm & 1130mm B Oval Push Bar Length = B + 61mm C Centre Latch Keep D Top/Bottom Guide E Top/Bottom Keep F Bottom Shoot Tube Length = F + 7mm G Top Shoot Tube Length = G + 7mm H Pullman catch I Centre Latch IQ Bar 200 Series Step D: Preparing the shoot tubes. Rotate the mounting plate cam to the correct position (see template) and fit the main unit onto the mounting plate. XX Temporarily secure using one of the supplied M5 x … CSK screws. XX Measure accurately length (F), add 7mm and cut the plain end of the shorter tube to this length. XX Measure accurately length (G), add 7mm and cut the plain end of the longer tube to this length. XX Using the installation drift tube to prevent screw thread damage, drive the threaded shoot end plug into cut ends of both tubes. Plug must be driven in fully against the tube end. XX Re-fit the pullman catches (two cover screws, each) Step E: Fitting the shoot tubes, tube guides & main operating unit. XX Remove the main operating unit from the door. XX Screw the previously prepared shoot tubes (section C) fully into the pullman catches. XX Slide the tube guides onto the tubes (one on each tube) XX Ensure the mounting plate cam is in the correct position (see template). XX Place the main operating unit onto the mounting plate allowing the tubes to drift to one side. XX Operate the main operating unit mechanism to retract the shoot spigots. Guide the shoot tubes into position and slowly release the mechanism whilst guiding the spigots into the end of the tubes. XX Unscrew the tubes from the pullman catches until they almost contact the shoulder on the shoot spigots. Rotate the tubes back until the holes are facing the door. XX Pull the unit away from the door and secure the tubes using the M5x10 cap head screws provided. XX Fit unit back on the mounting plate and secure using three M5x8 CSK Screws. XX Locate the guides equidistant on the tubes (see diagram) and secure using the round headed screws provided. Ensuring the tubes are vertical and the guides are in alignment. Fixing and installation Step G: Fitting the slave unit & oval cross bar IQ Bar 203 H only XX Temporarily fit the slave unit onto the mounting plate. XX Measure accurately the arm gap (B) (see diagram) add 61mm to this dimension and cut Oval cross bar to this length. XX Remove slave unit from its mounting plate insert one end of oval cross bar into the main unit arm and the other into the slave unit arm. XX Refit the slave unit onto the mounting plate and secure using three of M5x8 CSK Screws provided XX Secure the cross bar with the two of M4x6 set screws one in each arm. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN Step H: Testing the operation & fitting the sign. XX Test the unit to ensure that when the Push Bar/ Pad is operated the door opens immediately and swings freely. When the door is closed the pullman catches and centre latch engage fully in their keeps and hold the door securely closed. XX Fit the green self adhesive ‘Push Bar to Open’ / ‘Push Pad to Open’ sign onto the door positioned immediately above the Push Bar/Pad. Step I: Re-Handing the unit (If required) If either unit is handed the wrong way in error, please follow these instructions. XX Turn the unit upside down & pull out the mounting plate to remove it (if required) XX Slide a small flat bladed screwdriver into the smaller bit of the large aperture along the inside face of the steel chassis inserting it between the chassis and the handing cam (see the diagram). XX Gently lever the cam forward until it disengages from the arm spindle. XX Rotate the arm to re-hand the unit the required way (ensure the cam is fully engaged). Step F: Fitting the keeps. XX Position the included top/bottom keeps centred about the catch with the square face of the keep against the door (see diagram) and mark the holes. Fix in place using the countersunk screws provided. XX With the door closed, position the centre latch keep around the centre latch with the flat face against the door face. Mark the positions of the fixing holes. Fix in place using the countersunk screws provided. 13 Fixing and installation IQ Bar 202 V BAR 202 V … IQ Bar 200 Series A These units can be fitted on a single door or on rebated double doors together with a latch unit. In this case a revised fitting position is required, which is shown in the relevent section of these instructions relating to that device. Step A: Preparing the device XX Hand the main unit by removing the packaging and gently rotate the arm in the required direction (see diagram Step I) until it clicks. The unit is now handed. If handed incorrectly by mistake refer to Step I. XX Remove the mounting plate from the bottom of the main operating unit (pull out). Step B: Fitting the mounting plate XX Determine the centre height of the unit between 930mm and 1130mm from floor level. Mark this position on the edge of the door frame, both sides of the inside of the door. Note: The centre of the Push Bar will fall approximately 30mm below this. XX XX XX XX For rebated single doors: starting at the opening edge, place the template (DT-0071) on the door and slide into the jamb rebate (you may need to cut or fold the template), align with the unit centre line and the jamb line and stick to the door with sticky tape. For flush doors align the correct line on the template (DT-0072) with the frame edge and the unit centre line. Mark the positions of the holes for the mounting plate. Follow the instructions on the template and drill the required holes. Fix the mounting plate to the door. All six fixing holes must be used and screw heads must not project above plate. Hand the slave, same process as the main unit (Step A), but the opposite hand. Repeat steps above to fit the slave unit mounting plate to the hinge side of the door. Fix this mounting plate to the door also using all … fixing screws. In case of using an outside access device (lever) pause the installation of the exit device and fit the lever before continuing with the installation. Refer to chapter Lever 200 L - (OAD) Step C: Preparing the shoot tubes. Rotate the mounting plate cam to the correct position (see template) and fit the main unit onto the mounting plate. XX Temporarily secure using one of the supplied M5 x … CSK screws. XX Measure accurately the bottom length (G), Subtract 111mm and cut the plain end of the 14 A B C D F E G H Unit Centre Height: A = between 930mm & 1130mm Oval Push Bar Length = B + 61mm Pullman catch Top/Bottom Guide Pullman Flush Door Keep No. 406A Top/Bottom Keep Bottom Shoot Tube Length = G - 111mm Top Shoot Tube Length = H - 111mm IQ Bar 200 Series XX XX shorter tube to this length. Measure accurately the top length H, Subtract 111mm and cut the plain end of the longer tube to this length. (For flush doors subtract 101mm) Using the installation drift tube to prevent screw thread damage, drive the threaded shoot end plug into cut ends of both tubes. Plug must be driven in fully against the tube end. Step D: Positioning and fitting the pullman catches. XX To establish the mounting position for the top and bottom pullman catchess first determine which type of keep/striker is required for the installation. Standard door/floor keep (included) or Pullman flush door keep No. 406A (F) (see diagram). XX Place the template (DT-0073) on the door. Line up the appropriate lines. Mark the corresponding holes. XX Follow the instructions on the relevant template and drill the required holes. XX Remove the covers from the pullman catchess (two cover screws) XX Fit the pullman catches, using CSK screws provided. Re-fit the covers. Step E: Fitting the shoot tubes, guides & main unit. XX Remove the main unit from the door. XX Screw the previously prepared shoot tubes (section B) fully into the pullman catches. XX Slide the guides onto the tubes (one on each tube) XX Ensure the mounting plate cam is in the correct position (see template). XX Place the main unit onto the mounting plate allowing the tubes to drift to one side. XX Operate the main unit mechanism to retract the shoot spigots. Guide the shoot tubes into position and slowly release the mechanism whilst guiding the spigots into the end of the tubes. XX Unscrew the tubes from the pullman catchess until they almost contact the shoulder on the shoot spigots. Rotate the tubes back until the holes are facing the door. XX Pull the unit away from the door and fix the tubes using the M5x10 cap head screws provided. XX Fit unit back on the mounting plate and secure using three M5x8 CSK Screws. XX Locate the guides equidistant on the tubes (see diagram) and secure using the round headed screws provided. Ensuring the tubes are vertical and the guides are in alignment. Fixing and installation screws provided. For flush door use keep No. 406A. Fit as shown and adjust with packers until the correct engagement is achieved. Step G: Fitting the slave unit & oval cross bar. XX Temporarily fit the slave unit to the mounting plate. XX Measure accurately the arm gap (B) (see diagram) add 61mm to this dimension and cut oval cross bar to this length. XX Remove slave unit from its mounting plate insert one end of oval cross bar into the main unit arm and the other into the slave unit arm. XX Refit the slave unit to the mounting plate and secure using three M5x8 CSK Screws provided. XX Secure the cross bar with the two of M4x6 set screws one in each arm. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN Step H: Testing the operation & fitting the sign. XX Test the unit to ensure that when the Push Bar is operated the door opens immediately and swings freely and when the door is closed the pullman catches engage fully in the keeps and hold the door securely closed. XX Fit the green self adhesive ‘Push Bar to Open’ sign onto the door positioned immediately above the push bar. Step I: Re-Handing the unit (If required) If either unit is handed the wrong way in error, please follow these instructions. XX Turn the unit upside down & pull out the mounting plate to remove it (if required) XX Slide a small flat bladed screwdriver into the smaller bit of the large aperture along the inside face of the steel chassis inserting it between the chassis and the handing cam (see the diagram). XX Gently lever the cam forward until it disengages from the arm spindle. XX Rotate the arm to re-hand the unit the required way (ensure the cam is fully engaged). Step F: Fitting the keeps. XX Position the top/bottom keeps centred about the catch with the square face of the keep against the door (see diagram) and mark the holes. Fix in place using the countersunk 15 Fixing and installation … IQ Bar 200 Series Lever 200 L - Outside Access Device (OAD) This outside access device provides a lockable entry facility for doors fitted with IQ 200 SERIES. The outside access device always allows immediate exit regardless of whether device is locked or unlocked. For double door installations with rebated meeting door styles, the outside access device must be fitted on the first opening (last closing) door leaf. … Additional Fixing Hole (Use when mounted on LH Outside Door Face … Additional Fixing Hole (Use when mounted on RH Outside Door Face … Backplate Fixing Screws (4 off) … Backplate Assembly … Mounting Bushes … Drive Spindle (Note: Setting Marks) … Lever Spring … Sprung Disc … Lever 10 Lever Drive Pin (spring loaded) 11 Lever Set Pin … 1 … 4 … 6 … 8 … 10 11 … 16 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Lever Boss Outside Access Device (OAD) Optional 3rd Aditional Fixing Screw Panic / Emergency Exit Device Mounting Plate Drive Spindle Main Fixing Screws Square Spindle IQ Bar 200 Series … .1 Preparing the device Step A: Setting the outside access device’s lever for left or right hand opening doors XX First establish the lever handing direction required by checking its position on the door. XX Remove the label & packing and gently rotate the lever in the required direction, until you feel / hear the drive assembly engage. XX Continue to move the lever against the spring pressure until it’s just past the horizontal position. XX Hold the lever still and carefully insert the supplied lever set pin (11), through the hole in the back plate (4). Engage the thread and tighten. The lever is now set. Step B: Re-setting the outside access device’s lever if set the wrong way in error XX Operate the cylinder lock key in an anti-clockwise. Remove the key. XX Remove the backplate assembly (4) (4 screws). Taking care not to displace the drive spindle (6) from the lever boss (12). XX Remove the lever set pin (11) (if it has been fitted) XX Look inside the body. Locate the lever drive pin (10). Depress the spring loaded lever drive pin to disengage the lever (9) from, the sprung disc (8). XX Gently rotate the lever towards the correct position until the drive lever drive pin (10) reengages. Taking care not to rotate the ‘sprung disc’. XX Continue to move the lever against the spring pressure until it’s just past the horizontal position and the lever drive pin engages in the new position. Fit the lever set pin to retain the lever in its new position. XX Refit the backplate assembly (4) (4 screws). Line up the setting marks on the drive spindle (6) with those on the backplate assembly. Test the operation of the unit. OPTIONAL 3RD ADDITIONAL FIXING For added security a third mounting screw is provided for an additional outside access device fixing. However this extra screw is only hidden from view when used in conjunction with two & three point exit units (by the shoot tube), but is visible on the inside face of the door on single point (latch) versions. Fixing and installation … .2 Fitting the device If this unit is to be fitted at the same time as the exit unit follow step C, if the unit is to be retrofitted to an existing installation follow step D. Step C: Positioning the device: When fitting at the same time as the exit device XX Ensure the correct holes are drilled when fitting the exit device main operating unit’s mounting plate, by following the instructions on the template supplied with the exit device. XX After fitting the mounting plates (section A on the exit device’s fitting instructions) pause with the installation of the exit device and fit the outside access device before continuing with its installation. Step D: Positioning the device: When retrofitting for use with an existing exit device XX First remove the exit device’s main unit from the door. But leave the mounting plates in place. Refer to the units fitting instructions for help (general removal procedure listed below) àà Slacken the arm retaining screws using 2mm Allen key (Push Bar Versions only) àà Remove the slave unit (three screws, No.2 Pozi) & cross bar, DO NOT remove its mounting plate (Push Bar Versions only) àà Remove the three main operating unit fixing screws (No.2 Pozi). Single point latch units can now be removed. àà Bolt Versions: unscrew the three guides & top trip (eight screws, No.2 Pozi). The unit can now be carefully removed from the door. àà Pullman Catch versions: Remove the Pullman catchess (No.2 Pozi screws, two each cover). Unscrew the two guides (four screws, each). Unscrew the Pullman catches (three screws, each). The unit can now be carefully removed from the door. XX Remove main units mounting plate from the door (six screws). XX Locate the large 22mm Diameter spindle hole (blind hole). Drill this hole fully through the door. XX Locate the two screw holes immediately above and bellow the large spindle hole. Open up these two screw holes to 9mm Diameter. And drill fully through the door. Step E: Positioning the 3rd additional fixing XX Mark a centre line vertically on the outside face of the door: Standard rebated door centre line = 34mm from edge of door frame Flush door centre line = 22mm from edge of door frame Double rebated door centre line = 22mm* from outermost edge of last opening door leaf 17 Fixing and installation Tip: measure from inner edge of the rebate & add the rebate width to the dimension Note: the centre line should pass through the centre of the … holes (2 x Ø9mm & … x Ø22mm) as drilled from the other side of the door. XX XX Align the template (DT-0075) with the marked centre line and the three holes. Using the template mark & drill the correct 3rd additional fixing hole (see diagram pos. (1) or (2)) through the door. Countersink this hole on the inside face of the door to suit the screw head with the dished washer (to stop it from pulling through the door face on timber doors). Prepare the 3rd additional fixing screw (14): Take one of the three supplied special M5x70 CSK screws; measure the door thickness, add 13mm to this size and cut this screw to this length (length includes head). Step F: Preparing the ‘main fixing screws’ & ‘square spindle’ XX Take two of the three supplied special M5x70 CSK screws; measure the door thickness, less 8mm from this size and cut the two screws to this length (length includes head). XX Measure the door thickness; add 6mm to this size and cut the supplied square spindle (18) to this length. Remove the fray from the cut end with a file. Step G: Fitting the outside access device XX Re-fit the exit device main operating unit’s mounting plate (if removed, section D). XX Insert the previously prepared spindle (section E) through the large diameter hole; into the mounting plate drive spindle (16). XX Rotate mounting plate drive spindle (16) to the correct position: should be sitting at an angle 45 degrees pointing in an upwards direction (e.g. northwest or north-easterly direction) XX Fit the outside access device to the door ensuring the spindle locates correctly in the OAD drive spindle (6). Ensure the setting marks are in alignment with ones on the backplate. XX Secure to the door using the previously prepared (section E) main fixing screws (17) and the 3rd additional fixing screw (14) if required. XX Ensure mounting plate drive spindle (16) is in the correct position! XX Operate the device to ensure the mounting plate drive spindle (16) rotates freely. XX Install / Re-install the exit device referring to its installation instructions. Step H: Testing the device XX Once the exit device has been installed / re-installed; test for free and correct operation of both the outside access device & the exit device/s. 18 IQ Bar 200 Series IQ Bar 200 Series … Notes on installation Notes on installation As part of the requirements of EN1125: 2008 (Panic Exit devices) / EN179: 2008 (Emergency Exit devices) we must provide you with the following additional information. The safety features of this product are essential to its compliance with EN179 / EN1125: 2008. No modifications of any kind, other than described in these instructions are permitted. àà All devices are suitable for use on double / single doors up to 2440mm x 1220mm, door mass up to 200kg. àà Before fitting an exit device to a door, the door should be checked to ensure correct hanging and freedom from binding. A maximum of 5mm door distortion is allowed. We do not recommend that any of our exit devices be fitted to hollow core doors. It is recommended to verify that the door construction allows the use of the device, i.e. verify that: àà Offset hinges and engaging leaves allow both leaves to be opened simultaneously. àà The gap between door leaves does not differ from that which is specified in the main installation instructions (if stated). àà The operating elements do not interfere. NOTE: Panic / Emergency exit devices manufactured in accordance with EN1125 & EN179 will provide a high degree of safety and reasonable security provided that they are fitted to doors and door frames that are in good condition. àà Before fitting a Panic / Emergency exit device to a fire / smoke resisting door, the fire certification of the fire door assembly on which the exit device has been tested (to prove suitability for use on fire doors) should be examined. It is of utmost importance that an exit device is not used on a fire door assembly of a greater fire resistance time than it is approved for. àà Care should be taken to ensure that any seals or weather-stripping fitted to the complete door assembly, does not inhibit the correct operations of the Panic / Emergency exit device. àà On double door sets with rebated meeting stiles and where both leaves are fitted with Panic / Emergency exit devices, it is essential to check that either leaf will open when its exit device is activated and also that both leaves will open freely when both exit devices are operated simultaneously. àà These Panic / Emergency exit devices are manufacture in one size. àà Category … (standard projection) Panic / Emergency exit devices should be used in situations where there is restricted width for escape, or where the doors to be fitted with the Panic / Emergency exit devices are not able to open beyond 90°. àà Where an exit device is to be fitted to a glazed door, it is essential that the glazing is tempered or laminated glass. àà None of our Panic / Emergency exit devices are intended for use on double action (double swing) doors. àà The fixing instructions should be carefully followed during installation. These instructions should be passed on by the installer to the user. àà The horizontal bar (EN1125 devices) / operating element (EN179 devices) should normally be installed at a height of between 900 mm and 1100 mm from the finished floor level, when the door is in the secured position. Where it is known that the majority of the occupants of the premises will be young children, consideration should be given to reducing the height of the bar / operating element accordingly. àà The horizontal bar should be installed so as to provide the maximum effective length (EN1125 devices) àà When installing (EN179) lever operated Emergency exit devices, particularly on doors with raised or recessed surfaces, consideration should be given to minimizing any potential safety risks, such as the trapping of fingers or clothing. àà The bolt heads / latches and keepers should be fitted to provide secure engagement. Care should be taken to ensure that no projection of the bolt heads / latches, when in the withdrawn position, can prevent the door swinging freely. àà Where exit devices are to be fitted to double doorsets with rebated meeting stiles and self closing devices, a door coordinator device in accordance with EN 1158 should be fitted to ensure the correct closing sequence of the doors. This recommendation is particularly important with regard to fire/smoke resisting door assemblies. àà No additional devices for securing the door in the closed position should be fitted. This does not preclude the installation of self closing devices. àà If a door closing device is to be used to return the door to the closed position, care should be taken not to impair the use of the doorway by the young, elderly and infirm. àà Any keepers or protection plates provided should be fitted in order to ensure compliance with EN1125 / EN179. àà EN1125 Panic exit devices: the provided sign which reads; “Push bar to open” should be affixed on the inside face of the door immediately above the horizontal bar. àà EN179 Emergency exit devices: the provided sign which reads; “Push Pad to open” should be affixed on the inside face of the door immediately above the Push Pad operating element. 19 … Maintenance instructions It is important that all a panic and emergency exit hardware devices are inspected and maintained properly to ensure safety is maintained when exiting a building in any situation. Once the device is fitted regular maintenance is recommended. Weekly: XX Make sure the Exit Device functions correctly. XX Any fixings that have worked loose should be re-secured XX Any damaged components should be replaced. XX Ensure there are no obstructions which prevent the exit unit from functioning correctly. Every three months: XX Check for wear, any visible worn components should be replaced. The following is the routine maintenance procedure as recommended by EN1125 / EN179:XX Inspect and operate the exit device to ensure that all components are in a satisfactory working condition. If possible using a force gauge, measure and record the operating forces to release the exit device. XX Ensure the keeper(s) is (are) free from obstruction. XX Check that the exit device is lubricated in accordance with the producer’s instructions. XX Check that no additional locking devices have been added to the door since its original installation. XX Check periodically that all components of the system are still correct in accordance with the list of approved components originally supplied with the system. XX Check periodically that the operating element is correctly tightened and, If possible using a force gauge, measure the operating forces to release the exit device. Check that the operating forces have not changed significantly from the operating forces recorded when originally installed. 20 … Drilling templates Overview àà Drilling Template 0071 - Main Unit / Slave Fitting Template àà Drilling Template 0072 - Flush Doors / 1st Opening Double Door àà Drilling Template 0073 - Vertical Pullman Catches Fitting Template àà Drilling Template 0074 - Horizontal Pullman Catches Fitting Template àà Drilling Template 0075 - Lever 200 L - Template for positioning optional 3rd aditional fixing hole 21 22 … Drilling Template 0071 - Main Unit / Slave Fitting Template 23 … Drilling Template 0072 - Flush Doors / 1st Opening Double Door 24 IN LINE WITH EDGE OF FLUSH FRAME / SILL MARK & DRILL HOLES IN LINE WITH EDGE OF FLUSH DOOR FRAME MARK & DRILL HOLES 23mm 13mm 27mm 39mm IN LINE WITH EDGE OF: FRAME / SILL / FLOOR IN LINE WITH EDGE OF SINGLE DOORFRAME MARK & DRILL HOLES IN LINE WITH EDGE OF SINGLE DOORFRAME DOUBLE DOOR: IN LINE WITH EDGE OF INACTIVE (2nd OPENING) DOOR IN LINE WITH EDGE OF FLUSH DOOR FRAME MARK & DRILL HOLES 3mm FOR SUPPLIED No.8 WOOD SCREW. IN LINE WITH EDGE OF FLUSH: FRAME / SILL 23mm 13mm TIMBER DOORS: PILOT HOLE SIZES: … Drilling Template 0073 - Vertical Pullman Catches Fitting Template 27mm 39mm IN LINE WITH EDGE OF: FRAME / SILL / FLOOR THIS WAY UP FOR DOORS HUNG ON THE RIGHT HAND SIDE 3mm FOR SUPPLIED No.8 WOOD SCREW. TUBE CENTRE LINE MARK & DRILL … HOLES 25 IN LINE WITH EDGE OF SINGLE DOORFRAME TUBE CENTRE LINE MARK & DRILL … HOLES 27mm SINGLE DOOR MARK & DRILL … HOLES IN LINE WITH EDGE OF 2nd OPENING (INACTIVE) LEAF / FLUSH DOOR FRAME DOUBLE REBATED DOORS MARK & DRILL … HOLES TIMBER DOORS: PILOT HOLE SIZES: … Drilling Template 0074 - Horizontal Pullman Catches Fitting Template THIS WAY UP FOR DOORS HUNG ON THE LEFT HAND SIDE 39mm 26 … Drilling Template 0075 - Lever 200 L - Template for positioning optional 3rd additional fixing hole LISTED ACCESSORIES Only the accessories listed below can be used with this product range. The use of any other accessory may invalidate the relevant products EN1125 / EN179 CE certification. PRODUCT No. DESCRIPTION COMPATIBILITY 3405 OUTSIDE ACCESS DEVICES Lever operated Outside Access Device with Euro aperture (cylinder not supplied) Lever operated Outside Access Device with Euro cylinder KEEPS Surface mounted Bottom bolt Keep 3405A Surface mounted Top Trip Keep P0401 Standard Top Trip Plate P1301 Standard Floor Plate bolt keep. SL-0144 406A Centre Latch Keep for rebated double / flush doors Pullman Latch Keep for rebated double / flush doors 200 L 200 L EC Use with all IQ Bar 200 series range use with: IQ Bar 202 V A & IQ Bar 203 V A use with: IQ Bar 202 V A & IQ Bar 203 V A as supplied with: IQ Bar 202 V A & IQ Bar 203 V A as supplied with: IQ Bar 202 V A & IQ Bar 203 V A use with: IQ Bar 201, IQ Bar 203 use with: IQ Bar 201, IQ Bar 203 Unless other wise stated compatibility is assumed with all the various suffixed variations (e.g. ‘A’, ‘-B’, ‘-P’, ‘/SD’, ‘/UP & ‘/AD’.) of the basic product. CE MARKING All devices are intended for use on single / double outward opening route escape doors, none-fire rated. Minimum resistance for all devices: a maximum pulling force of 1000N was achieved against the fixings under the abuse test. Below is the CE marking information for the entire range. Applicable products are clearly listed below their relevant markings. 1121 EN 1125: 2008 PANIC EXIT DEVICES … 7 … 0 … 3 … 2 A A AAA044 11 1121 EN 179: 2008 PANIC EXIT DEVICES … 7 … 0 … 3 … 2 B A ABB049 11 Category … Projection. Category … Projection. Field of Door application: Category A (Single & Double) Field of Door application: Category A (Single & Double) - - Applicable to Products: IQ Bar 201, IQ Bar 202 V, IQ Bar 202 V A, IQ Bar 203 V A, IQ Bar 203 H, IQ Bar 203 V DL, IQ Bar 204 V DL Applicable to Products: IQ Pad 201, IQ Pad 202 V A, IQ Pad 203 H GEZE GmbH, Reinhold-Vöster-Str. 21-29, D-71229 Leonberg 27 Germany GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Süd-West Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 594 E-Mail: leonberg.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Süd-Ost Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6440 E-Mail: muenchen.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Ost Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6840 E-Mail: berlin.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Mitte/Luxemburg Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6888 E-Mail: frankfurt.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung West Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6770 E-Mail: duesseldorf.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Nord Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6600 E-Mail: hamburg.de@geze.com GEZE Service GmbH Tel. +49 (0) 1802 923392 E-Mail: service-info.de@geze.com Austria GEZE Austria E-Mail: austria.at@geze.com www.geze.at Hungary GEZE Hungary Kft. E-Mail: office-hungary@geze.com www.geze.hu Scandinavia – Sweden GEZE Scandinavia AB E-Mail: sverige.se@geze.com www.geze.se Baltic States – Lithuania / Latvia / Estonia E-Mail: baltic-states@geze.com Iberia GEZE Iberia S.R.L. E-Mail: info.es@geze.com www.geze.es Scandinavia – Norway GEZE Scandinavia AB avd. Norge E-Mail: norge.se@geze.com www.geze.no Benelux GEZE Benelux B.V. E-Mail: benelux.nl@geze.com www.geze.be www.geze.nl India GEZE India Private Ltd. E-Mail: office-india@geze.com www.geze.in Scandinavia – Denmark GEZE Danmark E-Mail: danmark.se@geze.com www.geze.dk Bulgaria GEZE Bulgaria - Trade E-Mail: office-bulgaria@geze.com www.geze.bg Italy GEZE Italia S.r.l E-Mail: italia.it@geze.com www.geze.it Singapore GEZE (Asia Pacific) Pte, Ltd. E-Mail: gezesea@geze.com.sg www.geze.com China GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE Engineering Roma S.r.l E-Mail: italia.it@geze.com www.geze.it South Africa GEZE South Africa (Pty) Ltd. E-Mail: info@gezesa.co.za www.geze.co.za GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Shanghai E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Guangzhou E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Beijing E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn France GEZE France S.A.R.L. E-Mail: france.fr@geze.com www.geze.fr Korea GEZE Korea Ltd. E-Mail: info.kr@geze.com www.geze.com Poland GEZE Polska Sp.z o.o. E-Mail: geze.pl@geze.com www.geze.pl Romania GEZE Romania S.R.L. E-Mail: office-romania@geze.com www.geze.ro Russia OOO GEZE RUS E-Mail: office-russia@geze.com www.geze.ru Switzerland GEZE Schweiz AG E-Mail: schweiz.ch@geze.com www.geze.ch Turkey GEZE Kapı ve Pencere Sistemleri E-Mail: office-turkey@geze.com www.geze.com Ukraine LLC GEZE Ukraine E-Mail: office-ukraine@geze.com www.geze.ua United Arab Emirates/GCC GEZE Middle East E-Mail: gezeme@geze.com www.geze.ae United Kingdom GEZE UK Ltd. E-Mail: info.uk@geze.com www.geze.com GEZE GmbH Reinhold-Vöster-Straße 21–29 71229 Leonberg Germany Tel.: 0049 7152 203 … Fax.: 0049 7152 203 310 www.geze.com
PDF | 6 MB
User manual IO 420
IO 420 164898-04 161864-03 EN Benutzerhandbuch DE User manual GEZE IO 420 Inhaltsverzeichnis … Zu diesem Dokument … Produktbeschreibung … Weitere Dokumente … Symbole und Darstellungsmittel … GEZE IO 420 GEZE IO 420 … 1 … Sicherheit und Verantwortung … Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise … Personal bestimmen … Produkthaftung … Richtlinien … Produktübersicht/Montagehinweise … Technische Daten … LEDs, Anschlüsse und Konfiguration der IO 420 … BACnet für GEZE IO 420 … Parametrierung GEZE IO 420 … 5 Modulbeschreibung … 11 … Modultyp „watchdog“ … 11 Modultyp „1 door“ … 12 Modultyp „2 doors“ … 13 Modultyp „4 doors“ … 14 Modultyp „automatic stat“ / „automatic … sec“ … 15 Modultyp „window“ … 16 Modultyp „universal“ … 16 Modultyp „IQ lock El + Aut“ … 17 Modultyp „RWS + KL“ … 19 Modultyp „DCU1,2 und 8“ … 21 Modultyp „DCU6“ (Karusseltür) … 21 Modultyp „DCU128+RWS+KL“ … 21 Modultyp „MBZ“ … 22 … Anhang … 24 … EDE-Listen … 22 State Text … 30 Servicemenü … 33 Passwörter für BACnet … 37 … Firmware-Update für IO 420 … 37 Zu diesem Dokument About this document Dieses Benutzerhandbuch beschreibt die Montage, Inbetriebnahme und Parametrierung des GEZE IO 420. This user manual describes the der installation, commissioning and parameter the GEZE IO 420. Montage und Inbetriebnahme Fenster und Türen sind nicht Bestandteilsetting diesesof Benutzerhandbuchs. Installation and commissioning of the windows and doors are not part of this user manual. Produktbeschreibung Product description Mit dem GEZE IO 420 werden GEZE Komponenten für Tür- und Fenstersysteme sowie das RWS-System von GEZE With GEZE Das IO 420, GEZE for door window der systems as well as the of GEZE gesteuert. IO 420 istcomponents ein Koppelmodul zur and Vernetzung Komponenten undRWS-system zur Integration nichtare busfähi"CLOSED". The IO 420 is a coupler module the networking of components the integration of non-busger Komponenten in das GEZE System. In for diesem Benutzerhandbuch werdenand die for einzelnen Modultypen becompliant components in System the GEZE system. This user können. manual describes the individual module types that can be umgesetzt werden schrieben, die mit diesem implemented using this system. Weitere Dokumente Further documents Im Lieferumfang der Komponenten sind jeweils Datenblätter mit technischen Daten enthalten. Diese sind zu The components supplied byund GEZE include the relevant dataSie sheets technicalunter data.www.geze.de. These must be heeded. beachten. Alle Datenblätter weitere Dokumente finden auchwith im Internet All data sheets and further documents can also be found on the internet at www.geze.com. Symbole und Darstellungsmittel Symbols and illustrations Warnhinweise Warning notices werden Warnhinweise verwendet, um Sie vor Sach- und Personenschäden zu warnen. In dieser Anleitung X these In warning notices are used toimmer. warn against material damage and injuries. Leseninstructions, und beachten Sie diese Warnhinweise XX Always read thesedie warning notices. Befolgen Sieand alle observe Maßnahmen, mit dem Warnsymbol und Warnwort gekennzeichnet sind. XX Observe all measures marked with the warning symbol and warning word . Warnsymbol Warnwort Bedeutung Warning symbol Warning word Meaning zur Vermeidung von Sachschäden, zum Verständnis oder zum OptimieInformationen VORSICHT – ren der Arbeitsabläufe. Information to prevent property damage, to understand or optimise the CAUTION – operation sequences. Weitere Symbole und Darstellungsmittel Further symbolsBedienung and illustrations Um die korrekte zu verdeutlichen, sind wichtige Informationen und technische Hinweise besonders Important information and technical notes are highlighted to explain correct operation. herausgestellt. Symbol Meaning Bedeutung means “important note” bedeutet „Wichtiger Hinweis“ means “additional Information” bedeutet „Zusätzliche Information“ XX Symbol for action: This means you have do something. für an eine Handlung: Hier müssen Sietoetwas tun. If thereSie arebei several actions to be taken, keep todie the given order.ein. Halten mehreren Handlungsschritten Reihenfolge Abbreviations Abkürzungen … ANSI ANSI APDU APDU B/IP B/IP BACnet BACnet BBMD BMA BIBBs COV BMA CP COV DCC CP EDE DCC IQ EDELock Aut IQ Lock EL Aut KL 220 EL IQ Lock KZF KL 220 MAC KZF American National Standards Institute American Standards applicationNational layer protocol dataInstitute unit application layer protocolmanagement data unit BACnet/IP broadcasting device BACnet/IP broadcasting device Building Automation andmanagement Control networks Building Automation andmanagement Control networks BACnet/IP broadcasting device Fire alarm system BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks change of value Brandmeldanlage Capacitor change ofplate value(capacitor power) Device communication controlpower) Kondensatorplatine (capacitor Engineering Data Exchange Device communication control Motor lock forData the Exchange passive leaf Engineering Motor lock für den Standflügel Motorschloss Terminal box 220 Motorschloss Short-term release Klemmenbox 220 medium access control Kurzzeitfreiagbe MAC medium access control MBZ MS/TP MS/TP NC NC NO NO PICS RWA RWA SCT SCT ST 220 220 TZ 320 TE 200 200 VAT 220 ZSU ZSU GF GF SF SF BMA BMA RWS RWS Master Slave Token Passing Master Slave Token Passing Öffnerkontakt (normally closed) normally closed contact (normally Schließerkontakt (normally open) closed) normallyImplementation opened contactConformance (normally open) Protocol Statement Smoke and extraction system Rauchund heat Wärmeabzug Key switch Schlüsselschalter Service terminal Service-Terminal Door control320 unit 320 Türzentrale Control panel 200 Tableaueinheit 200 Virtual display indicator board Virtuelles Anzeigetableau Timer Zeitschaltuhr Active leaf Gangflügel Passive leaf Standflügel Fire alarm system Brandmeldeanlage Emergency exit system Rettungswegsystem Safety andund responsibility Sicherheit Verantwortung Fundamental precautions Grundlegendesafety Sicherheitshinweise XX XX XX XX X … Use original GEZE parts for repair work. verwenden. Nur only GEZE-Originalteile für Reparaturarbeiten Unauthorised to the system liability any resulting damage. Eigenmächtigechanges Veränderungen an derexclude AnlageGEZE's schließen einefor Haftung von GEZE für daraus resultierende Primary measures are to be carried out on site. Schädenprotective aus. Follow the VDE 0100 and VDE 0815erfolgen standards when laying the cables Primärseitige Schutzmaßnahmen bauseits. Bei der Leitungsverlegung müssen die Normen VDE 0100 und VDE 0815 beachtet werden. … 3 GEZE IO 420 … 3 … GEZE IO 420 Assigning staff Personal bestimmen LEDs … .1 LED … - (rot) LEDs Product liability Produkthaftung In compliance with the manufacturer’s product liability as defined in the German "Product Liability Act", the instructions included must be noted and followed. Failure to comply releases the from hisdie statutory Gemäß der im here Produkthaftungsgesetz definierten Haftung des Herstellers fürmanufacturer seine Produkte sind hier entliability. Only experts may carry outentbindet installation, functional checks and maintenance work.Nur haltenen Hinweise zuauthorised beachten.by DieGEZE Nichtbeachtung den Hersteller von seiner Haftungspflicht. Sachkundige, die von GEZE autorisiert sind, dürfen Montage, Funktionsprüfungen und Wartungen durchführen. Guidelines Richtlinien The GEZE IO 420 fulfils the following standards: àà DIN ENIO 61000-6-2: (in accordance Die GEZE 420 erfüllt2005 folgende Normen: with VDE 0839 Part 6-2 / March 2006) A1:2011 in accordance VDE/ 0839 6-3 / September 2011 àà DIN EN 61000-6-6: 61000-6-2: 2007+ 2005 (entsprechend VDE 0839with Teil 6-2 März Part 2006) à DIN EN 61000-6-6: 2007+ A1:2011 entsprechend VDE 0839 Teil 6-3 / September 2011 Product overview/installation details Produktübersicht/Montagehinweise Technical data Technische Device name: Daten IO 420 LEDs, Anschlüsse connectionsund andKonfiguration configuration ofIO the420 IO 420 der … .1 Installation, commissioning und and Reparaturen repair work must be performed properly trained personnellassen, authorised by GEZE. Montage, Inbetriebnahme ausschließlich vonby Sachkundigen durchführen die von GEZE autorisiert sind. Gerätebezeichnung: IO 420 Function: universal IO modules Funktion: universal Module Installation: Top hatIOrail mounting Montage: Hutschienenmontage Main dimensions [mm] (W x H x D): 107 x 111 x 59 Hauptmaße [mm] (B x H x T): 10724 x 111 x 59 Operating voltage: V DC +/-15 % with reverse polarity Betriebsspannung: 24 protection V DC +/-15 % mit Verpolungsschutz Induced current intake: max. Eigenstromaufnahme: max. 300300 mAmA beiat2424V V Total power consumption: A at2424 Gesamtstromaufnahme: … A2bei VV Output current (Pin (pin … und and 2): max. A at2424V V Ausgangstrom max. … A1bei Contact rating for relay: A at3030V V Kontaktbelastbarkeit für Relais: … A1bei Operating temperature [°C]: 80°C Betriebstemperatur[°C]: -20-20 bis to 80°C Safety fuse: F900: Value Sicherung: F900: Wert … A A … GEZE IO 420 LED … - (gelb) LED … - (red) LED … - (rot) LED … - (yellow) LED … - (grün) LED … - (red) LED … - (grün) LED … - (green) LED … - (gelb) LED … - (green) LED in - (grün) LED … - (yellow) LED out - (rot) LED in - (green) LED out - (red) … .2 Schnittstellen / GEZE IO 420 … .2 Schnittstellen à IO CAN: Interfaces / GEZE 42050 kBit/s, verwendet für TE 200, VAT 220, TZ 320. Interfaces T LED blinkt, wenn microSD-Card gelesen oder geschrieben wird. LED leuchtet, wenn „CP“ (Kondensatorplatine) angeschlossen ist. LED flashes if the microSD card is read or written. LED blinkt bei Störung. LED lights up if “CP” (capacitor plate) is connected. LED blinkt im normalen Betrieb. LED flashes in case of a fault. LED leuchtet, wenn Spannungsversorgung für Microcontroller aktiv ist. LED flashes during normal operation. LED blinkt, wenn Daten über BACnet ausgetauscht werden. LED lights up if voltage supply for microcontroller is active. LED-in 4/3/2/1 leuchtet, wenn Eingang “in” 4/3/2/1 aktiv ist. LED flashes if data is exchanged via BACnet. LED-out 4/3/2/1 leuchtet, wenn Ausgang “out” 4/3/2/1 aktiv ist. LED-in 4/3/2/1 lights up if input “in” 4/3/2/1 is active. LED-out 4/3/2/1 lights up if output “out” 4/3/2/1 is active. à ààà ààà àà àà ST 220: verwendet für ST 220, IQ-Aut Standflügel. CAN: 50 kBit/s, used forfür CAN bus capable automatic doors and door control units from GEZE. GEZE-Bus: verwendet IQ-Aut Gangflügel. ST 220: used for ST 220, IQ-Aut passive leaf. BACnet: verwendet für BACnet MS/TP-Schnittstelle. GEZE-Bus: used for IQ-Aut active leaf. BACnet: used for BACnet MS/TP interface. … .3 DIP-Schalter Konfiguration … .3 CAN:switch configuration Abschlusswiderstand „CAN“ 120 Ohm DIP CAN: BACnet: BACnet: GEZE-Bus: H GEZE-Bus: Network-Bias: Network bias: B … .4 … .4 X DIP-Schalter am Anfang und Ende des CAN-BUS auf ON setzen. Terminating resistor “CAN” 120120 Ohm Ohm Abschlusswiderstand „BACnet“ XX Set the DIP switch at the start and end of the CAN-BUS to ON. X BACnet DIP-Schalter am ersten und am letzen IO 420 des BACnet MS/TP Bus auf ON setzen. Terminating “BACnet” 120 Ohm DIP-Schalter resistor Abschlusswiderstand „GEZE-Bus“ 120 Ohm XX Set the BACnet DIP switch on the first and last IO 420 of the BACnet MS/TP bus to ON. X Bei Anschluss von GEZE-Motorschloss oder TZ 320 (Anschluss für KL 220), DIP-Schalter auf DIPON switch terminating resistor “GEZE-Bus” 120 Ohm setzen. When GEZE motor lock or TZ 320 (connection for KL 220) is connected, set DIP switch to ON. DIP-Schalter „Network-Bias“ DIP switch bias”für BACnet MS/TP zu aktivieren, DIP-Schalter auf ON setzen. X Um den“Network Network-Bias XX Set the DIP switchMS/TP to ONNetwerksystem to enable the network BACnet MS/TP. In einem BACnet darf nurbias einfor Bias aktiviert sein. Only one bias may be enabled in a BACnet MS/TP network system. XX microSD microSD microSD-Card microSD card Die microSD-Card (SDHC) wird im FAT16/32-Fileformat geschrieben und gelesen. Andere Formate The microSD (SDHC) isDie written anddes read thekönnen FAT16/32 format. Other formats arewerden. not supwerden nichtcard unterstützt. Dateien IO in 420 auffile eine microSD-Card kopiert ported. The IO 420 be copied to a microSDkönnen card. The 220 isam required for angepasst this. The data can Hierfür wird das STfiles 220 can benötigt. Gegebenenfalls dieST Daten PC weiter werden A microSD be adapted further at the PC if necessary (parameter setting or change in BACnet name). (Parametrierung oder Änderung der BACnet-Namen). Das Profil kann dann mittels microSD-Card auf card can then used load the profile to anotherwerden. IO 420 with the same firmware. ein anderes IObe 420 mit to gleicher Firmware geladen The following files werden are created card: Folgende Dateien auf on derthe Karte erstellt: ààà Name file for BACnet names: “IO420_V1.BAC”; Namensdatei für BACnet-Namen: „IO420_V1.BAC“; ààà Configuration file: “IO420_V1.CON”; contains all parameters of the IOIO 420. Konfigurationsdatei: „IO420_V1.CON“; beinhaltet alle Parameter des 420. to “IO420_39.LOG” ; ààà Log file: “IO420_00.LOG” Log-Datei: „IO420_00.LOG“ bis „IO420_39.LOG“; Depending on the werden setting, Alarmmeldungen alarm messages and areinwritten into the log file. Je nach Einstellung undactions Aktionen die Log-Datei geschrieben. If the LED for microSD card is flashing, microSD card must not beaus taken outSlot of the slot. Wenn die LED für microSD-Card blinkt,the darf die microSD-Card nicht dem herausgenommen werden. The 420 mustund be de-energised the microSD card to420 be removed and inserted. ZumIO Entfernen Einstecken derformicroSD-Card das IO spannungslos schalten. … .5 … .5 Reset Reset Reset push Reset-Taster button The factory settings can be die restored using the reset push button. werden. Mit dem Reset-Taster kann Werkseinstellung wiederhergestellt Carrying out a reset Reset durchführen XX De-energise the device. X Gerät spannungslos schalten. XX Keep the reset button pressed on the printed circuit board. X „Reset-Button“ auf der Platine gedrückt halten. XX Switch the voltage supply on. X Spannungsversorgung einschalten. The is restored theGerät factory after … seconds. Nachdevice … Sekunden wirdtodas aufsettings Werkseinstellung versetzt. LED … “fault” and LED … “normal mode” flash simultaneously in … second cycle. LED … „Störung“ und LED … „Normalbetrieb“ blinken im 0,4 Sekunden-Takt gleichzeitig. XX Release the reset button when the LEDs start to flash. X Wenn die LEDs blinken „Reset-Button“ loslassen. XX To return the device to operating mode, switch the voltage supply off and on again. X Um das Gerät in den Betriebsmodus zurückzusetzen, Spannungsversorgung aus- und wieder einschalten. Fig. GEZE IO IO 420 420 Abb.1:1:LEDs LEDsand undconnections Anschlüsse GEZE … 4 … 5 … .1 … GEZE IO 420 BACnet für for GEZE GEZE IO IO 420 420 Networked MS/TP devices Vernetzung MS/TP-Geräte When devicesder areMS/TP-Geräte networked, the topology must always be observed. To avoid branch lines, each IO Bei derMS/TP Vernetzung ist line die Linientopologie unbedingt einzuhalten. Um Stich-Leitung zu ver420 has two BACnet meiden hat jedes IO connections. 420 zwei BACnet-Anschlüsse. LEDs LED … - (rot) LED blinkt, wenn microSD-Card gelesen oder geschrieben wird. LED … - (gelb) LED leuchtet, wenn „CP“ (Kondensatorplatine) angeschlossen ist. GEZE IO 420 LED … - (rot) LED blinkt bei Störung. LED … (grün) Betrieb. … Binary inputLED blinkt im normalen … assigned depending onist. the module type LED … (grün) LED leuchtet, wenn Spannungsversorgung für differently Microcontroller aktiv … Binary input … LED … - (gelb) LED blinkt, wenn3 Daten über BACnet ausgetauscht werden. … multistate value Status message LED in (grün) LED-in 4/3/2/1 leuchtet, wenn Eingang “in” 4/3/2/1 aktiv ist. … multistate value … Command LED out (rot) LED-out 4/3/2/1 leuchtet, wenn Ausgang “out” 4/3/2/1 aktiv ist. … Notification class object … Object for alarm message … .2 … .3 … multistate value … 10 multistate/ value Schnittstellen GEZE IO 420 … Status message Command 11 Binary input … assigned differently depending on the module type Schnittstellen 12 Binary inputà CAN: 50 kBit/s, … verwendet für TE 200, VAT 220, TZ 320. à ST 220: verwendet für ST 220, IQ-Aut Standflügel. 13 multistate value … Status message à GEZE-Bus: verwendet für IQ-Aut Gangflügel. 14 multistate value … Command à BACnet: verwendet für BACnet MS/TP-Schnittstelle. 15 multistate value … Status message 16 multistate value 10 Command 17 multistate value 11 alarm … for DCU DIP-Schalter Konfiguration 18 multistate value 12 alarm … for DCU CAN: multistate value Abschlusswiderstand „CAN“ 120 Ohm 19 13 alarm … for DCU X DIP-Schalter 14 am Anfang und EndeCommand des CAN-BUS auf ON setzen. 20 multistate value BACnet: multistate value Abschlusswiderstand „BACnet“ 120 Ohm 21 15 Command Termination 120 Ohm GEZERouter Cockpit Termination 120 Ohm 22 GEZE-Bus: … .2 … .1 … .1 Object structure of BACnet for GEZE IO 420 Objektstruktur BACnet GEZE IO 420 The IO 420 offers 14von module types,für each of which can be used with up to 22 objects or in the software version IO 420 MBZ. objects are adapted to the selected module type. Theverwendet respectivewerden. EDE listsDie canBACnet-Objekte be found in thewerden annex Das IOThe 420BACnet bietet 12 Modultypen, bei denen jeweils bis zu 22 Objekte to thisgewählten document. dem Modultyp angepasst. Die zugehörigen EDE-Listen sind im Anhang dieses Dokuments zu finden. Index Project Objekt Instance number Instanznummer Description Beschreibung … Device device object multistate value value multistate value value … 1 … contains theGerätebeschreibung. device description. enthält die showsden theaktuellen current module type. zeigt Modultyp. shows theaktuelle currentAlarmmeldung. alarm message. zeigt die … 3 … 6 X Bei Anschluss von GEZE-Motorschloss oder TZ 320 (Anschluss für KL 220), DIP-Schalter auf Changing the object description ON setzen. In einem BACnet MS/TP Netwerksystem darf nur ein Bias aktiviert sein. … .3 Changing the BACnet parameters … .4 The IO 420 has four BACnet parameters which can be set using the GEZE service terminal ST 220 or by editing the microSD configuration file at the PC using the microSD card. àmicroSD-Card à Device ID: mustDie be microSD-Card unambiguous(SDHC) in the wird BACnet network. It may notgeschrieben be allocatedund twice. im FAT16/32-Fileformat gelesen. Andere Formate àà MAC address: must be unambiguous in an network. werden nicht unterstützt. DieMS/TP Dateien des IO 420 können auf eine microSD-Card kopiert werden. àà Baud rate: … Hierfür kB (standard setting). wird das ST 220 benötigt. Gegebenenfalls können die Daten am PC weiter angepasst werden àà Instance number of “notification class object”: The IO 420 only has one “notification object” since there (Parametrierung oder Änderung der BACnet-Namen). Das Profil kann dannclass mittels microSD-Card auf is only one object alarmIO messages. In the factory setting, multi state value #2 is allocated to this, but it can einfor anderes 420 mit gleicher Firmware geladen werden. be changed by the user. The value werden range is auf between … and 90. Folgende Dateien der Karte erstellt: Fig. of BACnet and setting ofEinstellung terminatingvon resistor and network bias.und Netzwerk-Bias Abb.2:2:Wiring Verkabelung vonMS/TP BACnet MS/TP und Abschlusswiderstand A requires oneeinen activeaktiven network-bias. The “BACnet” resistorAbschlusswiderstand built inside the EinBACnet BACnetMS/TP MS/TPnetwork Netzwerk benötigt Network-Bias. Der imterminating Gerät eingebaute device must beam switched at the andüber endden of the bus using the respective DIP switch.werden. „BACnet“ muss Anfangon und am beginning Ende des Bus jeweiligen DIP-Schalter eingeschaltet Maximum MS/TP32 devices be connected in one segment. Es können 32 maximal MS/TPcan Geräte in einem Segment verbunden werden. The wiring must meet exceed theund BACnet andEIA-485 MS/TP Netzwerk EIA-485 network standard beübertreffen specified asund follows: Die Verdrahtung muss or dem BACnet MS/TP Standard erfüllenand oder wie àà Shielded cable, pair-wise twisted. folgt spezifiziert sein: Impedance 100-130 Ohm. àà Geschirmtes, paarweise verdrilltes Kabel. Capacity between wires < 100 pF/m (30 pF/ft). àà Impedanz 100-130 the Ohm. Capacity between wire and<the 200 pF/m (60 pF/ft). àà Kapazität zwischenthe den Adern 100shield pF/m<(30 pF/ft). The maximum length of any segment 900 m (AWG18 cable; wire cross-section … mm²). àà Kapazität zwischen Ader undindividual Schirm < 200 pF/mis(60 pF/ft). large cable lengths, amplifierSegments may have to the bus to guarantee function. à With Die maximale Länge einesaneinzelnen ist be 900integrated m (AWG18inKabel; Aderquerschnitt 0,82 mm²). Bei großen Kabellängen muss ggf. ein Verstärker im Bus integriert werden um die Funktion zu gewährleisten. Standard setting of the interface: Standardeinstellung der Schnittstelle: … kB àà Baud rate: àà Data bit: … kB 76,8 Baudrate: àà Stop bit: … Datenbit: … àà Parity: none Stoppbit: … à Parität: keine The following BACnet object types are used for the GEZE IO 420: Für das GEZE IO 420 werden folgende BACnet àà Device object (one object) Objekttypen verwendet: àà Binary (up four objects) Device input Object (ein to Objekt) àà Multi value (up Binarystate input (bis to zuten vierobjects) Objekte) àà Notification class object (one object) Multistate value (bis zu zehn Objekte) à Notification class object (ein Objekt) DIP-Schalter Abschlusswiderstand „GEZE-Bus“ 120 Ohm The object description is changed through the BACnet connection. Any BACnet configurator can be used for this Network-Bias: DIP-Schalter „Network-Bias“ X Um den Network-Bias für BACnet MS/TP zu aktivieren, DIP-Schalter auf ON setzen. purpose. BMS Only one bias may be enabled In einem Backnet MS/TP Netwerksystem in a BACnet MS/TP network system. darf nur ein Bias aktiviert sein X BACnet DIP-Schalter am ersten und am letzen IO 420 des BACnet MS/TP Bus auf ON setzen. multistate value 16 Command … .4 à Namensdatei für BACnet-Namen: „IO420_V1.BAC“; à Konfigurationsdatei: „IO420_V1.CON“; beinhaltet alle Parameter des IO 420. Changing the object name à Log-Datei: „IO420_00.LOG“ bis „IO420_39.LOG“; This change is carriedJe out by Einstellung editing the werden name file “IO420.BAC” at the (microSD nach Alarmmeldungen undPC Aktionen in card). die Log-Datei geschrieben. If the LED card is flashing, thedarf microSD card must notnicht be taken out ofSlot theherausgenommen slot. The IO 420 must Wenn die for LEDmicroSD für microSD-Card blinkt, die microSD-Card aus dem werden. be de-energised for the microSDder card to be removed inserted. Zum Entfernen und Einstecken microSD-Card dasand IO 420 spannungslos schalten. … .5 XX After the name file has been edited and entered, the following function must be carried out in the service Reset menu for the changes to be applied: “Parameter SD-Card” --> “BAC-Name SD -> IO420”. Title Reset-Taster Name of BACnet Mit dem Reset-Taster kannobject die Werkseinstellung wiederhergestellt werden. 0.Device object Reset durchführen =BAC-PR47-232; schalten. 1.binary input … X Gerät spannungslos =GEZE047AE1E2EL32B125000801; auf der Platine gedrückt halten. 2.binary input … X „Reset-Button“ =GEZE047AE1E2EL32B225000801; X Spannungsversorgung einschalten. 3.binary input … =not_used; Nach … Sekunden wird das Gerät auf Werkseinstellung versetzt. 4.binary input … =not_used; LED … „Störung“ und LED … „Normalbetrieb“ blinken im 0,4 Sekunden-Takt gleichzeitig. 5.Multistate valueX … =module_type; Wenn die LEDs blinken „Reset-Button“ loslassen. 6.Multistate valueX … Um das=GEZE047AE1E2EL32A106000801; Gerät in den Betriebsmodus zurückzusetzen, Spannungsversorgung aus- und wieder 7.Multistate value … einschalten. =TZ320_state; 8.Multistate value … =TZ320_command; 9.Multistate value … =alarm_details; 10.Multistate value … =not_used; 11.Multistate value … =not_used; 12.Multistate value … =not_used; 13.Multistate value … =not_used; 14.Multistate value 10 =not_used; 15.Multistate value 11 =not_used; … 7 GEZE IO 420 … 4 GEZE IO 420 16.Multistate value 12 =not_used; 17.Multistate value 13 =not_used; 16.Multistate value value 14 12 =not_used; 18.Multistate =not_used; 17.Multistate value value 15 13 =not_used; 19.Multistate =not_used; 18.Multistate value =not_used; 21.Notification class14 =xxxyyy; 19.Multistate value 15 =not_used; END OF FILE … 21.Notification class =xxxyyy; END OF FILE … Der Titelteil einschließlich dem „=“ Zeichen darf nicht geändert werden. Das „=“ fungiert hier als Trennzeichen zwischen Titel und BACnet-Namen. Der Namen der einzelnen BACnet-Objekte darf geändert werden. Hierbei gilt zu beachten, die Zeile einem Semikolon „;“ endet The und“=” derhas Name mehr 32 Zeichen The title part dass including the mit “=” sign must not be changed. the nicht function of als separating theenthält. title andDie Verwendung ist nicht erlaubt, Unterstrich, Bindestrich, BACnet name.von TheSonderzeichen name of the individual BACnet ausgenommen devices may be Leerzeichen, changed. Care must be taken that thePunkt line ends und withKomma. a semicolon ";" and the name does not contain more than 32 characters. Special characters may not be used, with the exception of space, underscore, hyphen, full stop and comma. Parametrierung GEZE IO 420 Parameter settingdes GEZE 420 Die erste Parametrierung IO 420IO sollte grundsätzlich mit Hilfe des GEZE Serviceterminals ST 220 erfolgen. Ein- mal kann die Konfigurationsdatei „IO420_V1.CON“ auf eine microSD-Card kopiert undbe gegebenenfalls The eingestellt first time parameters are set for the IO 420, the GEZE service terminal ST 220 should always used. Once am PC weiter angepasst werden. Das so erstellte kann dann mittels microSD-Card auf ein anderes IO PC 420if entered, the configuration file “IO420_V1.CON” canProfil be copied to a microSD card and adapted further at the mit gleicherAFirmware geladen werden. necessary. microSD card can then be used to load this profile to another IO 420 with the same firmware. GEZE IO 420 21.KZF2_TIME(3~30) 22.KZF3_ABORT(0/1) = = 10; 0; 23.KZF3_AFTERTRG.(0/1) = 0; 24.KZF3_TIME(3~30) 25.KZF4_ABORT(0/1) = = 10; 0; 26.KZF4_AFTERTRG.(0/1) = 0; 27.KZF4_TIME(3~30) 28. ADJ_DAY_LIGHT_SAVING (0/1) = = 10; 1; 29.not_used = 0; 30.AL_SUPPR_DUR(0~250) 31.AL_DELAY_TIME(0~250) 32.MODULETYPE(0~15) = = = 50; 100; 10; 33.LOGFILE_LEVEL(0~2) = 0; 34.ZSUMASTER1_ACTIVITY(0/1) = 0; 35.ZSUMASTER1_SUNDAY(0/1) 36.ZSUMASTER1_MONDAY(0/1) 37.ZSUMASTER1_TUESDAY(0/1) 38.ZSUMASTER1_WEDNESDA(0/1) 39.ZSUMASTER1_THURSDAY(0/1) 40.ZSUMASTER1_FRIDAY(0/1) 41.ZSUMASTER1_SATURDAY(0/1) 42.ZSUMASTER1_START_HH(0~23) 43.ZSUMASTER1_START_MM(0~59) 44.ZSUMASTER1_END_HH(0~23) 45.ZSUMASTER1_END_MM(0~59) 46.ZSUMASTER2_ACTIVITY(0/1) = = = = = = = = = = = = 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 47.ZSUMASTER2_SUNDAY(0/1) 48.ZSUMASTER2_MONDAY(0/1) 49.ZSUMASTER2_TUESDAY(0/1) 50.ZSUMASTER2_WEDNESDAY(0/1) 51.ZSUMASTER2_THURSDAY(0/1) 52.ZSUMASTER2_FRIDAY(0/1) 53.ZSUMASTER2_SATURDAY(0/1) = = = = = = = = = 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; = = = 0; 0; 0; = = = = = = = = = = = = 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; Wenn die LED für microSD-Card blinkt,the darfmicroSD die microSD-Card nicht dem Slot werden. If the LED for microSD card is flashing, card must not beaus taken out of herausgenommen the slot. Zum Entfernen derfor microSD-Card spannungslos schalten. The IO 420 mustund be Einstecken de-energised the microSD das cardIO to420 be removed and inserted. Bei Modifizierung der Konfigurationsdatei am the PC sind folgende Punkte zu beachten: Theder following points must be remembered when configuration file is modified at the PC: ààà Der „=“ must Zeichen nicht geändert „=“ fungiert hier alsthe TheParametername parameter nameeinschließlich including thedem “=” sign notdarf be changed. The “=”werden. has the Das function of separating Trennzeichen zwischen title part and the value. Titelteil und Wert. ààà Der Zahlen enthalten. TheParameter-Wert parameter valuedarf maynur only contain numbers. ààà Die in the denmin./max. Klammernvalues Angegebenen min./max. Werte beachten. Heed given in brackets. Parametername Parameter name … 8 Wert Value Beschreibung Description 0.CAN_ADDR1(0~63) 0.CAN_ADDR1(0~63) 1.CAN_ADDR2(0~63) 1.CAN_ADDR2(0~63) 2.CAN_ADDR3(0~63) 2.CAN_ADDR3(0~63) 3.CAN_ADDR4(0~63) 3.CAN_ADDR4(0~63) 4.BACNET_MACADR(0~127) 4.BACNET_MACADR(0~127) 5.BACNET_DEVICEID(1~4194303) 5.BACNET_DEVICEID(1~4194303) 6.BACNET_BAUDRATE(0~6) 6.BACNET_BAUDRATE(0~6) == == == == == == == 1;1; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 1;1; 1;1; 5; 5; 7.BACNET_NOTIFYCLASS(1~90) 7.BACNET_NOTIFYCLASS(1~90) 8.VALUE_UTC_OFFSET(0~780) 8.VALUE_UTC_OFFSET(0~780) 9.SIGN_UTC_OFFSET(1:-/0:+) 9.SIGN_UTC_OFFSET(1:-/0:+) == == == 50; 50; 60; 60; 1;1; 10.CONF_OUTPUT3(0~4) 10.CONF_OUTPUT3(0~4) 11.CONF_OUTPUT4(0~4) 11.CONF_OUTPUT4(0~4) == == 0; 0; 0; 0; 12.INPUT1_TYPE(0~10) 12.INPUT1_TYPE(0~10) 13.INPUT2_TYPE(0~10) 13.INPUT2_TYPE(0~10) 14.INPUT3_TYPE(0~12) 14.INPUT3_TYPE(0~12) 15.INPUT4_TYPE(0~12) 15.INPUT4_TYPE(0~12) == == == == 10; 10; 10; 10; 10; 10; 10; 10; 16.KZF1_ABORT(0/1) 16.KZF1_ABORT(0/1) = = 0; 0; 17.KZF1_AFTERTRG(0/1) 17.KZF1_AFTERTRG(0/1) = = 0; 0; 18.KZF1_TIME(3~30) 18.KZF1_TIME(3~30) 19.KZF2_ABORT(0/1) 19.KZF2_ABORT(0/1) = == = 10; 10; 0; 0; 20.KZF2_AFTERTRG.(0/1) = 0; CAN-Adresse für door Tür #1#1 CAN address for CAN-Adresse für door Tür #2#2 CAN address for CAN-Adresse für door Tür #3 CAN address for #3 CAN-Adresse für door Tür #4 CAN address for #4 BACnet BACnet MAC-Adresse MAC address BACnet -ID BACnet DEVICE DEVICE-ID 00 == nicht aktiv 2= 4= 6= not active 2=19,2 19.2kB kB 4= 57,6 57.6kB kB 6= 115,2 115.2kB kB 1= 3= 5= 1=9,6 9.6kB kB 3= 38,4 … kB kB 5= 76,8 … kB kB Instanznummer Notification class object. Instance numberdes of the notification class object. UTC-Zeit ohne Vorzeichen; (z. EN B. DE = 60 Min.) UTC timeoffset offsetininMinuten; minutes; Betragswert amount shown without sign (e.g. = 60 min.) Vorzeichen UTC-Offset. Sign for UTCfür offset. 11 :: negativer Offset negative offset 0: Offset 0: positiver positive offset Offset Deutschland einen negativen Wert. Offset == [UTC] [UTC] - [local time], daher which hat is why Germany has a negative value. Konfiguration Ausgang … und bei Türlösung Configuration von of output … and … for4door solution 0: inaktiv 3: 0: Ausgang Output inactive 3:Geschlossen Closed 1:1:Alarm 4: und Geschlossen. Alarm 4: Verriegelt Locked and closed. 2: 2: Verriegelt Locked Der Wertbereich jeweiligen Eingang ist je nach Modultyp anders. Thegültige valid value range forfür theden respective input varies depending on the module type. Die der Nummern. Änderung der be Thefolgende followingListe list isdient usedzu to Entschlüsselung decipher the numbers. ChangesDie to the inputs must Eingänge muss GEZEterminal Serviceterminal made using theüber GEZEdas service ST 220. ST 220 erfolgen. 0: 7: 0: inaktiv inactive 7:Standflügel Passive leaf geschlossen closed 1:1:Gangflügel entriegelt 8: Active leaf unlocked 8: KZF-GF KZF-AL (Befehl) (command) 2: (Befehl) 9: 2: Gangflügel-entriegeln Unlock active leaf (command) 9: ZSU-Master Time switch (ZSU) master 3: undrelease SF (Befehle) 10: 3:KZF-GF Short-term (KZF) active leaf 10:Schalter-Funktion Switch function 4: Gangflügel geschlossen 11: für Universalmodul (Schließer) (AL) and passive leaf (IL) (commands) 11:BMA Fire alarm system for universal module 5: (Öffner) 12: RWA für Universalmodul (Schließer) 4:BMA Active leaf closed (closer) 6: (Öffner) 5: RWA Fire alarm system (electric strike) 12: RWA for universal module (closer) 6: RWA (electric strike) 0: Kurzzeitfreigabe Tür #1 ist nicht unterbrechbar Short-term release #1unterbrechbar not interruptible 1:0:Kurzzeitfreigabe Türdoor #1 ist 1: Kurzzeitfreigabe Short-term release #1 interruptible 0: Türdoor #1 kann nicht nachgetriggert werden Short-term release #1 cannot be triggered later 1:0:Kurzzeitfreigabe Türdoor #1 kann nachgetriggert werden 1: Short-term releaseTür door#1#1 be Sekunden) triggered later Kurzzeitfreigabezeit (3can bis 30 Short-term release time door #1 (3 unterbrechbar to 30 seconds) 0: Kurzzeitfreigabe Tür #2 ist nicht 0: Short-term release door #2 not interruptible 1: Kurzzeitfreigabe Tür #2 ist unterbrechbar 1: Short-term release door #2 interruptible 0: Short-term release door #2 cannot be triggered later 1: Short-term release door #2 can be triggered later 54.ZSUMASTER2_START_HH(0~23) 55.ZSUMASTER2_START_MM(0~59) 56.ZSUMASTER2_END_HH(0~23) 57.ZSUMASTER2_END_MM(0~59) 58.ZSUMASTER3_ACTIVITY(0/1) 59.ZSUMASTER3_SUNDAY(0/1) 60.ZSUMASTER3_MONDAY(0/1) 61.ZSUMASTER3_TUESDAY(0/1) 62.ZSUMASTER3_WEDNESDAY(0/1) 63.ZSUMASTER3_THURSDAY(0/1) 64.ZSUMASTER3_FRIDAY(0/1) 65.ZSUMASTER3_SATURDAY(0/1) 66.ZSUMASTER3_START_HH(0~23) 67.ZSUMASTER3_START_MM(0~59) 68.ZSUMASTER3_END_HH(0~23) 69.ZSUMASTER3_END_MM(0~59) 70.ZSUMASTER4_ACTIVITY(0/1) Short-term release time door #2 (3 to 30 seconds) 0: Short-term release door #3 not interruptible 1: Short-term release door #3 interruptible 0: Short-term release door #3 cannot be triggered later 1: Short-term release door #3 can be triggered later Short-term release time door #3 (3 to 30 seconds) 0: Short-term release door #4 not interruptible 1: Short-term release door #4 interruptible 0: Short-term release door #4 cannot be triggered later 1: Short-term release door #4 can be triggered later Short-term release time door #4 (3 to 30 seconds) 0: automatic switch over between summer and winter time is disabled. 1: automatic switch over between summer and winter time is enabled. Duration of the alarm suppression with “watchdog” module type in seconds Duration of the alarm delay with “watchdog” module type in seconds 1: Watchdog 9: Window 2: One-door solution 10: Universal 3: Two-door solution 11: RWS + KL400 4: Four-door solution 12: DCU 1, … or … 5: IQ Lock EL + AUT 13: DCU … revolving door 6: IQ Lock 72 + AUT (from software version 14: DCU 1, … or … + RWS + KL400 2) 15: MBZ300 smoke and heat extraction 7: Automatic stat. system 8: Automatic 4Sec 0: Level 0. No protocol is written in the log file 1: Level 1. Alarm messages are written in the log file 2: Level 2. Alarm messages and actions are written in the log file 0: as “ZSU master group 1” not active 1: as “ZSU master group 1” active Day configuration “ZSU master group 1” 0: as “ZSU master group 1” inactive on this day of the week 1: as “ZSU master group 1” active on this day of the week Start time “ZSU master group 1” Specification of “hours” 0-23; specification of “minutes” 0-59 End time “ZSU master group 1” Specification of “hours” 0-23; specification of “minutes” 0-59 0: as “ZSU master group 2” not active. 1: as “ZSU master group 2” active. Day configuration “ZSU master group 2”. 0: as “ZSU master group 2” inactive on this day of the week 1: as “ZSU master group 2” active on this day of the week Start time “ZSU master group 2” Specification of “hours” 0-23; specification of “minutes” 0-59 End time “ZSU master group 2” Specification of “hours” 0-23; specification of “minutes” 0-59 0: as “ZSU master group 3” not active. 1: as “ZSU master group 3” active. Day configuration “ZSU master group 3”. 0: as “ZSU master group 3” inactive on this day of the week 1: as “ZSU master group 3” active on this day of the week Start time “ZSU master group 3” Specification of “hours” 0-23; specification of “minutes” 0-59 End time “ZSU master group 3” Specification of “hours” 0-23; specification of “minutes” 0-59 0: as “ZSU master group 4” not active. 1: as “ZSU master group 4” active. … GEZE IO 420 71.ZSUMASTER4_SUNDAY(0/1) 72.ZSUMASTER4_MONDAY(0/1) 73.ZSUMASTER4_TUESDAY(0/1) 74.ZSUMASTER4_WEDNESDAY(0/1) 75.ZSUMASTER4_THURSDAY(0/1) 76.ZSUMASTER4_FRIDAY(0/1) 77.ZSUMASTER4_SATURDAY(0/1) 78.ZSUMASTER4_START_HH(0~23) 79.ZSUMASTER4_START_MM(0~59) 80.ZSUMASTER4_END_HH(0~23) 81.ZSUMASTER4_END_MM(0~59) 82.ZSUMASTER5_ACTIVITY(0/1) = = = = = = = = = = = = 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 83.ZSUMASTER5_SUNDAY(0/1) 84.ZSUMASTER5_MONDAY(0/1) 85.ZSUMASTER5_TUESDAY(0/1) 86.ZSUMASTER5_WEDNESDAY(0/1) 87.ZSUMASTER5_THURSDAY(0/1) 88.ZSUMASTER5_FRIDAY(0/1) 89.ZSUMASTER5_SATURDAY(0/1) 90.ZSUMASTER5_START_HH(0~23) 91.ZSUMASTER5_START_MM(0~59) 92.ZSUMASTER5_END_HH(0~23) 93.ZSUMASTER5_END_MM(0~59) 94.DOOR1_SLAVEZSU_GR1(0/1) 95.DOOR1_SLAVEZSU_GR2(0/1) 96.DOOR1_SLAVEZSU_GR3(0/1) 97.DOOR1_SLAVEZSU_GR4(0/1) 98.DOOR1_SLAVEZSU_GR5(0/1) = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = 99.DOOR1_SLAVEZSU_ABORT(0/1) = 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 100.DOOR2_SLAVEZSU_GR1(0/1) 101.DOOR2_SLAVEZSU_GR2(0/1) 102.DOOR2_SLAVEZSU_GR3(0/1) 103.DOOR2_SLAVEZSU_GR4(0/1) 104.DOOR2_SLAVEZSU_GR5(0/1) 105.DOOR2_SLAVEZSU_ABORT(0/1) = = = = = = 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 106.DOOR3_SLAVEZSU_GR1(0/1) 107.DOOR3_SLAVEZSU_GR2(0/1) 108.DOOR3_SLAVEZSU_GR3(0/1) 109.DOOR3_SLAVEZSU_GR4(0/1) 110.DOOR3_SLAVEZSU_GR5(0/1) 111.DOOR3_SLAVEZSU_ABORT(0/1) = = = = = 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; = 0; 112.DOOR4_SLAVEZSU_GR1(0/1) 113.DOOR4_SLAVEZSU_GR2(0/1) 114.DOOR4_SLAVEZSU_GR3(0/1) 115.DOOR4_SLAVEZSU_GR4(0/1) 116.DOOR4_SLAVEZSU_GR5(0/1) 117.DOOR4_SLAVEZSU_ABORT(0/1) = = = = = = 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 118.TYPE OF CP(0~3) = 0; Day configuration “ZSU master group 4” 0: as “ZSU master group 4” inactive on this day of the week 1: as “ZSU master group 4” active on this day of the week GEZE IO 420 … Start time “ZSU master group 5” Specification of “hours” 0-23; specification of “minutes” 0-59 End time “ZSU master group 5” Specification of “hours” 0-23; specification of “minutes” 0-59 Slave assignment of door #1 to “ZSU master group” … to … 0: Door #1 is not part of this ZSU group 1: Door #1 is part of this ZSU group 0: Time switch function for door #1 not interruptible 1: Time switch function for door #1 interruptible Slave assignment of door #2 to “ZSU master group” … to … 0: Door #1 is not part of this ZSU group 1: Door #1 is part of this ZSU group 0: Time switch function for door #2 not interruptible 1: Time switch function for door #2 interruptible Slave assignment of door #3 to “ZSU master group” … to … 0: Door #3 is not part of this ZSU group 1: Door #3 is part of this ZSU group 0: Time switch function for door #3 not interruptible 1: Time switch function for door #3 interruptible Slave assignment of door #4 to “ZSU master group” … to … 0: Door #4 is not part of this ZSU group 1: Door #4 is part of this ZSU group 0: Time switch function for door #4 not interruptible 1: Time switch function for door #4 interruptible 0: no CP 3: Pin “+24V” and “DET” of the connection “CP” are short-circuited together. 1: one CP “CP” are short-circuited together. 2: two CPs Module description The IO 420 offers 10 module types. The respective inputs/outputs are used in different ways depending on the module type. … Start time “ZSU master group 4” Specification of “hours” 0-23; specification of “minutes” 0-59 End time “ZSU master group 4” Specification of “hours” 0-23; specification of “minutes” 0-59 0: as “ZSU master group 5” not active. 1: as “ZSU master group 5” active. Day configuration “ZSU master group 5” 0: as “ZSU master group 5” inactive on this day of the week 1: as “ZSU master group 5” active on this day of the week Module type “watchdog” The “watchdog” module type can be used for monitoring a door. When the monitoring function is armed, the door may only be opened by release. In all other cases, an alarm message is sent after the alarm suppression and alarm delay times have expired. When the monitoring function is not armed, the door can be opened without release. Connections Input … Output … 3 … 1 … 3 … Assignment/function description àà rising flank - monitoring is disarmed àà falling flank - monitoring is armed Release with short-term release function; only with rising flank Bolt feedback Door contact Monitoring state; enabled with armed monitoring Electric strike fail safe Alarm suppressed: … sec cycle Alarm delayed: on Alarm enabled: off Alarm suppressed: off Alarm delayed: off Alarm enabled: Permanently on Tab. 1: Pin assignment for “watchdog” module type Functional description of the inputs and outputs current state – current state Monitoring disarmed Monitoring armed Alarm suppressed (output … enabled and output … flashing every few seconds) State changes to Alarm active Monitoring armed Alarm active Monitoring disarmed Alarm suppressed Alarm active Monitoring disarmed Monitoring armed Alarm delayed Alarm delayed (output … and … enabled.) END OF FILE … Alarm enabled (output … and … enabled.) 10 Menu Duration for short-term release Alarm active State changes with Sabotage àà falling flank at input … àà CAN command “watchdog enable” àà BACnet command “watchdog enable” Sabotage àà rising flank at input … àà CAN command “watchdog disable” àà BACnet command “watchdog disable” If the door is locked but open Sabotage àà rising flank at input … àà CAN command “watchdog disable” àà BACnet command “watchdog disable” If the alarm activation has been cancelled and the alarm acknowledged. If the alarm suppression time has expired. àà àà àà àà Sabotage If the alarm delay time has expired. Monitoring armed Short-term release through input … CAN command “watchdog enable”, (if the alarm activation has been cancelled “watchdog disable” or “KZF” and a command sent either via input 2, CAN or BACnet as acknowledgement to the àà BACnet command “KZF” IO 420.) Monitoring armed àà Short-term release through input … (if the alarm activation has been cancelled àà CAN command “watchdog enable”, and a command sent either via input 2, “watchdog disable” or “KZF” CAN or BACnet as acknowledgement to the àà BACnet command “KZF” IO 420.) 11 … GEZE IO 420 Module type “1 door” … The “1 door” module type can be used for controlling one door. The connection of release switch, short-term release push button, reed contact and lock feedback is possible. The messages are forwarded via bus. Connections Input Output … 2 … 4 … 2 … 4 GEZE IO 420 Assignment/function description àà rising flank - unlock àà falling flank - lock Short-term release is triggered with rising flank Module type “2 doors” The “2 doors” module type can be used for controlling two mutually independent doors. The connection of door contacts and lock feedback to the inputs is possible. The connection of a release switch is not designated for this module type. Connections Input Bolt feedback Door contact Output Electric strike fail safe Electric strike fail secure Can be configured àà àà àà àà àà àà àà àà àà àà Can be configured inactive Sabotage alarm closed Locked closed and locked inactive Sabotage alarm closed Locked closed and locked Tab. 2-pin assignment module type “1-door” current state – current state unlocked In this state output … is enabled and output … is disabled. Output … and … are enabled or disabled depending on the configuration. State changes to locked if time switch is not enabled. State changes with àà falling flank from input … àà CAN command “lock” àà BACnet command “lock” àà sabotage time switch (ZSU) If ZSU is active and one of the above-mentioned release devices occurs. locked unlocked àà rising flank from input … àà CAN command “unlock” In this state output … is enabled and output … is disabled. àà BACnet command “unlock” Output … and … are enabled or disabled short-term release (KZF) àà rising flank from input … depending on the configuration. àà CAN command “short-term release” àà BACnet command “short-term release” time switch (ZSU) If ZSU message is enabled and ZSU was not interrupted. locked If KZF time has expired short-term release (KZF) In this state output … is enabled and output If KZF interruptible is enabled and the door is … disabled. closed again after opening. KZF is enabled for Output … and … are enabled or disabled at least … seconds depending on the configuration. KZF time unlocked àà rising flank from input … can be extended by input … if “KZF reàà CAN command “unlock” triggering” is enabled. àà BACnet command “unlock” time switch (ZSU) locked àà falling flank from input … In this state output … is enabled and output with enabled option time switch interàà CAN command “lock”. … disabled. Output … and … are enabled or ruption àà BACnet command “lock” disabled depending on the configuration. locked àà sabotage without enabled option time switch inter- àà If time switch message is no longer ruption enabled. … 2 … 4 … 2 … 4 Assignment/function description Lock feedback door #1 Door contact door #1 Lock feedback door #2 Door contact door #2 Electric strike fail safe door #1 Electric strike fail safe door #2 Can be configured for door #1 Can be configured for door #2 àà àà àà àà àà àà àà àà àà àà Inactive Sabotage alarm closed Locked closed and locked Inactive Sabotage alarm closed Locked closed and locked Tab. 3: Pin assignment module type “2-doors” current state – current state unlocked In this state output … or … is enabled. Output … and … are enabled or disabled depending on the configuration. State changes to locked if time switch is not enabled. locked In this state output … or … is disabled. Output … and … are enabled or disabled depending on the configuration. unlocked time switch (ZSU) short-term release (KZF) time switch (ZSU) short-term release (KZF) In this state output … or … is enabled. Output … and … are enabled or disabled depending on the configuration. KZF retriggering is not possible in this mode. locked time switch (ZSU) In this state output … or … is enabled. Output … and … are enabled or disabled depending on the configuration. locked with enabled option time switch interruption locked without enabled option time switch interruption unlocked State changes with àà CAN command “lock” àà BACnet command “lock” àà sabotage If ZSU is active and one of the above-mentioned release devices occurs. àà CAN command “unlock” àà BACnet command “unlock” àà CAN command “short-term release” àà BACnet command “short-term release” If ZSU message is enabled and if ZSU was not interrupted. àà if KZF time has expired àà if KZF interruptible is enabled and the door is closed again after opening. The min. KZF time is … seconds. àà CAN command “unlock” àà BACnet command “unlock” àà CAN command “lock”. àà BACnet command “lock” àà sabotage àà If time switch message is no longer enabled. Time switch interruption If “time switch interruptible” is enabled in the IO 420 configuration, the “time switch” state can be interrupted using the “lock” command. The state then changes to “locked” and the flag “time switch aborted” is set. No further change in state can take place when the flag is set. The flag is reset again when the door is unlocked and locked. The message “time switch” has to be enabled. 12 13 microSD-Card … GEZE IO 420 Module type “4 doors” The “4 doors” module type can be used for controlling four mutually independent doors. Only the connection of door contacts to the inputs is possible. The connection of a lock feedback or a release switch is not designated for this module type. Connections Input Output … 2 … 4 … 2 … 4 Die microSD-Card (SDHC) wird im FAT16/32-Fileformat geschrieben und gelesen. Andere Formate werden nicht unterstützt. Die Dateien des IO 420 können auf eine microSD-Card kopiert werden. Hierfür wird das ST 220 benötigt. Gegebenenfalls können die Daten am PC weiter angepasst werden (Parametrierung oder Änderung der BACnet-Namen). Das Profil kann dann mittels microSD-Card auf GEZE IO 420 ein anderes IO 420 mit gleicher Firmware geladen werden. Folgende Dateien werden auf der Karte erstellt: … Module type à“automatic stat” / “automatic … sec” Namensdatei für BACnet-Namen: „IO420_V1.BAC“; à Konfigurationsdatei: „IO420_V1.CON“; alle Parameter des IO 420. can be connected at With this module type, the IO 420 can control a GEZE doorbeinhaltet drive via inputs/outputs. Switches à Log-Datei: „IO420_00.LOG“ „IO420_39.LOG“; input … and … for this. Input … and … are used to bis evaluate the door feedback. Je nach Einstellung werden Alarmmeldungen und Aktionen in die Log-Datei geschrieben. WithWenn this module no fault messages thedie drive can be evaluated via dem the IOSlot 420, since the drive communicates die LEDtype, für microSD-Card blinkt,ofdarf microSD-Card nicht aus herausgenommen werden. via the inputs/outputs rather than via RS485. Zum Entfernen und Einstecken der microSD-Card das IO 420 spannungslos schalten. Assignment/function description Door contact door #1 Door contact door #2 … .5 Door contact door #3 Door contact door #4 Connections Reset Input Reset-Taster Electric strike fail safe door #1 … Electric strike fail safe door #2 Electric strike fail safe door #3 Electric strike fail safe door #4 Output Tab. 4: Pin assignment module type “4-doors” current state – current state unlocked In this state output 1, 2, … or … is enabled. State changes to locked if time switch is not enabled. time switch (ZSU) locked In this state output 1, 2, … or … is disabled. unlocked short-term release (KZF) time switch (ZSU) short-term release (KZF) In this state output 1, 2, … or … is enabled. KZF re-triggering is not possible in this mode. locked unlocked time switch (ZSU) In this state output 1, 2, … or … is enabled. locked with enabled option time switch interruption locked without enabled option time switch interruption … State changes with àà CAN command “lock” àà BACnet command “lock” àà sabotage If ZSU is active and one of the above-mentioned release devices occurs. àà CAN command “unlock” àà BACnet command “unlock” àà CAN command “short-term release” àà BACnet command “short-term release” If ZSU message is enabled and if ZSU was not interrupted. if KZF time has expired if KZF interruptible is enabled and the door is closed again after opening. The min. KZF time is … seconds. àà CAN command “unlock” àà BACnet command “unlock” àà CAN command “lock”. àà BACnet command “lock” àà sabotage àà If time switch message is no longer enabled. … 4 … 2 … 4 Assignment/function description àà rising flank: change of state to “automatic” àà falling flank: change of state to “night” Mit dem Reset-Taster kann die Werkseinstellung wiederhergestellt werden. àà rising flank: change of state to “permanently open” Reset durchführen àà falling flank: no effect X Gerät spannungslos schalten. Lock X state „Reset-Button“ auf der Platine gedrückt halten. Door contact X Spannungsversorgung einschalten. Command DCU “night”wird das Gerät auf Werkseinstellung versetzt. Nach to … Sekunden LED 3to „Störung“ LED … „Normalbetrieb“ blinken im 0,4 Sekunden-Takt gleichzeitig. Command DCU “shopund closed” Wenntodie LEDs blinken „Reset-Button“ loslassen. Command DCU “automatic” X X Um das Gerät in den Betriebsmodus zurückzusetzen, Spannungsversorgung aus- und wieder einschalten. Command to DCU “permanently open” Tab. 5: Pin assignment of module type “automatic” State State changes to automatic night Output … is enabled. If module type “automatic … sec” is enabled, output … is switched off again after … shop closed seconds. permanently open shop closed (exit only) night Output … is enabled. If module type “automatic … sec” is enabled, output … is switched off again after … seconds. automatic permanently open permanently open: night Output … is enabled. If module type “automatic … sec” is enabled, output … is switched off again after … seconds. shop closed automatic night automatic Output … is enabled. If module type “automatic … sec” is enabled, output … is switched off again after … seconds. shop closed permanently open 14 State changes with àà falling flank input … àà CAN command “night” … àà BACnet command “night” àà CAN command “close shop” àà BACnet command “close shop” àà of the rising flank input … àà CAN command “permanent open” àà BACnet command “permanent open” àà of the falling flank input … àà CAN command “night” àà BACnet command “night” àà of the rising flank input … àà CAN command “automatic” àà BACnet command “automatic” àà of the rising flank input … àà CAN command “permanent open” àà BACnet command “permanent open” àà of the falling flank input … àà CAN command “night” àà BACnet command “night” àà CAN command “close shop” àà BACnet command “close shop” àà of the rising flank input … àà CAN command “automatic” àà BACnet command “automatic” àà of the rising flank input … àà CAN command “automatic” àà BACnet command “automatic” àà CAN command “close shop” àà BACnet command “close shop” àà of the rising flank input … àà CAN command “permanent open” àà BACnet command “permanent open” 15 LED … - (gelb) LED in - (grün) LED out - (rot) zu beachten, dass die Zeile mit einem Semikolon „;“ endet und der Name nicht mehr als 32 Zeichen enthält. Die Verwendung von Sonderzeichen ist nicht erlaubt, ausgenommen Leerzeichen, Unterstrich, Bindestrich, Punkt und Komma. … GEZE IO 420 Parametrierung GEZE IO 420 erste Parametrierung des IO 420 sollte grundsätzlich mit Hilfe des GEZE Serviceterminals ST 220 erfolgen. Ein5.6 DieModule type “window” GEZE IO 420 … .2 … 3 … .3 BeiConnections der Modifizierung der Konfigurationsdatei am PC sind folgende Punkte zu beachten: Assignment/function description à Der einschließlich dem „=“ Zeichen geändert werden. „=“ fungiert hier als Collective command “open windows” with darf risingnicht flank. The falling flank has noDas function InputParametername … Trennzeichen zwischen Titelteil und Wert. Collective command “close windows” with rising flank. The falling flank has no function … à Der Parameter-Wert darf nur Zahlen enthalten. Collective command “stop windows”. Whether a stop is triggered by falling or rising flank can be configured. … à Die in den Klammern Angegebenen min./max. Werte beachten. Feedback “closed” for window … and 2. The contacts should be closed in series. … Output Relais_open_win1. This relay is enabled if window … is to be opened. … Parametername Wert Beschreibung Relais_close_win1. This relay is enabled if window … is to be closed. … 0.CAN_ADDR1(0~63) = 1; CAN-Adresse für Tür #1 Relais_open_win2. This relay is enabled if window … is to be opened. … 1.CAN_ADDR2(0~63) = 0; CAN-Adresse für Tür #2 Relais_close_win2. This relay is enabled if window … is to be closed. … 2.CAN_ADDR3(0~63) = 0; CAN-Adresse für Tür #3 3.CAN_ADDR4(0~63) = 0; CAN-Adresse für Tür #4 Tab. 6: Pin assignment of module=type 4.BACNET_MACADR(0~127) 1; “window” BACnet MAC-Adresse 5.BACNET_DEVICEID(1~4194303) = 1; BACnet DEVICE -ID 6.BACNET_BAUDRATE(0~6) = 5; State … = changes nicht aktiv 2= 19,2 kB 4= 57,6 kB current state – current state to State changes with 6= 115,2 kB 1= 9,6 kB 3= 38,4 kB 5= stop opening àà 76,8 risingkBflank from input … 7.BACNET_NOTIFYCLASS(1~90) = 50; Instanznummer des Notification class object. all outputs are disabled. àà BACnet command “open window” àà CAN command “open 8.VALUE_UTC_OFFSET(0~780) = 60; UTC-Zeit offset in Minuten; Betragswert ohne Vorzeichen; (z. B. DE =window” 60 Min.) closing à à rising flank from input … 9.SIGN_UTC_OFFSET(1:-/0:+) = 1; Vorzeichen für UTC-Offset. àà BACnet command “close window” … : negativer Offset àà CAN command “close window” 0: positiver Offset Offset = [UTC] - [local time], daher hat Deutschland einenfrom negativen closing opening àà rising flank input 1Wert. Output … or … is enabled. àà BACnet command “open window” 10.CONF_OUTPUT3(0~4) = 0; Konfiguration von Ausgang … und … bei Türlösung à CAN command “open window” 11.CONF_OUTPUT4(0~4) = 0; 0: Ausgang inaktiv 3:àGeschlossen stop à rising flank input … 1: Alarm 4:àVerriegelt undfrom Geschlossen. àà if the time of 90 sec has expired. 2: Verriegelt à BACnetist command “stop” anders. Der gültige Wertbereich für den jeweiligenàEingang je nach Modultyp 12.INPUT1_TYPE(0~10) = 10; CAN command “stop” Die folgende Liste dient zu Entschlüsselungààder Nummern. Die Änderung der = 10; 13.INPUT2_TYPE(0~10) opening àà rising flank from input … = 10; closing Eingänge muss über das GEZE Serviceterminal ST 220 erfolgen. 14.INPUT3_TYPE(0~12) Output … or … is enabled. à BACnet command “close window” 15.INPUT4_TYPE(0~12) = 10; 0: inaktiv 7: àStandflügel geschlossen à à CAN command “close window” 1: Gangflügel entriegelt 8: KZF-GF (Befehl) stop à rising flank from input … 2: Gangflügel-entriegeln (Befehl) 9:àZSU-Master if the time of 90 sec has expired. 3: KZF-GF und SF (Befehle) 10:àà Schalter-Funktion BACnet command “stop”(Schließer) 4: Gangflügel geschlossen 11:ààBMA für Universalmodul CANfür command “stop” (Schließer) 5: BMA (Öffner) 12:àà RWA Universalmodul 6: RWA (Öffner) … = Module type “universal” 16.KZF1_ABORT(0/1) 0; 0: Kurzzeitfreigabe Tür #1 ist nicht unterbrechbar 1: Kurzzeitfreigabe Tür #1 ist unterbrechbar With this module type, the IO 420 control viaTür inputs/outputs. Switches can be connected at input … 17.KZF1_AFTERTRG(0/1) = has 0; universal 0: Kurzzeitfreigabe #1 kann nicht nachgetriggert werden and … for this. The inputs can be configured as ZSU masters the ZSU master can be activation via the respec1: Kurzzeitfreigabe Türand #1 kann nachgetriggert werden tive switch or internal timer. In addition, … and … canTür be #1 configured for RWA or BMA. 18.KZF1_TIME(3~30) = 10; inputs Kurzzeitfreigabezeit (3 bis 30 Sekunden) 19.KZF2_ABORT(0/1) = 0; 0: Kurzzeitfreigabe Tür #2 ist nicht unterbrechbar Connections Assignment/function description 1: Kurzzeitfreigabe Tür #2 ist unterbrechbar àà Switch for relay 1: Input … Output … is switched on for rising flank, the output is switched off for falling flank. àà ZSU master 1: ZSU master #1 is enabled as long as the switch is switched on. àà Switch for relay … 2 àà ZSU master … àà Switch for relay … 3 àà ZSU master … àà BMA (closer) àà RWA (closer) àà Switch for relay … 4 àà ZSU master … àà BMA (closer) àà RWA (closer) Schnittstellen / GEZE IO 420 Output … Schnittstellen mal eingestellt kann die Konfigurationsdatei „IO420_V1.CON“ auf eine microSD-Card kopiert und gegebenenfalls With this module type, the IO 420 can control two windows via inputs/outputs. Switches can be connected at am PC weiter angepasst werden. Das so erstellte Profil kann dann mittels microSD-Card auf ein anderes IO 420 input … and … for this. Control is by means of collective commands i.e. the windows are triggered together. mit gleicher Firmware geladen werden. With thisdie module no fault messages ofdie themicroSD-Card drive can be evaluated, since the drive communicates via the inputs/ Wenn LED fürtype, microSD-Card blinkt, darf nicht aus dem Slot herausgenommen werden. outputs rather than RS485. der microSD-Card das IO 420 spannungslos schalten. Zum Entfernen undvia Einstecken LED blinkt, wenn Daten über BACnet ausgetauscht werden. LED-in 4/3/2/1 leuchtet, wenn Eingang “in” 4/3/2/1 aktiv ist. LED-out 4/3/2/1 leuchtet, wenn Ausgang “out” 4/3/2/1 aktiv ist. Output relay … à CAN: 50 kBit/s, verwendet für TE 200, VAT 220, TZ 320. relayverwendet … àOutput ST 220: für ST 220, IQ-Aut Standflügel. Output relay … verwendet für IQ-Aut Gangflügel. à GEZE-Bus: relay 4verwendet für BACnet MS/TP-Schnittstelle. àOutput BACnet: Tab. … Pin assignment module type “universal” DIP-Schalter Konfiguration State CAN: … .4 … – … .5 changes to State changes with AbschlusswiderstandState „CAN“ 120 Ohm off on àà with of the corresponding input, if this is X DIP-Schalter am Anfang und Ende des CAN-BUS aufrising ON flank setzen. The corresponding output is disabled. configured as a switch. BACnet: Abschlusswiderstand „BACnet“ 120 Ohm àà BACnet command “on” X BACnet DIP-Schalter am ersten und am letzen IO 420 des BACnet MS/TP Bus auf ON setzen. àà CAN command “on” GEZE-Bus: DIP-Schalter Abschlusswiderstand Ohm time switch „GEZE-Bus“ 120 If ZSU message is enabled and if ZSU was not interrupted. X Bei Anschluss von GEZE-Motorschloss oder TZ 320 (Anschluss für KL 220), DIP-Schalter auf on off àà falling flank of the corresponding input, if this is conONissetzen. The corresponding output enabled. if ZSU is not enabled. figured as a switch. àà BACnet command “off” Network-Bias: DIP-Schalter „Network-Bias“ àà CAN command “off” auf ON setzen. X Um den Network-Bias für BACnet MS/TP zu aktivieren, DIP-Schalter time switch àà with the above-mentioned In einem BACnet MS/TP Netwerksystem darf nur ein Bias aktiviert sein. release devices if the ZSU message is enabled. time switch off àà If the ZSU message is disabled. The corresponding output is enabled. àà BACnet command “off” can trigger this change in state microSD if ZSU is configured as “interruptible”. àà CAN command “off” triggerAndere this change in state if microSD-Card Die microSD-Card (SDHC) wird im FAT16/32-Fileformat geschrieben undcan gelesen. Formate ZSU is configured as “interruptible”. werden nicht unterstützt. Die Dateien des IO 420 können auf eine microSD-Card kopiert werden. Hierfür wird das ST 220 benötigt. Gegebenenfalls können die Daten am PC weiter angepasst werden oder Änderung der BACnet-Namen). Das Profil kann dann mittels microSD-Card auf Module type(Parametrierung “IQ lock El + Aut” ein anderes IO 420 mit gleicher Firmware geladen werden. The module type “IQ Lock ELDateien + Aut” iswerden used toauf activate GEZEerstellt: motor locks. Folgende der Karte IQ Aut is connected the IO 420 bus (terminal„IO420_V1.BAC“; “ST 220”) and controlled accordingly. All the states and fault à with Namensdatei fürvia BACnet-Namen: messages from the Aut can be read out and forwardedbeinhaltet via BACnet. à IQ Konfigurationsdatei: „IO420_V1.CON“; alle Parameter des IO 420. IQ Lock EL is connected with the IO 420 via inputs/outputs and controlled accordingly. For this reason, the IO 420 à Log-Datei: „IO420_00.LOG“ bis „IO420_39.LOG“; nach Einstellung werden Alarmmeldungen undvia Aktionen can neither read out Je fault messages of IQ Lock EL nor forward these BACnet.in die Log-Datei geschrieben. In microSD-Card the case of fireblinkt, protection capacitornicht power must connected to terminal Wenn die LED für darf diedoor, microSD-Card aus(CP) dem Slot be herausgenommen werden. CP CAUTION the parameter “Conf. CP” must (see chapter … Service menu). Zum Entfernen and und Einstecken der microSD-Card dasbe IO set 420accordingly spannungslos schalten. Release of the passive leaf Reset When the passive leaf is released, the active leaf is automatically released immediately. Reset-Taster Hold open Mit dem Reset-Taster kann die Werkseinstellung wiederhergestellt werden. Reset With IQ Lock EL the statedurchführen “permanently open” is possible. X Gerät spannungslos With IQ Aut the door remains opened forschalten. the hold-open time set in the IO 420 configuration. X „Reset-Button“ auflock der as Platine halten. The locking bolt is held by the switch long gedrückt as the door is open. Spannungsversorgung einschalten. Nach … Sekunden wird das Gerät auf Werkseinstellung versetzt. Assignment/function description LED … „Störung“ und LED … „Normalbetrieb“ blinken im 0,4 Sekunden-Takt gleichzeitig. GF_locked (feedback) X Wenn die LEDs blinken „Reset-Button“ loslassen. àà Release_AL (command, factory setting) zurückzusetzen, Spannungsversorgung aus- und wieder X Um das Gerät in den Betriebsmodus àà KZF_AL_IL (command), triggered with rising flank. einschalten. X Connections Input … 2 … 4 Output … 2 … 4 àà KZF_AL_IL (command, factory setting), triggered with rising flank. àà AL_closed (feedback) àà BMA (evaluated as electric strike) àà RWA (evaluated as electric strike) àà BMA (factory setting, electric strike) àà RWA (electric strike) àà IL_closed (feedback) àà KZF_AL (command), triggered with rising flank. Release for IQ Lock EL … Day/night for IQ Lock EL Feedback relay active when GF is locked Feedback relay active when GF is locked Tab. 8: Pin assignment of module type “IQ lock” 16 17 … .1 GEZE IO 420 … Active leaf current state – current state night Outputs 1, … and … are disabled. State changes to day released short-term release (KZF) day Output … is enabled night released short-term release released Output … is enabled. night day short-term release short-term release Output … is enabled. night day released error … .2 State changes with àà BACnet command “day” àà CAN command “day” àà rising flank of input “release” àà BACnet command “release” àà CAN command “release” àà rising flank of input “KZF” àà BACnet command “short-term release” àà CAN command “short-term release” àà falling flank from input “day/night”. àà BACnet command “night” àà CAN command “night” àà rising flank of input “release” àà BACnet command “release” àà CAN command “release” àà rising flank of input “KZF” àà BACnet command “short-term release” àà CAN command “short-term release” àà falling flank of input “release” (the last previous state was “night”) àà BACnet command “night” àà CAN command “night” àà BACnet command “day” àà CAN command “day” àà Not possible Modultyp „RWS + KL“ Module type “RWS + KL” Im Modultyp + KL“ arbeitet IO 420 als Gateway zwischen CAN-Bus undbus BACnet und übersetzt die LifeIn the module„RWS type “RWS + KL” thedas IO 420 works as a gateway between the CAN and BACnet and translates time-Meldung des TZof320 Dieprotocol. erzeugten Steuerbefehle werdengenerated vom IO 420 CAN-Befehle the lifetime message theins TZBACnet-Protokoll. 320 into the BACnet The control commands areinturned into umgesetzt und an CAN commands byTZ the320 IO weitergeleitet. 420 and forwarded to the TZ 320. Gateway CAN BACnet àà TZ 320 sendet jede Sekunde eine Lifetime-Meldung, die ins BACnet-Protokoll umgewandelt und auf transmits a lifetime message every second, which is transformed into the BACnet protocol andBACnet forwardMS/TP-Ebene ed on BACnet weitergeleitet MS/TP level. wird. àà BACnet-Objekt multistate value 44 is istdefined für die Ansteuerung Dieses Objektthree umfasst drei BACnet object multi state value for activating der the TZ 320 320.definiert. This object comprises commands: Befehle: „Kurzzeitfreigabe“, “short-term release”, “unlock”„Entriegeln“ and “lock”. und „Verriegeln“. àà Die z.B. “collective „Sammelverriegelung“, überetc. BUS“, A. werden IO 420 The Bus-Funktionen bus functions ofder theTZ TZ 320, 320 e.g. locking”, “BMA„BMA-Gruppe group over BUS” are u. currently notvom supported derzeit nicht Die Bus-Funktion „Zeitschaltuhr“ implementiert und wird unterstütz. by the IO 420.unterstützt. The bus function “timer” is implemented andist is supported. àà Wenn ZSU-Master über BACnet ZSU-Meldung sendet, das IOthis 420into diese in eine CAN-Meldung. If a ZSUein master transmits a ZSU message via BACnet, the IOübersetzt 420 translates a CAN message. àà Wenn das IOis420 als Zeitschaltuhr-Master konfiguriert sendet the das ZSU IO 420 die ZSU-Meldung sowohl über If the IO 420 configured as a timer master, the IO 420ist, transmits message both via CAN bus and CAN-Bus BACnet. als auch über BACnet. Klemmenbox Terminal box Die undand Ausgänge IO 420 können alsused IO-Erweiterung für die for TZ 320 verwendet werden. The Eininputs outputs der of the IO 420 can be as an IO extension the TZ 320. Die KL 220 … Eingänge und … Ausgänge. das IO … Eingänge … Ausgänge hat, wird die KL 220 has hat … inputs and … outputs. Since the Da IO 420 has420 … inputs and … und outputs, the configuration for Konfiguratithe fifth and on füroutput den fünften sechsten Ausgang der KL 220 nicht ausgewertet. sixth of the und KL 220 is not evaluated. àà falling flank of input “release” (the last previous state was “night”) àà BACnet command “night” àà CAN command “night” àà BACnet command “day” àà CAN command “day” àà rising flank of input “release” àà BACnet command “release” àà CAN command “release” GEZE Cockpit The error can be acknowledged with any command. Passive leaf current state – current state unlock (shown as “release” in VAT 220): Output … is enabled. lock (shown as “night” in VAT 220): Output … is disabled. into lock (shown as “day” in VAT 220): This state is an intermediate state between “unlock” and “lock”. into unlock (shown as “day” in VAT 220): This state is an intermediate state between “lock” and “unlock”. error (shown as “error” in VAT 220): 18 GEZE IO 420 State changes to lock unlock if ZSU is not enabled. State changes with àà BACnet command “lock” àà CAN command “lock” àà the rising flank of input “release_IL” àà BACnet command “unlock” àà CAN command “unlock” Fig. 3:3:Composition BACnet MS/TP for GEZE IO 420 as Gateway for320 TZ 320 Abb. Aufbau BACnet MS/TP und and CANCAN für GEZE IO 420 als Gateway für TZ Setting in TZin320 IO 420 Einstellung TZ and 320 und IO 420 The error can be acknowledged with any command. CAN address in identical for damit both devices to beGeräte able to communicate with àà CAN: The Die CAN-Adresse in TZ TZ 320 320 and undIO IO420 420 must mussbe identisch sein, die beiden miteinander über one another via CAN. können. CAN kommunizieren CAN terminating resistor TheDer CAN terminating resistor in TZin320 420 be switched on. sein. àà CAN-Abschlusswiderstand: CAN-Abschlusswiderstand TZ and 320 IO und IOmust 420 muss eingeschaltet The Abschlusswidertand terminating resistor for bus in in IOIO 420 must beeingeschaltet switched on. sein. This setting is important the “teràà Der fürthe denGEZE GEZE-BUS 420 muss Diese Einstellung istfor wichtig für minal box” function. die Funktion „Klemmenbox“. Timer function: àà Zeitschaltuhr-Funktion: The TZ TZ 320 320 muss must als be „slave“ configured as a “slave”. Die konfiguriert sein („ZSU-Gruppe x/ Busfunktion ein“). TheIO IO420 420jeper segment must configured as “master”. Ein Segment muss alsbe „master“ konfiguriert sein. The ZSU-Masterfunktion ZSU master function wird is supported by the 420 withModultypen the followingunterstützt: module types: àà Die vom IO 420 bei IO folgenden 1-door solution àà 1-Türlösung 2-door solution àà 2-Türlösung 4-door solution àà 4-Türlösung àà Universal 19 19 GEZE IO 420 GEZE IO 420 … Module type “DCU1, … and 8” “DCU1, … and 8” are type identifications of swing door and sliding door drive with DCU light (CAN interface). In this type of module, the IO 420 functions as gateway as in module type “RWS + KL”. Therefore, drives require DCU light so that the lifetime report is forwarded to IO 420 via Can. Active leaves and passive leaves can also be connected. Gateway CAN BACnet àà Automatic drive transmits a lifetime message every second, which is transformed into the BACnet protocol and forwarded on BACnet MS/TP level. àà BACnet object multistate value … represents the current operating mode. àà BACnet object multistate value … can change the operating mode. àà The inputs and outputs must be used freely as in module type “universal”. Setting in DCU àà CAN: The CAN address in DCU and IO 420 must be identical for both devices to be able to communicate with one another via CAN. E.g. DCU-GF has CAN-Address … and DCU-SF has 8. Then you must set CAN addresses in IO 420: In “Buskonf.” “konf.CAN” “1.CAN-Adresse:” the CAN address must be entered for DCU-GF. In “Buskonf.” “konf.CAN” “2.CAN-Adresse:” the CAN address must be entered for DCU-SF. àà CAN-terminating resistor on the first and last device must be activated. If DCU-GF DCU-SF IO 420 Parameter Bus address Bus address Buskonf./ 1.CAN-Adr Buskonf./ 1.CAN-Adr Value … 2 … 2 … Module type “DCU6” (revolving door) In this type of module, the IO 420 functions as gateway as in module type “DCU 1, … and 8”. Therefore, drives require DCU light so that the lifetime report is forwarded to IO 420 via Can. Active leaves and passive leaves can also be connected. Fig. 4:4:Connection example theModultyp module type KL 220” Abb. Anschlussbeispiel fürfor den „RWS“RWS + KL+220“ Gateway CAN BACnet àà Automatic drive transmits a lifetime message every second, which is transformed into the BACnet protocol and forwarded on BACnet MS/TP level. àà BACnet object multistate value … represents the current operating mode. àà BACnet object multistate value … can change the operating mode. àà The inputs and outputs must be used freely as in module type “universal”. Setting in DCU àà CAN: The CAN address in DCU and IO 420 must be identical for both devices to be able to communicate with one another via CAN. In “Buskonf.” “konf.CAN” “1.CAN-Adresse:” the CAN address of the revolving door drive must be entered. àà CAN-terminating resistor of both devices must be activated. … Module type “DCU128+RWS+KL” àà This type of module is a summary of “RSW+KL” and “DCU 1, … and 8”. TZ 320, DCU-GF and DCU-SF are connected by CAN. Terminals 45 and 46 of TZ 320 are connected to the GEZE BUS of IO 420. Thus, the inputs and outputs of IO 420 are used as terminal box for RWS. Setting in DCU àà CAN address of DCU-GF and TZ320 must have the same CAN address. Precisely this address is entered in IO 420 under “Buskonf.” “Konf. CAN” “CAN-Adr[DCU GF,TZ]”. àà The CAN address of DCU-SF is entered in IO 420 under “Buskonf.” “Konf. CAN” “CAN-Adr[DCU SF]”. If DCU-GF DCU-SF TZ 320 IO 420 20 20 Parameter Bus address Bus address Bus address Buskonf./ 1.CAN-Adr Value … 2 … 1 Buskonf./ 2.CAN-Adr … Parameter Bus address Bus address Bus address 21 16.Multistate value 12 =not_used; 17.Multistate value 13 =not_used; 18.Multistate value 14 =not_used; 19.Multistate value 15 =not_used; 21.Notification class =xxxyyy; END OF FILE … … .1 GEZE IO 420 … Module type “MBZ” àà An emergency power control unit MBZ 300 connected via CAN. Der Titelteil einschließlich dem „=“ Zeichen darfisnicht geändert werden. Das „=“ fungiert hier als Trennzeichen zwischen Titel und BACnet-Namen. derthe einzelnen darf geändert werden. Hierbei gilt The following BACnet object typesDer areNamen used for GEZE IOBACnet-Objekte 420 MBZ: zu dass(one die Zeile mit einem Semikolon „;“ endet und der Name nicht mehr als 32 Zeichen enthält. Die àà beachten, Device object object) Verwendung von Sonderzeichen ist nicht erlaubt, ausgenommen Leerzeichen, Unterstrich, Bindestrich, Punkt àà Multistate value (up to 66 objects) und Komma. àà Notification class object (one object) … Parametrierung GEZE The parameter setting for the IOIO 420420 should always be done with the aid of the GEZE service terminal ST 220. LEDs LED … - (rot) LED blinkt, wenn microSD-Card gelesen oder geschrieben wird. GEZE IO 420 LED … - (gelb) LED leuchtet, wenn „CP“ (Kondensatorplatine) angeschlossen ist. LED … - (rot) about LED Information theblinkt statebei ofStörung. a fire section LEDpoints … - (grün) LED blinkt im normalen Betrieb. The state_slot_x_CM/SM and alarm_slot_x_CM/SM provide information about the state of the control or sensor module. LED leuchtet, wenn Spannungsversorgung für Microcontroller aktiv ist. LED … - (grün) LED … - (gelb) LED blinkt, wenn Daten über BACnet ausgetauscht werden. Value X LED in - (grün) LED-in 4/3/2/1 leuchtet, wenn Eingang “in” 4/3/2/1 aktiv ist. (state CM / SM) State LED out (rot) LED-out 4/3/2/1 leuchtet, wenn Ausgang “out” 4/3/2/1 aktiv ist. 1, 9, 33, 41, 65, OK … .2 Once set, Parametrierung the configuration fileIO“IO4220MBZ.CON” can be mit copied a microSD card. Die erste des 420 sollte grundsätzlich Hilfetodes GEZE Serviceterminals ST 220 erfolgen. Einmal eingestellt kann die Konfigurationsdatei „IO420_V1.CON“ auf eine microSD-Card kopiert und gegebenenfalls ThisPC module is only werden. availableDas for the variant of GEZE IO 420 with the product ID 187103. am weitertype angepasst so erstellte Profil kann dann mittels microSD-Card auf ein anderes IO 420 With this variant all other module types are inactive and cannot be used. mit gleicher Firmware geladen werden. 73, 97, 105 All other values / GEZE IO 420 Schnittstellen Schnittstellen Alarm à CAN: 50 kBit/s, verwendet für TE 200, VAT 220, TZ 320. à button ST 220: verwendet für ST 220, IQ-Aut Standflügel. Bit … (X-1) Alarm pressed à GEZE-Bus: Bit … (X-1) Smoke detector … verwendet für IQ-Aut Gangflügel. à BACnet: Bit … (X-1) Smoke detector … verwendet für BACnet MS/TP-Schnittstelle. Bit … (X-1) Wenn die LED für microSD-Card blinkt, darf die microSD-Card nicht aus dem Slot herausgenommen werden. The MBZ module configuration is not copied to the microSD card. Zum Entfernen und Einstecken der microSD-Card das IO 420 spannungslos schalten. … .3 0; 0; 1; 1; 5; CAN-Adresse für Tür #3 CAN-Adresse für Tür #4 BACnet MAC-Adresse BACnet DEVICE -ID … = nicht aktiv 2= 19,2 kB 4= 57,6 kB 6= 115,2 kB 1= 9,6 kB 3= 38,4 kB 5= 76,8 kB 7.BACNET_NOTIFYCLASS(1~90) = 50; Instanznummer des Notification class object. 8.VALUE_UTC_OFFSET(0~780) = 60; UTC-Zeit offset in Minuten; Betragswert ohne Vorzeichen; (z. B. DE = 60 Min.) Information about the state of a drive line 9.SIGN_UTC_OFFSET(1:-/0:+) = 1; Vorzeichen für UTC-Offset. The points state_slot_x_DM and alarm_slot_x_DM provide information about the state of the drive modules. … : negativer Offset 0: positiver Offset Value State Offset = [UTC] - [local time], daher hat Deutschland einen negativen Wert. … Opening or opened = 0; 10.CONF_OUTPUT3(0~4) Konfiguration von Ausgang … und … bei Türlösung … Closing or completely=closed 11.CONF_OUTPUT4(0~4) 0; 0: Ausgang inaktiv 3: Geschlossen … Stopped 1: Alarm 4: Verriegelt und Geschlossen. 2: Verriegelt … Alarm (RWA tripped) Der gültige Wertbereich für den jeweiligen Eingang ist je nach Modultyp anders. 12.INPUT1_TYPE(0~10) = 10; Die folgende Liste dient zu Entschlüsselung der Nummern. Die Änderung der 13.INPUT2_TYPE(0~10) = 10; Value X (alarm) State 14.INPUT3_TYPE(0~12) = 10; Eingänge muss über das GEZE Serviceterminal ST 220 erfolgen. … OK 15.INPUT4_TYPE(0~12) = 10; 0: inaktiv 7: Standflügel geschlossen 33 Configuration fault 1: Gangflügel entriegelt 8: KZF-GF (Befehl) 34 CAN BUS faulty 2: Gangflügel-entriegeln (Befehl) 9: ZSU-Master All other values (Value minus … summarises various3:messages in binary code) KZF-GF und SF (Befehle) 10: Schalter-Funktion 4: Gangflügel geschlossen 11: BMA für Universalmodul (Schließer) Bit … (X-1) BUS fault 5: BMA (Öffner) 12: RWA für Universalmodul (Schließer) Bit … (X-1) Network fault 6: RWA (Öffner) Bit … (X-1) Line fault 16.KZF1_ABORT(0/1) = 0; 0: Kurzzeitfreigabe Tür #1 ist nicht unterbrechbar Bit … (X-1) Rechargeable battery fault 1: Kurzzeitfreigabe Tür #1 ist unterbrechbar Bit … (X-1) Alarm 17.KZF1_AFTERTRG(0/1) = 0; 0: Kurzzeitfreigabe Tür #1 kann nicht nachgetriggert werden 1: Kurzzeitfreigabe Tür #1 kann nachgetriggert werden 18.KZF1_TIME(3~30) = 10; Kurzzeitfreigabezeit Tür #1 (3 bis 30 Sekunden) 19.KZF2_ABORT(0/1) = 0; 0: Kurzzeitfreigabe Tür #2 ist nicht unterbrechbar 1: Kurzzeitfreigabe Tür #2 ist unterbrechbar DIP-Schalter Konfiguration (state PM) DIP-Schalter Abschlusswiderstand „GEZE-Bus“ 120 Ohm … OK X Bei Anschluss von GEZE-Motorschloss oder TZ 320 (Anschluss für KL 220), DIP-Schalter auf All other values (Value minus … summarises various messages in binary code) ON setzen. Bit … (X-1) PM voltage, rechargeable battery, safety fuse F1 OK Network-Bias: DIP-Schalter „Network-Bias“ Bit … (X-1) PME1 voltage, rechargeable battery, safety fuse F1 OK X Um den Network-Bias für BACnet MS/TP zu aktivieren, DIP-Schalter auf ON setzen. Bit … (X-1) PME2 voltage, rechargeable battery, safety use F1 OK In einem BACnet MS/TP Netwerksystem darf nur ein Bias aktiviert sein. Bit … (X-1) Charge … Bit … (X-1) Alarm Bit … (X-1) Charge … microSD >= 65 Rechargeable battery operation GEZE-Bus: Controlling the drives via BACnet Wert Beschreibung Parametername Commands for opening, closing or the window 0.CAN_ADDR1(0~63) = stopping 1; CAN-Adresse für drives Tür #1 can be given using the point command_slot_x_DM. 1.CAN_ADDR2(0~63) = 0; CAN-Adresse für Tür #2 = = = = = Signal relay active CAN: Information about the state of the power module Abschlusswiderstand „CAN“ 120 Ohm X DIP-Schalter The points state_slot_x_PM and alarm_slot_x_PM about the state of the drive modules. am Anfang und provide Ende desinformation CAN-BUS auf ON setzen. BACnet: Abschlusswiderstand „BACnet“ 120 Ohm Value X StateX BACnet DIP-Schalter am ersten und am letzen IO 420 des BACnet MS/TP Bus auf ON setzen. Be to adhere to the when planning Bei sure der Modifizierung der following Konfigurationsdatei am PC and sind commissioning: folgende Punkte zu beachten: Based on the EN 12101-10 test of the MBZ a common power supply werden. for the IODas 420„=“ and MBZ ishier not als ààà Der Parametername einschließlich dem „=“300, Zeichen darf nicht geändert fungiert permitted. Consequently, a separate power supply must be used for the GEZE IO 420 MBZ. Trennzeichen zwischen Titelteil und Wert. ààà Installing the GEZE IOdarf 420nur MBZ in theenthalten. MBZ control cabinet invalidates the VdS certification of the MBZ. Der Parameter-Wert Zahlen ààà MBZ 300 and GEZE IO 420 MBZ components areWerte delivered separately ex works. Die in den Klammern Angegebenen min./max. beachten. 2.CAN_ADDR3(0~63) Command Value 3.CAN_ADDR4(0~63) Ready … 4.BACNET_MACADR(0~127) Open … 5.BACNET_DEVICEID(1~4194303) Close … 6.BACNET_BAUDRATE(0~6) Stop … … .4 microSD-Card Die microSD-Card (SDHC) wird im FAT16/32-Fileformat geschrieben und gelesen. Andere Formate werden nicht unterstützt. Die Dateien des IO 420 können auf eine microSD-Card kopiert werden. Value X State Hierfür wird das ST 220 benötigt. Gegebenenfalls können die Daten am PC weiter angepasst werden (alarm PM) … OK (Parametrierung oder Änderung der BACnet-Namen). Das Profil kann dann mittels microSD-Card auf ein anderes IO 420 mit gleicher Firmware geladen werden. 33 Configuration fault 34 CANFolgende BUS faulty Dateien werden auf der Karte erstellt: à Namensdatei für BACnet-Namen: „IO420_V1.BAC“; All other values (Value minus … summarises various messages in binary code) à Konfigurationsdatei: „IO420_V1.CON“; beinhaltet alle Parameter des IO 420. Bit … (X-1) Rechargeable battery fault à Log-Datei: „IO420_00.LOG“ bis „IO420_39.LOG“; Bit … (X-1) Safety fuse F2 defective Je nach Einstellung werden Alarmmeldungen und Aktionen in die Log-Datei geschrieben. Bit … (X-1) Temperature sensor defective Bit 3Wenn (X-1) dieSystem defective blinkt, darf die microSD-Card nicht aus dem Slot herausgenommen werden. LED fürvoltage microSD-Card Zum Entfernen und Einstecken der microSD-Card das IO 420 spannungslos schalten. … .5 Setting in MBZ Reset àà A CAN address must be set at MBZ 300. This address minus … is entered in IO 420 under “Buskonf.” “Konf. CAN” “CAN-Adr”. (MBZ 300 = n, IO 420 MBZ = (n-1) ) Reset-Taster If MBZ 300 IO 420 MBZ Mit dem Reset-Taster kann die Werkseinstellung wiederhergestellt werden. Reset durchführen Parameter Value Gerät spannungslos Bus X address … .. 64schalten. X „Reset-Button“ auf der Platine gedrückt halten. Bus address … .. 63 (MBZ-1) Spannungsversorgung einschalten. Nach … Sekunden wird das Gerät auf Werkseinstellung versetzt. àà Do not use any vent groups and runtime mode in MBZ 300! blinken im 0,4 Sekunden-Takt gleichzeitig. LED … „Störung“ und LED … „Normalbetrieb“ àà If IO 420 MBZ firmware been reloaded to a IO 420, the IO 420 must then be reset to factory settings (see X Wennhas die LEDs blinken „Reset-Button“ loslassen. chapter 7). X Um das Gerät in den Betriebsmodus zurückzusetzen, Spannungsversorgung aus- und wieder àà The current MBZ module configuration must be configured under “Modulkonf.”. einschalten. X If the CAN address is changed, the current MBZ module configuration is lost. … 22 … 23 … Device_IO420 … 8 … N N notification_class_obj … 15 50 N N module_type … 19 … 1 11 N Y … alarm_type … 19 … 1 15 N Y … door_state … 19 … 1 … N Y … door_command … 19 … 1 … Y Y … 1 50 … .5 Y … N Y … Device_IO420 … 8 … N N notification_class_obj … 15 50 N N module_type … 19 … 1 11 N Y … alarm_type … 19 … 1 15 N Y … DCU_state … 19 … 1 … N Y 51 DCU_command … 19 … 1 … Y Y 61 object-type … 3 … N Y 32 close_state_AL … 3 … N Y … Y Y N … 4 … unlock_state_IL … 3 … N N 32 close_state_IL … 3 … N N … door2_close_state … 3 … N N … Device_IO420 … 8 … N Y Device_IO420 notification_class_obj module_type alarm_type door1_state door1_command door2_state door2_command … 1 … 1 … 1 … 1 … 15 19 19 19 19 19 19 … 50 … 2 … 4 … 6 N N N N N Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y notification_class_obj … 15 50 N Y module_type … 19 … 1 11 N Y … alarm_type … 19 … 1 15 N Y … ActiveLeaf_state … 19 … 1 … N Y 52 ActiveLeaf_command … 19 … 1 … Y Y 62 … 5 N Y 72 … 2 Y Y 82 max-presentvalue commandable … 1 … 1 … 6 … 4 … 4 … 2 … 6 … 6 … 6 … 6 50 state-textreference Optional Keyname / Objectname lock_state … 3 … N Y … close_state … 3 … N Y … Device_IO420 … 8 … N N notification_class_obj … 15 50 N N module_type … 19 … 1 11 N Y … objectinst. Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y … 50 module type RWS notif. class 11 15 … 3 … 3 … 3 … 3 N N N N N N N N N Y N Y N Y N Y state-textreference min-present-value … 1 … 1 … 1 … 1 … supports COV … 2 … 4 … 50 … 2 … 4 … 6 … 8 … 10 present-value-default objectinst. object-type … 3 … 3 … 15 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 commandable … 1 … 1 … 1 … 1 … 1 … 1 … 1 … 1 max-present-value door1_close_state door2_close_state door3_close_state door4_close_state Device_IO420 notification_class_obj module_type alarm_type door1_state door1_command door2_state door2_command door3_state door3_command door4_state door4_command 19 19 Mandatory Optional device obj.- Inst. Keyname / Objectname … 1 supports COV … .6 … door-solution InactiveLeaf_state InactiveLeaf_command … min-presentvalue 50 present-value-default … 2 … 6 … 6 object-type … 11 15 … 3 … 3 device obj.- Inst. … 1 … 1 … 1 … notif. class state-textreference N N N max-present-value … 2 … objectinst. … 3 … device obj.- Inst. supports COV objectinst. device obj.- Inst. unlock_state_AL commandable min-presentvalue Keyname / Objectname … 1 … Mandatory 24 present-value-default object-type Optional door1_lock_state door1_close_state door2_lock_state Keyname / Objectname … .3 Optional … door-solution Mandatory 50 module type IQ lock El + Aut Mandatory … .2 … notif. class Y N … notif. class N … 3 alarm_type … 19 … 1 15 N Y 23 TZ320_state … 19 … 1 11 N Y 53 TZ320_command … 19 … 1 … Y Y 63 … notif. class … state-textreference … 3 … state-textreference … supports COV close_state … close_state supports COV … commandable Y lock_state commandable state-textreference N max-presentvalue supports COV … Keyname / Objectname max-presentvalue commandable … max-present-value … min-present-value device obj.- Inst. lock_state objectinst. Keyname / Objectname min-presentvalue Optional object-type Mandatory Optional min-presentvalue … door-solution Mandatory objectinst. … .1 module type automatic object-type EDE lists device obj.- Inst. … .4 notif. class Annex present-value-default … GEZE IO 420 present-value-default GEZE IO 420 present-value-default 50 25 … 3 … N Y 34 Input1 … 1 … 3 … N Y 34 Input2 … 2 input3_state … 3 … N N 34 Input3 … 3 input4_state … 3 … N N 34 Input4 … Device_IO420 … 8 … N Y Device_IO420 notification_class_obj … 15 50 N Y module_type … 19 … 1 11 N Y … alarm_type … 19 … 1 15 N Y … output1_state … 19 … 1 … N Y … 2 Y … 3 N … 2 … 1 … 1 … N … 1 … Y output1_command … 19 … output2_state … 19 … output2_command … 19 … output3_state … 19 … output3_command … 19 … output4_state … 19 … output4_command … 19 10 … 1 83 N 83 N 83 … 1 N N notification_class_obj 15 50 N N module_type 19 … alarm_type 19 … 44 operating_mode 19 … Y 54 mode_command 19 … Y 44 lock_state 19 … Y Y 54 door_command 19 … 3 N Y 44 door_state 19 … 2 Y Y 54 reduced_width 19 … Y 44 master_key 19 … Y 54 output1_command 19 10 50 … 3 … N Y … close_state … 3 … N Y … Device_IO420 … 8 … N N notification_class_obj … 15 50 N N module_type … 19 … 1 11 N Y … alarm_type … 19 … 1 15 N Y … watchdog_state … 19 … 1 … N Y 56 watchdog_command … 19 … 1 … Y Y 66 … 1 13 N N … 15 N N 101 14 N N 84 … 7 Y N 85 … 5 N N 86 … 4 Y N 87 … 5 N N 88 … 2 Y N 89 … 4 N N 90 … 3 Y N 91 50 alarm_dcu_1 19 11 … 31 N N 92 50 alarm_dcu_2 19 12 … 31 N N 93 50 alarm_dcu_3 19 13 … 31 N N 94 50 output2_command 19 14 … 1 … 91 output3_command 19 15 … 1 … 91 output4_command 19 16 … 1 … 91 notif. class state-textreference supports COV commandable max-presentvalue min-presentvalue device obj.- Inst. lock_state … 1 … 1 notif-class state-textreference supports COV N Keyname / Objectname objectinst. commandable 83 Optional object-type max-presentvalue N … N N N N module type watchdog … present-valuedefault object-instance object-type notif. class state-textreference supports COV commandable max-presentvalue min-presentvalue object-name optional input1_state 50 module type window … 3 … N Y … window2_close_state … 3 … N Y … Device_IO420 … 8 … N N notification_class_obj … 15 50 N N module_type … 19 … 1 11 N Y … alarm_type … 19 … 1 15 N Y … window1_state … 19 … 1 … N Y 45 window1_command … 19 … window2_state … 19 … window2_command … 19 … 1 … 1 … Y Y 55 … 4 N Y 45 … 3 Y Y 55 notif. class state-textreference supports COV command-able max-presentvalue window1_close_state objectinst. Keyname / Objectname device obj.- Inst. min-presentvalue Optional object-type Mandatory 26 mandatory input2_state Mandatory … .9 present-valuedefault objectinst. object-type device obj.- Inst. Optional present-value-default … .8 … .10 Module type „DCU 1,2 and 8“ Mandatory Keyname / Objectname GEZE IO 420 min-presentvalue module type universal present-valuedefault … .7 GEZE IO 420 50 27 GEZE IO 420 … .13 Module type „MBZ“ (firmware IO 420 MBZ) N 83 Device_IO420 … N 83 notification_class_obj_ 15 50 N 83 module_type 19 … 15 … N N N N N 83 alarm_slot_1_PM 19 … 8 … N N state_slot_1_PM 19 notification_class_obj 15 50 N N alarm_slot_2_CM/SM module_type 19 … Input1 … 1 Input2 … 2 Input3 … 3 Input4 … Device_IO420 15 34 … 1 … 128 N Y 19 … 1 34 N Y state_slot_2_CM/SM 19 … 1 128 N Y … Y N 34 N Y … N Y … 1 … 13 N N … 15 N N 101 command_slot_3_DM 19 … 1 14 N N 84 alarm_slot_3_DM 19 … 1 … 7 Y N 85 state_slot_3_DM 19 … 1 … 1 … N N 86 N N Y alarm_type 19 … 19 … mode_command 19 … lock_state 19 … door_command 19 … 1 … Y N 87 command_slot_X_DM 19 m … 1 … N door_state 19 … 1 … N N 88 alarm_slot_X_DM 19 m+1 … 1 34 N N reduced_width 19 … 1 … Y N 89 state_slot_X_DM 19 m+2 … 1 … N N master_key 19 … output1_command 19 10 alarm_slot_Y_WM 19 n … 1 34 N Y state_slot_Y_WM 19 n+1 … 1 … N Y … 1 … 4 N N 90 … 3 Y N 91 notif-class N operating_mode … state-textreference supports COV commandable … 15 … N N N N … 1 … 1 50 max-presentvalue present-valuedefault object-instance object-name optional object-type notif-class state-textreference supports COV mandatory commandable max-presentvalue min-presentvalue present-valuedefault object-instance optional object-type mandatory object-name min-presentvalue … .11 Module type „DCU 6“ GEZE IO 420 50 50 50 … objects at one time describe a drive module alarm_dcu_1 19 11 … 31 N N 98 50 alarm_dcu_2 19 12 … 31 N N 99 50 alarm_dcu_3 19 13 … 31 N N 100 50 output2_command 19 14 … 1 … 91 output3_command 19 15 … 1 … 91 output4_command 19 16 … 1 … 91 N 50 50 There are different BACnet objects present depending on the number of modules in MBZ 300. … .12 Module type “DCU 128+RWS+KL” 28 lock_state_TZ … 1 door_state_TZ … 2 door_state_DCU_GF … 3 door_state_DCU_SF … 4 Device_IO420 … 1 notification_class_obj 15 50 module_type 19 … N N N N N N N … N … N … N … 1 … 1 13 N N … 15 N N … 14 N N 84 … 7 Y N 95 … 5 N N 86 … 4 Y N 87 N N Alarm_TZ 19 … operating_mode_DCU 19 … mode_command 19 … lock_state_DCU 19 … door_command 19 … mode_TZ 19 … 1 … N N 53 reduced_width 19 … 1 … Y N 89 maintennance 19 … emergency open 19 10 dcu_alarm1 19 dcu_alarm2 dcu_alarm3 … 1 notif-class state-textreference supports COV commandable max-presentvalue min-presentvalue present-valuedefault object-instance object-name optional object-type mandatory 50 … 4 N N 96 … 2 Y N 97 11 … 31 N N 92 50 19 12 … 31 N N 93 50 19 13 … 31 N N 94 50 … 29 30 watchdog no alarm unlocked open unlock unlock no alarm locked inactive off stopped automatic night unlock off stop watchdog enabled automatic night no command unlock enable watchdog unlock unlock Text … or Text … or Inactive-Text Active-Text … 2 … 4 … 6 23 32 34 44 45 51 52 53 54 55 56 61 62 63 66 72 82 # Reference Number unlocked no command contact inside contact outside not closed summer mode no master key GF-master active key active turn(ed) off no command night/ locked shop close/ unlocked no maintenance required. emergency emergency open inactive open active no alarm 86 87 88 89 90 91 95 96 97 101 fire alarm sabotage-TZ GF and SF closed contact authorized GF and SF locked automatic short time release(d) automatic/ unlocked SF-master key GF- and active SF-master key active SF closed smoke heat alarm Text … IQ lock error alarm delayed burglar-lock IQ lock error burglary alarm fire alarm active Text … alarm active short time released emergency open-TT time switch group conflict iq_lock_bus Text … sabotage alarm automatic_4sec Text … windows Text … sabotage-KL turn off/ unlocked operating mode off DCU not initialized Text … DCU disturbed Text … service mode alarm active sabotage-TT BACnet disturbed universal Text 10 DCU_128 Text 12 BACnet disturbed heat and active sluice smoke alarm Text 10 Text 12 IQ lock 72 error DCU_128_ RWS_KL Text 14 DCU not present Text 14 Text 15 RTC disturbedTZ Watchdog Text 15 maintenance maintenance maintenance DCU Type/ RTC due GF due SF due GF and GF-SF incon- disturbed-TZ SF sistent power-off Text 13 Comm. KL disturbed Comm. TT disturbed passive sluice sluice busy Text 11 active sluice passive sluice sluice busy Text … DCU_6_revolving_door Text 13 IQ Aut active IQ Aut inac- IQ lock El error leaf error tive leaf error rws_kl400 Text 11 emergency can disturbed relay fault-TZ exit opener open-BUS fault-TZ burglary fire alarm group can/power group conflict conflict supply disturbed automatic_ stat Text … time switch burgalry fire alarm group can/power group conflict group conflict conflict supply disturbed permanently RWS/ unopen/ unlocked locked unknown unknown permanently RWS open permanently time switch open active Text … maintenance maintenance maintenance due GF due SF due GF and SF turn(ed) on winter mode GF closed SF locked shop close no command night 85 shop closed Text … inactive GF locked short time release short time release permanently open alarm supressed lock short time released into unlock into lock short time released lock release shop close short time released close pre-lock released automatic active window error door alarmTZ time switch active sabotage alarm iq_lock_el Text … shop closed permanently DCU error opened closing time switch active hazard alarm-TZ short time release short time released 83 night 4_doors Text … smoke heat burglary alarm alarm 2_doors Text … GEZE IO 420 84 lock lock disable watchdog day night watchdog disabled open on time switch active day night opening on active unlocked emergency open-TZ lock lock closed locked fire alarm 1_door Text … or Text … or Inactive-Text Active-Text … Ref. no GEZE IO 420 State Text 31 32 100 99 98 94 93 92 # Reference Number 100 99 98 94 93 92 # Reference Number unknown error 03_230V failure unknown error unknown error 83_Recharge- 84_KOM DCU1 unknown able battery error unknown error unknown error 48_KOM FREQ 50_Activation … 80_Mains 81_24V power internal failure 49_Activation … 82_24V external 51_Software 52_Kat3 uR2 redundancy unknown error 22_Break Out unknown error unknown error 18_Bolt … 19_Bolt … contact contact 21_Draw-in safety 24_Nighttime close 17_Bolt … 20_Post safety 23_Emergency stop 16_Bolt … unknown error unknown error unknown error unknown error unknown unknown error error unknown error 78_Excess 79_Motor temperature-SF relay-SF 91_Production test SK unknown error unknown error unknown error 87_Sabotage unknown error 60_Permanent actuation VPS … 61_Permanent actuation VPS … 57_Permanent actuation ANS … 59_Permanent actuation ANS … 56_Permanent actuation ANS … 58_Permanent actuation ANS … 91_no unknown impluse from error encoder unknown error 90_control unit defective. unknown error unknown error unknown error 61_Battery flat. unknown error Text30 77_Motor brake 46_KOM TPS 15_locked 29_Night25_Post 26_Draw-in 27_Break Out 28_Emergency stop time closer safety active safety active active active active unknown error unknown error 60_Err. in control unit-GF Text29 unknown error 45_KOM PC 1-2 unknown error 29_SIO-SF detective 57_Smoke alarm-SF 46_Tempsens (motor) fault.-GF 15_DPS disconnected Text 15 76_T77_TSens(motor) Sens(control) fault.-SF fault-SF 45_Drive is too hot-GF 14_MPS disconnected Text 14 27_SIO1/SIO2 28_Motor active relay-GF unknown error 25_Obstacle 26_Zero while open- position err. ing Text28 Text27 Text26 Text25 Text24 Text23 unknown error Text22 53_Manual 54_DPS unlocked/230V comm. err. failure Text21 74_Disc brake 75_Disc does not brake hold switch-off 44_EEPROM S unknown error unknown error unknown error unknown error 71_Excess voltage switch-off 70_Target speed not reached. 51_ 52_CAN err. brake/24V-SF failure Text20 74_Encoder 73_Permanant err.-SF actuation-SF 72_Motor fault-SF 40_CRC PC … 41_CRC PC … unknown error 47_Tempsens 48_Excess no alarm 50_Fault/ (control) fault.- temperatureDCU1-T30 GF GF(180deg) expansion Text19 44_Stop is active unknown error 42_Emergency lock active 41_Testing SIO-GF 75_Drive too hot(98 deg)-SF 13_SIS-GF detective 12_Motor fault-GF 11_Motor short-GF 10_Encoder err.-GF 39_Freq. converter 22_Mechanical 23_Mechan- unknown fault GF ical fault SF error Text18 unknown 66_Ro67_Rotary 68_Rotary 69_Rotary error tary encoder encoder uR1 encoder uR2 encoder INIT short-circuit 36_Control 37_Freq.con- 38_Freq. does not cool verter hot converter down overloaded 20_Door(GF) 21_Door(SF) missing missing Text17 unknown error 35_Control hot 71_Motor short-SF Text 13 Text 12 Text 11 Text 10 10_Mainte- 11_Too much unknown 8_Mainte- 9_Maintenance time nance revolu- nance brake friction error tions 70_Err. in control unit-SF 16_Err.locking- 17_Err. 18_Bolt 19_SIS-SF GF unlocking-GF signal not defective correct Text16 unknown error 32_Motor ther- 33_Motor hot 34_Momal sensor tor does not cool down unknown error unknown error 2_Number of unknown 4_Position is unknown leaves error unknown error unknown error 67_Err. unknown unlocking-SF error 1_Door radius 65_ 66_Err. Comm.Err locking-SF GF- SF 64_Opening timeout 63_wrong software ver. 39_Perma- 40_Permanent actua- nent actuation KA tion KB 38_Permanent actuation KI2/ PE3 37_Permanent actuation KI1 unknown error 08_Smoke alarm 07_Fire alarm unknown error unknown error Text … Text … Text … Text … Text … 35_Pharma- 36_Internal chy/Perma- redundancy nent act.PE1 fault/ Text … Text … 33_Interlock- 34_TPS ing door comm. system err. err. 02_12V failure 01_24V failure 32_Sabotage Text … or Active-Text Text … or Inactive-Text no error no error no error no error no error no error Text31 GEZE IO 420 GEZE IO 420 … Service menu Level … Level … Select a module Module type Module con- 1-door solution figuration (factory setting) 2-door solution Level … Conf. door … Conf. door … Conf. door … Conf. KZF … Conf. ZSU slave … Conf. KZF … Conf. ZSU slave … Conf. ZSU interruption Conf. KZF … Conf. ZSU slave … Conf. ZSU interruption Level … Conf. output … Conf. output … KZF 1duration KZF 1abort KZF 1re-trigger ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … Conf. ZSU interruption Conf. output … Conf. output … KZF 1duration KZF 1abort ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … KZF 2duration KZF 2abort ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … Value range watchdog 1-door solution 2-door solution 4-door solution IQ lock EL + AUT Automatic stat Automatic … sec Window Universal RWS + KL400 DCU 1,2 and … DCU … DCU 128+RWS+KL disable Alarm Door1 locked Door1 closed Door1 closed & locked disable Alarm Door1 locked Door1 closed Door1 closed & locked 3~90 Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Factory setting 1-door solution disable disable 10 No No No No No No No No disable Alarm Door1 locked Door1 closed Door1 closed & locked disable Alarm Door1 locked Door1 closed Door1 closed & locked 3~90 Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no 10 No No No No No No no 3~90 Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no 10 No No No No No No no disable disable 33 GEZE IO 420 4-door solution Conf. door … Conf. KZF … Conf. ZSU slave … Conf. door … Conf. ZSU interruption Conf. KZF … Conf. ZSU slave … Conf. door … Conf. ZSU interruption Conf. KZF … Conf. ZSU slave … Conf. door … Conf. ZSU interruption Conf. KZF … Conf. ZSU slave … IQ lock EL + Aut Conf. ZSU interruption Conf, inputs KZF 1duration KZF 1abort ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … 3~90 Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no 10 No No No No No No No KZF 2duration KZF 2abort ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … 3~90 Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no 10 No No No No No No No KZF 3duration KZF 3abort ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … 3~90 Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no 10 No No No No No No No KZF 4duration KZF 4abort ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … 3~90 Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no 10 No No No No No No No Input … AL unlocked Input … Release AL KZF AL and IL KZF AL and IL AL closed BMA Smoke and heat extraction system BMA Smoke and heat extraction system IL closed KZF-AL (command) IQ AUT No motor lock 3~90 Yes/no No CP One CP Two CPs DET short-circuited Input … Input … Conf. passive leaf Conf. KZF … Conf. CP Automatic stat Automatic … sec Window 34 KZF1 duration KZF1 abort GEZE IO 420 Universal Conf. relay … Conf. ZSU slave … Conf. relay … Conf. ZSU interruption Conf. ZSU slave … Conf. relay … Conf. ZSU interruption Conf. ZSU slave … Conf. relay … Conf. ZSU interruption Conf. ZSU slave … No No No No No No ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no No No No No No No ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no No No No No No No ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no No No No No No No Input … Input … Input … Switch/ZSU master Switch/ZSU master Switch/BMA/RWA/ ZSU master Switch/BMA/RWA/ ZSU master switch switch switch MAC-Addr. 0~100 … Device-ID 0~4194303 … Reboot BACnet enter Baud rate Notification class not enabled/ … KB/ … KB/ … KB/ … KB/ … KB/ … KB … ~ 90 auto. addr. assignm. enter 1st CAN-address: 1~63 … 2nd CAN-address: 1~63 … 3rd CAN-address: (with 4-door sol.) 4th CAN-address: (with 4-door sol.) Enable ZSU1 1~63 … 1~63 … Yes/no No 0~23 0~59 0~23 0~59 Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no … 0 … 0 No No No No No No No Conf, inputs Input … switch RWS + KL400 Conf.BACnet Release AL KZF AL and IL Konf.CAN IQ AUT 10 No No CP Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Conf. ZSU interruption BusConf. BMA ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … Conf.ZSU master ZSU master size … ZSU1 start time ZSU1 end time ZSU1 weekday ZSU1 start hour ZSU1 start minute ZSU1 end hour ZSU1 end minute ZSU1 Sunday ZSU1 Monday ZSU1 Tuesday ZSU1 Wednesday ZSU1 Thursday ZSU1 Friday ZSU1 Saturday … KB 50 35 … .2 Schnittstellen / GEZE IO 420 Schnittstellen GEZE IO 420 ZSU master size … Enable ZSU2 ZSU2 start time ZSU2 end time ZSU2 Weekdays ZSU master size … ZSU3 end time ZSU3 Weekdays ZSU4 end time ZSU4 Weekdays ZSU5 end time ZSU5 Weekdays Date/time display Local time Change date Change year Change month Change day Hour Minute Second Change time Conf. summer time Conf. language Conf. log file System info Factory setting 36 0~23 0~59 0~23 0~59 Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no … 0 … 0 No No No No No No No No ZSU4 start hour ZSU4 start minute ZSU4 end hour ZSU4 end minute ZSU4 Sunday ZSU4 Monday ZSU4 Tuesday ZSU4 Wednesday ZSU4 Thursday ZSU4 Friday ZSU4 Saturday 0~23 0~59 0~23 0~59 Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no … 0 … 0 No No No No No No No No ZSU5 start hour ZSU5 start minute ZSU5 end hour ZSU5 end minute ZSU5 Sunday ZSU5 Monday ZSU5 Tuesday ZSU5 Wednesday ZSU5 Thursday ZSU5 Friday ZSU5 Saturday 0~23 0~59 0~23 0~59 Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no … 0 … 0 No No No No No No No Enable ZSU5 ZSU5 start time Device conf. ZSU3 start hour ZSU3 start minute ZSU3 end hour ZSU3 end minute ZSU3 Sunday ZSU3 Monday ZSU3 Tuesday ZSU3 Wednesday ZSU3 Thursday ZSU3 Friday ZSU3 Saturday Enable ZSU4 ZSU4 start time ZSU master size … No … 0 … 0 No No No No No No No No Enable ZSU3 ZSU3 start time ZSU master size … Yes/no 0~23 0~59 0~23 0~59 Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no ZSU2 start hour ZSU2 start minute ZSU2 end hour ZSU2 end minute ZSU2 Sunday ZSU2 Monday ZSU2 Tuesday ZSU2 Wednesday ZSU2 Thursday ZSU2 Friday ZSU2 Saturday GEZE IO 420 … .3 12 … 22 11 57 … Yes German/English/ French Level … to level … German CAN: 50 kBit/s, verwendet für TE 200, VAT 220, TZ 320. ST 220: verwendet für ST 220, IQ-Aut Standflügel. GEZE-Bus: verwendet für IQ-Aut Gangflügel. BACnet: verwendet für BACnet MS/TP-Schnittstelle. Conf. door … CAN: Abschlusswiderstand „CAN“ 120 Ohm KZF1auf retrigger X DIP-Schalter am Anfang und Ende des CAN-BUS ON setzen.Yes/ No Abschlusswiderstand „BACnet“ 120 Ohm Alarm X suppression … ~ 250 50 BACnet DIP-Schalter am ersten und am letzen IO 420 des BACnet MS/TP Bus auf ON setzen. BACnet: GEZE-Bus: Conf. KZF … watchdog DIP-Schalter Konfiguration KZF1 duration 3~90 KZF1 abort Yes/ No DIP-Schalter Abschlusswiderstand „GEZE-Bus“ 120 Ohm Alarm delay 0~250 10 100 Bei Anschluss von GEZE-Motorschloss oder TZ 320 (Anschluss für KL 220), DIP-Schalter auf ON -> setzen. Param. IO420 SD X Parameters Network-Bias: SD card DIP-Schalter „Network-Bias“ Um den Network-Bias für BACnet MS/TP zu aktivieren, DIP-Schalter auf ON setzen. Param.XSD->IO420 In einem BACnet MS/TP Netwerksystem darf nur ein Bias aktiviert sein. … .4 microSD BAC-Name IO420 -> SD BAC-Name SD>IO420 microSD-Card … Die microSD-Card (SDHC) wird im FAT16/32-Fileformat geschrieben und gelesen. Andere Formate werden nicht unterstützt. Die Dateien des IO 420 können auf eine microSD-Card kopiert werden. wird das ST 220 benötigt. Gegebenenfalls können die Daten am PC weiter angepasst werden Passwords forHierfür BACnet (Parametrierung oder Änderung der BACnet-Namen). Das Profil kann dann mittels microSD-Card auf ein anderes IO 420 GEZE mit gleicher Firmware geladen werden. Password for DCC service in BACnet: Folgendeservice Dateien(cold werden derstart): KarteGEZE-IO420 erstellt: Password for reinitialization and auf warm à Namensdatei für BACnet-Namen: „IO420_V1.BAC“; à Konfigurationsdatei: „IO420_V1.CON“; beinhaltet alle Parameter des IO 420. à Log-Datei: „IO420_00.LOG“ bis „IO420_39.LOG“; Firmware update for IO 420 Je nach Einstellung werden Alarmmeldungen und Aktionen in die Log-Datei geschrieben. Wenn die LED microSD-Card blinkt, darf die microSD-Card nicht aus dem Slot herausgenommen werden. All settings arefür lost when the firmware is updated. Zum Entfernen und Einstecken der microSD-Card das IO 420 spannungslos schalten. … .5 Safety fuse XX Back up name files “IO420_V1.BAC”; “IO420_V2.BAC” and “IO420MBZ1.BAC” on SD card. Reset XX Back up configuration files “IO420_V1.CON”; “IO420_V2.CON” and “IO420MBZ1.CON” on SD card. The backed-up data may no longer be compatible after firmware conversion, but they can be adapted manually. Reset-Taster Mit die Werkseinstellung werden. Further information ondem thisReset-Taster subject cankann be found in the respectivewiederhergestellt information sheet. Reset durchführen The object descriptions cannot be backed up and must be entered again manually. X Gerät spannungslos schalten. „Reset-Button“ auf der Platine gedrückt halten. Firmware update X Spannungsversorgung einschalten. Firmware updates areNach provided by GEZE in electronic form. … Sekunden wird das Gerät auf Werkseinstellung versetzt. Copy the .hex file to the “../FlashData/IO420”. LEDdirectory … „Störung“ und LED … „Normalbetrieb“ blinken im 0,4 Sekunden-Takt gleichzeitig. X Wenn die XX Open “IO420_Flasher.bat” LEDsthe blinken „Reset-Button“ loslassen. using text editor. X Um das Gerät in den it Betriebsmodus zurückzusetzen, Spannungsversorgung aus- und wieder If the files reference is “IO420_V1.hex”, must be changed to “IO420_V1”. einschalten. CORRECT: “..\Flasher\STM32\ProgSTM32Pfs.bat 11 ..\FlashData\IO420\IO420_V1” X XX XX 10~99 1~12 1~31 0~23 0~59 0~59 Yes/no à à à à XX Save file. Switch off the voltage supply for the IO 420. Connect the adapter cable (mat. no.: 130829) to the IO 420. … Level … HW ver.: SW ver. : Ser.no. : Sys.err : Reset parameter Reset BAC name Reset BAC description Reset all 37 GEZE IO 420 GEZE IO 420 GEZE IO 420 Abb. 7: COM-Port Einstellung im Geräte Manager Abb.7:7:COM COM-Port Einstellung Geräte Manager Fig. port setting in theim device manager X Datei “IO420_Flasher.bat“ erneut ausführen. XX Execute Datei “IO420_Flasher.bat“ ausführen. X Der Updatefortschritt wirderneut im angezeigt. Der Vorgang dauert mehrere Minuten. “IO420_Flasher.bat” fileFenster again. Der Updatefortschritt wird im Fenster Derprocess Vorgang dauert mehrere Minuten. The update progress is displayed in theangezeigt. window. The takes several minutes. Fig. 5:5:Programming adapter cable Abb. Programmieradapterkabel XX Spannungsversorgung für dasfor IOthe 420IOeinschalten. Switch on the voltage supply 420. XX Datei “IO420_Flasher.bat“ ausführen. Execute the “IO420_Flasher.bat” file. Bei folgender Sieproceed bitte wie vor: If the followingFehlermeldung error message gehen appears, asfolgt follows: Abb. 8: Firmware-Update läuft. Abb. Firmware-Update X Die Fig. 8:8:Firmware update inläuft. progress. Spannungsversorgung ausschalten, Kabel ausstecken. X Die Spannungsversorgung ausschalten, XX Switch IO 420 neu off the starten. voltage supply, unplug theKabel cable.ausstecken. X IO 420 neu starten. XX Re-boot Nach dem muss das IO 420 auf Werkseinstellung zurückgesetzt werden.. IOFirmware-Update 420. XX After Nach the demfirmware Firmware-Update dasmust IO 420 Werkseinstellung zurückgesetzt werden.. X update themuss IO 420 be auf reset to factory settings. Abb.6:6:Error Fehler „falscher Fig. “wrong COMCom-Port“ port” XX 34 38 COM inport Dateiin„IO420_Flasher.bat“ anpassen: AdaptPort COM file “IO420_Flasher.bat”: FALSCH: ....\Flasher\STM32\ProgSTM32Pfs.bat \Flasher\STM32\ProgSTM32Pfs.bat 11 \FlashData\IO420\IO420_V1 WRONG: 11....\FlashData\IO420\IO420_V1 \FlashData\IO420\IO420_V1 RICHTIG ....\Flasher\STM32\ProgSTM32Pfs.bat \Flasher\STM32\ProgSTM32Pfs.bat … ....\FlashData\IO420\IO420_V1 CORRECT 35 39 35 Germany GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Süd-West Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 594 E-Mail: leonberg.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Süd-Ost Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6440 E-Mail: muenchen.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Ost Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6840 E-Mail: berlin.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Mitte/Luxemburg Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6888 E-Mail: frankfurt.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung West Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6770 E-Mail: duesseldorf.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Nord Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6600 E-Mail: hamburg.de@geze.com GEZE Service GmbH Tel. +49 (0) 1802 923392 E-Mail: service-info.de@geze.com Austria GEZE Austria E-Mail: austria.at@geze.com www.geze.at Hungary GEZE Hungary Kft. E-Mail: office-hungary@geze.com www.geze.hu Scandinavia – Sweden GEZE Scandinavia AB E-Mail: sverige.se@geze.com www.geze.se Baltic States – Lithuania / Latvia / Estonia E-Mail: baltic-states@geze.com Iberia GEZE Iberia S.R.L. E-Mail: info.es@geze.com www.geze.es Scandinavia – Norway GEZE Scandinavia AB avd. Norge E-Mail: norge.se@geze.com www.geze.no Benelux GEZE Benelux B.V. E-Mail: benelux.nl@geze.com www.geze.be www.geze.nl India GEZE India Private Ltd. E-Mail: office-india@geze.com www.geze.in Scandinavia – Denmark GEZE Danmark E-Mail: danmark.se@geze.com www.geze.dk Bulgaria GEZE Bulgaria - Trade E-Mail: office-bulgaria@geze.com www.geze.bg Italy GEZE Italia S.r.l E-Mail: italia.it@geze.com www.geze.it Singapore GEZE (Asia Pacific) Pte, Ltd. E-Mail: gezesea@geze.com.sg www.geze.com China GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE Engineering Roma S.r.l E-Mail: JUBMJB JU!HF[F DPN www.geze.it South Africa GEZE South Africa (Pty) Ltd. E-Mail: info@gezesa.co.za www.geze.co.za GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Shanghai E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Guangzhou E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Beijing E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn France GEZE France S.A.R.L. E-Mail: france.fr@geze.com www.geze.fr Korea GEZE Korea Ltd. E-Mail: info.kr@geze.com www.geze.com Poland GEZE Polska Sp.z o.o. E-Mail: geze.pl@geze.com www.geze.pl Romania GEZE Romania S.R.L. E-Mail: office-romania@geze.com www.geze.ro Russia OOO GEZE RUS E-Mail: office-russia@geze.com www.geze.ru Switzerland GEZE Schweiz AG E-Mail: schweiz.ch@geze.com www.geze.ch Turkey GEZE Kapı ve Pencere Sistemleri E-Mail: office-turkey@geze.com www.geze.com Ukraine LLC GEZE Ukraine E-Mail: office-ukraine@geze.com www.geze.ua United Arab Emirates/GCC GEZE Middle East E-Mail: gezeme@geze.com www.geze.ae United Kingdom GEZE UK Ltd. E-Mail: info.uk@geze.com www.geze.com GEZE GmbH Reinhold-Vöster-Straße 21–29 71229 Leonberg Germany Tel.: 0049 7152 203 … Fax.: 0049 7152 203 310 www.geze.com
PDF | 5 MB
Wiring diagram Toplock CTI, CTI B TOPLOCK CTS V, CTS BV
Code Number Keypad Toplock • Operating and installation instructions, Material no. 129510 TOPLOCK CTI, CTI B • • Mat. no. TOPLOCK CTI Mat. no. TOPLOCK CTI B : 090061 : 090063 TOPLOCK CTI, CTI B 12V-24V DC 12V AC Control unit DCU1 DCU1-2M … 24V … 24V … GND … GND KB … 24V 20 KB KB … Relay Control unit DCU2 (-F, -I) DCU5 20 24VAKKU KB TOPLOCK CTS V, CTS BV • • Mat. no. TOPLOCK CTS V : 090077 Mat. no. TOPLOCK CTS BV: 090079 TOPLOCK CTS V, CTS BV L 230V 50Hz 230V 50Hz N PE Control unit DCU1 DCU1-2M KL1 Relay KL3 NO KB … 24VAKKU C 20 KB Control unit DCU2 (-F, -I) DCU5 KB … 24V 20 KB NC KL2 Keypad … 2 … 4 … 6 … 8 … 129750 revision status 00 Connection diagram code number keypad Toplock CTI, CTS 1/1 GEZE GmbH P.O. Box 1363 71226 Leonberg Germany GEZE GmbH Reinhold-Vöster-Str. 21-29 71229 Leonberg Germany Tel. +49 (0)71 52-203-0 Fax +49 (0)71 52-203-310 GEZE Online: www.geze.com GEZE Branches Germany GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Nord/Ost Bühringstr.8 13086 Berlin (Weissensee) Tel. +49(0)30-47 89 90-0 Fax. +49(0)30-47 89 90-17 E-Mail: berlin.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung West Nordsternstraße 65 45329 Essen Tel. +49(0)201-830 82-0 Fax. +49(0)201-830 82-20 E-Mail: essen.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Mitte Adenauerallee … 61440 Oberursel (b. Frankfurt) Tel. +49(0)61 71-6 36 10-0 Fax. +49(0)61 71-6 36 10-1 E-Mail: frankfurt.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Süd Reinhold-Vöster-Straße 21-29 71229 Leonberg Tel. +49(0)7152-203-594 Fax. +49(0)7152-203-438 E-Mail: leonberg.de@geze.com Subsidiaries Germany GEZE Sonderkonstruktionen GmbH Planken … 97944 Boxberg-Schweigern Tel. +49(0)7930-92 94-0 Fax. +49(0)7930-92 94-10 E-Mail: sk.de@geze.com GEZE SERVICE GmbH Reinhold-Vöster-Str.25 71229 Leonberg Tel. +49(0)7152-92 33-0 Fax. +49(0)7152-92 33-60 E-Mail: info@geze-service.com Asia Europe GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Shuangchenzhong Road Beichen Economic Development Area (BEDA) Tianjin 300400, P.R. China Tel. +86 (0) 22-26 97 39 95-0 Fax. +86 (0) 22-26 97 27 02 E-Mail: sales-info@geze.com.cn France GEZE France S.A.R.L ZAC de l’Orme Rond RN 19 77170 Servon Tel. +33 (0) … 60 62 60 70 Fax. +33 (0) … 60 62 60 71 E-Mail: france.fr@geze.com GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Shanghai Room 3010 Tower 2, Grand Gateway No. … HongQiao Road, XuHui District 200030 Shanghai, P.R. China Tel. +86 (0) 21 64475908 Fax. +86 (0) 21 64472007 E-Mail: gezesh@geze.com.cn Great Britain GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Guangzhou Room 17C3 Everbright Bank Building, No.689, Tian He Bei Road 510630 Guangzhou, P.R. China Tel. +86 (0) 20 3873842 Fax. +86 (0) 20 38731834 E-Mail: gezegz@geze.com.cn GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Beijing No. 6-32 Building Jili Avenue Daxing District 100076 Beijing, P.R. China Tel. +86 (0) 10 87965152 Tel. +86 (0) 10 87975178 Fax. +86 (0) 10 87971476 E-Mail: gezebj@geze.com.cn Italy GEZE Italia Srl Via Giotto … 20040 Cambiago (MI) Tel. +39 (0) 02 95 06 95-11 Fax. +39 (0) 02 95 06 95-33 E-Mail: italia.it@geze.it DCLSA Distributors (Pty) Ltd. 1027 Richards Drive, Midrand P.O. Box 7934, Midrand 1685 South Africa Tel. ++27 11 3158286 Fax. ++27 11 31558261 E-Mail: info@dclsa.co.za Middle East U.A.E. GEZE Middle East P.O. Box 17903 Jebel Ali Free Zone Dubai Tel. +971 (0) … 88 33 112 Fax. +971 (0) … 88 33 240 E-Mail: geze@emirates.net.ae Switzerland GEZE Schweiz AG Bodenackerstr. 79 4657 Dulliken Tel. +41 (0) 62-285 54 00 Fax. +41 (0) 62-285 54 01 E-Mail: schweiz.ch@geze.com Spain / Portugal GEZE Iberia S.R.L. Pol.Ind. El Pla C/Comerc, 2-22, Nave 12 08980 Sant Feliu de Llobregat (Barcelona) Tel. +34 (0) … 02 19 40 36 Fax. +34 (0) … 02 19 40 35 E-Mail: info@geze.es Scandinavia GEZE Engineering Roma Srl Via Lucrezia Romana 91 00178 Roma Tel. +39 (0) 06 72 65 31 … Fax. +39 (0) 06 72 65 31 36 E-Mail: roma@geze.biz Benelux GEZE Benelux B.V. Industrieterrein Kapelbeemd Leemkuil … 5626 EA Eindhoven Tel. +31 (0) 40 26 29 08 … Fax. +31 (0) 40 26 29 08 … E-Mail: benelux.nl@geze.com South Africa GEZE SERVICE GmbH Niederlassung Berlin Bühringstr.8 13086 Berlin (Weissensee) Tel. +49(0)30-47 02 17-30 Fax. +49(0)30-47 02 17-33 Yourattentionisdrawntothe “productliabilitylaw“definedliabilityto themanu-facturerforhisproducts whicharecon-tainedinthemain catalogue(productinformation,usage, misuses,productactivity,product maintenance,thedutytoinformandthe dutytoinstruct).Noncompliancewith theseconditionsre-lievesthe manufacturerfromanyliability. GEZE UK Ltd. Blenheim Way Fradley Park Lichfield Staffordshire WS13 8SY Tel. +44 (0) 15 43 44 30 00 Fax. +44 (0) 15 43-44 30 01 E-Mail: info@geze-uk.com Poland GEZE Polska Sp. z o.o. Ul. Annopol 21 03-236 Warszawa Tel. +48 (0) 22 440 44 40 Fax. +48 (0) 22 440 44 00 E-Mail: geze@geze.pl Austria GEZE Austria GmbH Mayrwiesstraße 12 5300 Hallwang b. Salzburg Tel. +43 (0) 662 66 31 42 Fax. +43 (0) 662 66 31 42-15 E-Mail: austria.at@geze.com Sweden GEZE Scandinavia AB Mallslingan 10 Box 7060 18711 Täby Tel. +46 (0) 8-732 34-00 Fax. +46 (0) 8-732 34-99 E-Mail: sverige.se@geze.com Norway GEZE Scandinavia AB avd. Norge Postboks 63 2081 Eidsvoll Tel. +47 (0) 639 572 00 Fax. +47 (0) 639 571 73 E-Mail: norge.se@geze.com Finland GEZE Finland Branch office of GEZE Scandinavia AB Postbox 20 Herralantie 824 15871 Hollola Tel. +358 (0) 10-400 5100 Fax. +358 (0) 10-400 5120 E-Mail: finland.se@geze.com Denmark GEZE Denmark Branch office of GEZE Scandinavia AB Høje Taastrup Boulevard 53 DK - 2630 Taastrup Tel. +45 46-32 33 24 Fax. +45 46-32 33 26 E-Mail: danmark.se@geze.com GEZE Representative: Id. No. 129750 Modification level 00 • Drawing No.. 21207-9-0964 • Printed in Germany • Subject to change without notice The hallmark DIN ISO 9001 of our enterprise
PDF | 180 KB
Installation instructions for RC … adapters made of stainless steel
Montageanleitung für RC2-Adapter aus rostfreiem Edelstahl Installation instructions for RC2-Adapter made of stainless steel 1. 2. 3. Ø3 4. 5.
PDF | 458 KB
IQ lock Commissioning and connection guide
IQ lock – self-locking panic locks for 1- and 2-leaf doors IQ lock AUT IQ lock EL / IQ lock EL DL IQ lock EM / IQ lock EM DL IQ lock C / IQ lock C DL 157720-06 EN Commissioning and connection instructions IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Contents Key to symbols … Product designation … Product liability … Abbreviations … 2 … Safety notes … Intended use … Technical safety … Safety-conscious working … Cleaning and care … Accessories … Assembly and installation … Use of motor locks IQ lock EL/IQ lock EL DL on fire and smoke protection doors … 2 Your contribution to environmental protection … 3 Functions and properties … Overview of functions … Explanation of terms, functions and properties … 4 Technical data … IQ lock … Rod drive IQ AUT … 10 Power supply NT … -24 … 10 Power supply NT … -24 … 10 Power supply NT HDR-30-24 … 11 Power supply NT HDR-60-24 … 11 Motor lock control MST 210 … 11 … Electrical connection … 12 … Motor lock control MST 210 in connection with IQ lock EL / IQ lock EL DL … 12 Rod drive IQ AUT … 19 Lever lock IQ lock EM … 21 Contact lock IQ lock C … 22 … Wiring diagrams … 23 … IQ lock EL with motor lock control MST 210 … 23 Standard connection IQ LOCK EL / MST 210 with low-pass filter from HW 159073 … 24 IQ lock EL with programme switch and activation … 25 IQ lock EL with EMD (-F, -I) and activation … 26 IQ lock EL with EMD (-F, -I), TZ 320 SN and activation … 28 IQ lock EL with TSA160 NT (-F, -I) and activation … 30 IQ lock EL with TSA160 NT (-F, -I), TZ 320 SN and activation … 32 IQ lock EL with EMD (-F, -I) and smoke control unit … 34 IQ lock EL with TSA160 NT (-F, -I) & smoke control unit … 35 IQ lock EL with smoke control unit (RSZ 6) … 36 IQ lock EL with smoke control unit (RSZ 5) … 37 IQ lock EL with smoke control unit FA GC 150/160 … 38 IQ lock EL with TZ 320 SN and activation … 40 IQ lock EL with K600 and activation … 42 IQ lock EL with K600, TZ 320 SN and activation … 44 IQ lock AUT with K600 and activation … 46 IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … IQ lock AUT with K600, TZ 320 SN and activation … 48 IQ lock AUT with EMD (-F, -I) and activation … 50 IQ lock AUT with TSA160 NT (-F, -I) and activation … 52 IQ lock AUT with Powerturn IS … 54 … What if? … 57 … Maintenance … 61 Key to symbols Important information and technical notes are highlighted to explain correct operation. Symbol Meaning means "important note" means “additional Information” XX Symbol for an action: This means you have to do something. only applies for IQ lock for 1-leaf doors only applies for IQ lock DL for 2-leaf doors Product designation Lock type Electric full-panic motor lock Electrical motor lock Electro-mechanical lever lock Mechanical contact lock Mechanical lock 1-leaf – IQ lock EL IQ lock EM IQ lock C IQ lock M 2-leaf IQ lock AUT IQ lock EL DL IQ lock EM DL IQ lock C DL IQ lock M DL Product liability In compliance with the liability of the manufacturer for his products as defined in the German “Product Liability Act”, compliance with the information contained in this brochure (product information and intended use, misuse, product performance, product maintenance, obligations to provide information and instructions) must be ensured. Failure to comply releases the manufacturer from his statutory liability. Abbreviations VB Solid leaf RR Tubular frame … Safety notes … Safety notes … Intended use IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Self-locking panic locks are components used to lock emergency exit doors/panic exit doors on rescue routes. When self-locking anti-panic locks are used, the technical data and environment conditions of these installation and operating instructions must be taken into account. The safety features of these products are important for conformity with EN 179 and EN 1125. No modifications of any kind are permitted other than those described in these instructions. XX XX XX Operate the locks only in installation positions typical for locks i.e. vertical with horizontally locking bolt. Always operate the locks in such a way that the panic function works in the direction of escape. Use these locks on emergency exit doors in accordance with EN 179 and panic exit doors in accordance with EN 1125 only in connection with the officially approved sliding door fittings (see certificates for consistency of performance, chapter 7). The self-locking panic locks are suitable for use on single- and double-leaf panic doors. àà They are not designated for use on double-action doors. àà Use in transport technology (pedestrian traffic and transport of goods by road, rail, air and water) must be agreed with the manufacturer. The product should be installed or incorporated in such a way that effortless access to the product is guaranteed during any repairs and/or maintenance, and that any removal costs do not stand out of proportion to the value of the product. Trouble-free functioning of the locks is only ensured if a carry bar and a door closer system in accordance with EN 1158 with closing sequence control are mounted. Before mounting the emergency exit locks ensure that the door is fitted properly and not distorted in any way. XX Install the emergency exit locks only in hollow doors that are designed for this purpose by the manufacturer. The horizontal bar must be mounted in such a way that the greatest possible effective bar length is achieved. XX Avoid safety risks during the installation of emergency exit devices with handle operation (in particular in case of doors with graded surfaces: jamming of fingers or clothes). XX If necessary, adapt installation to the majority of the users: àà Installation height for children smaller than 900–1000 mm àà Door closer installation in such a way that children, elderly or impaired persons are not impeded Only devices conforming to standard may be used for keeping emergency exit and panic exit doors closed. In conformity with the specifications of German building regulation laws, a lock of the VS-type A in accordance with DIN EN 179 or DIN 1125 (lock only for 1-leaf doors) can also be used in the active leaf of a 2-leaf door if: a) the passive leaf lock is secured against incorrect operation and b) the passage width of the active leaf is sufficient for an escape route. … Technical safety àà Improper installation and maintenance work or repairs can lead to significant hazards for the user. Installation and maintenance work or repairs may only be carried out by GEZE and their authorised specialists. àà Damage to GEZE IQ locks can endanger your safety. Check them for visible signs of damage. Never put a damaged lock into operation. àà Warranty claims will be rendered invalid if the lock is not repaired by GEZE or an authorised GEZE service partner. àà GEZE only guarantees that safety requirements are met if genuine GEZE spare parts are used. Faulty components may only be replaced by genuine parts. àà GEZE self-locking panic locks must not be opened. … IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … Safety notes Safety-conscious working Work on the electrical equipment (IQ AUT, IQ lock EL, IQ lock EL DL, IQ lock EM, IQ lock EM DL, IQ lock C, IQ lock C DL) may only be performed by a qualified electrician. Locks may only be installed by a specialist from the respective trade (locksmith, carpenter etc.). Only genuine GEZE spare parts or accessories approved by GEZE may be used. Please contact GEZE for information about the later connection of further accessory parts. àà Remove the lock before drilling the fixing points for the sliding door fittings. àà Do not put any greases, lubricants or oils in the lock. Avoid water penetrating the lock case or the formation of condensation. àà Only use lubricants approved by GEZE for lubricating the outer parts (bolt, latch), see chapter … . àà Never paint or varnish over the lock face plate or any other parts of the locks. àà Remove the lock before doing any painting work. àà The handle pin must not be forced through the lock follower. àà The door leaf must not be carried by the handle. … Cleaning and care GEZE self-locking panic locks may only be oiled or greased using lubricants approved by GEZE. Lubricant Klübersynth LI 44-22 Fin Lube TF … Manufacturer Klüber Lubrication Interflon Comment Slightly wet the latch and bolt Spray onto the latch and bolt from the outside Accessories GEZE self-locking panic locks may only be used with the accessories prescribed by GEZE. XX Only use genuine GEZE accessories. àà If other parts are attached or installed, any warranty, guarantee and/or product liability claims will be rendered invalid. … Assembly and installation Some safety rules must always be observed during fitting and installation of the self-locking GEZE panic locks. These must be noted and followed, since the device can otherwise be damaged and result in hazards for the user: When installing the locks, make sure you following building regulations and any specifications issued by the door manufacturer. àà The lock must not be modified in any way. àà Lock and original strike plate (1-leaf) as well as lock and original strike box (2-leaf) form one unit. Perfect function is only possible in combination. àà If installation is faulty or improper, all manufacturer guarantee and liability claims will be rendered invalid. XX … Use of motor locks IQ lock EL/IQ lock EL DL on fire and smoke protection doors GEZE motor locks, IQ lock EL for 1-leaf and IQ lock EL DL for 2-leaf fire and smoke protection doors may be used in all modes of operation (permanently unlocked, secured by day, night mode). It must be guaranteed that in the event of a fire in the case of the modes of operation "permanently unlocked" and "secured by day" the electrical activation of the lock is no longer possible, the lock can no longer be unlocked and the cross latch and bolt engage securely in the strike plate at all times. … Your contribution to environmental protection IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL In order to interrupt this electrical activation in case of a fire, permissible fire detectors with trigger mechanisms, in accordance with the DIBt guideline, must be employed for hold-open systems. When motor locks are used on fire and smoke protection doors, three different installation situations can occur. The following chapters must be heeded in this case. … .1 Release via on-site fire alarm system Connection of an on-site fire alarm system (BMA) to the motor lock control (MST 210). This connection is implemented via the "smoke detector" input especially provided. A potential-free or non-isolated contact is required by the fire alarm system for this. The planning of the installation of the smoke detectors is implemented on-site. It should be pointed out that when motor locks are used, smoke detectors in accordance with the above-mentioned guideline must be fitted. Smoke development on both sides of the door must be detected by the fire alarm system. … .2 Release via trigger mechanism of hold-open systems In accordance with the DIBt guideline for hold-open systems, the following is necessary, taking account of the difference for the use of the "permanently unlocked" and "secured by day" modes of operation described: Ceiling height above lintel lower edge ≤ … m … ceiling-mounted detectors are required Deviation from DIBt guideline: The installation of only one lintel-mounted detector is not authorised in this case, since the fire can only be detected on one side if the door is closed. Ceiling height above lintel lower edge > … m … ceiling-mounted detectors and … lintel-mounted detector are required. This corresponds to … ceiling-mounted detectors and … smoke control unit. The smoke control unit (RSZ … and RSZ 6, includes power supply + … lintel-mounted detector) is connected directly to the MST in accordance with wiring diagram. … .3 Motor lock in "night mode" mode of operation The motor lock is used in "night mode" mode of operation only. In the "night mode" mode of operation, the automatic bolt projection of 20 mm is implemented every time the door is closed. The GEZE SecuLogic access control, for example, regulates controlled admission. In this case, the bolt is retracted and the door can be passed through against the direction of escape. With the motor lock control MST 210, different release times can be set using a DIP switch. Setting of the release time Opening time "x" = … s Setting options for release time: Switch … 2 … 4 Switch position ON ON ON ON Release time x+1s (x) + … s (x) + … s (x) + 10 s Example: Set release time = … s In order to ensure that the lock locks itself mechanically (particular for fire protection), the hold-open time must not exceed … seconds. For this reason only switches … and … may be active in case of the DIP switch. In the case of fire protection doors it must be ensured that the door does not burst open due to the seal pressure. … Your contribution to environmental protection àà When disposing of the self-locking panic locks, separate the different materials and have them recycled. àà Legal regulations must be observed during the disposal of self-locking panic locks. àà GEZE self-locking panic locks are certified with the Environmental Product Declaration according to ISO 14025 from the Institut Bauen und Umwelt e.V. (Institute for Construction and the Environment). This statement of approval describes the specific environmental performance of the IQ locks and confirms that the GEZE lock family promotes environmentally friendly and healthy construction work. … IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … Functions and properties … Overview of functions Function / property Panic function Mechanical self-locking Electrical timeout function Functions and properties IQ lock AUT * IQ lock EL/ EL DL Statement of approval for emergency exits Statement of approval for fire protection doors Resistance Class (RC) … – IQ lock EM/ EM DL – IQ lock C/ C DL – IQ lock M/ M DL – IQ lock EL IQ lock EM IQ lock C IQ lock M Secured by day with electric strike function Motor-driven unlocking Permanently unlocked Outside handle, can be electrically engaged Automatic locking mechanism in the event of a power failure Automatic resetting of the release if door is not opened Input for fire alarm system (locking) Unlocking by key ** – *** ** – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – **** – – – Operating voltage 24 V 12–24 V – – Feedback contacts for lock states Optional sabotage monitoring or cylinder contact 12 V, 24 V, 48 V – – Can be used on the left and right Same installation dimensions for all IQ locks Backset 35, 40, 45, 55, 60, 65, 70, 80, 100 Distance 72, 74, 78, 92, 94 … mm handle follower àà continuous àà divided ***** – – – – – – Statement of approval in accordance with EN 1125 Statement of approval in accordance with EN 179 Statement of approval in accordance with EN 14846 Statement of approval in accordance with EN 12209 Statement of approval in accordance with EN 1634 VdS statement of approval – – – – – IQ lock EL IQ lock EM IQ lock C IQ lock M – IQ lock EL IQ lock EM IQ lock C IQ lock M available not possible Rod drive IQ AUT and IQ lock EL DL = IQ lock AUT ** Active leaf for IQ lock DL *** In connection with a power storage device / power pack **** Unlocking via active leaf ***** IQ AUT 42 x 400 x … mm – … Explanation of terms, functions and properties Panic function The lock can be unlocked at any time by pressing the door handle/panic bar in the direction of escape. Door fittings According to DIN EN 179 or 1125 the door fittings must be tested together with the lock. Tested door fittings can be found in the certificates for consistency of performance at www.geze.com/geze/downloads. … Functions and properties IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Mechanical re-locking Locking of the two cross latches is activated by actuating the auxiliary latch. Locking of the two cross latches only takes place after this has engaged and positioned itself in the strike plate. Bolt projection only takes place after the cross latch has been positioned in the strike plate. Electrical timeout function During release time, manipulation attempts on the auxiliary latch by the control unit are ignored and the bolt remains retracted. After the set release time has expired, the bolt is extended when the auxiliary latch is activated. The control unit detects the manipulation attempt by the check on the door position and the motor retracts the bolt again. Secured by day with electric strike function In adjustable daytime operation, the bolt remains retracted even if the door has closed and the two cross latches are in place. The door cannot be passed from the outside, from the inside escape is possible at all times through the panic function. In connection with access control, for example, shortest possible opening times well under one second are now achieved, which has only been possible with electric strikes before. Exception: In the event of a fire the door is completely locked. The motor lock control unit is activated directly by the fire alarm system in this case (see chapter … ). Permanently unlocked Alongside automatic re-locking ("night mode" mode of operation) and secured daytime operation ("secured by day" mode of operation), the third mode of operation "permanently unlocked" is possible (see Setting permanently unlocked, chapter … ). Here, the bolt is retracted and the cross latches are unstable. The door can be pulled or pushed open at any time by hand. Exception: In the event of a fire the door is locked completely after the door leaf has closed. The motor lock control unit is activated directly by the fire alarm system in this case. Outside handle, electrically engaged When the supply voltage is applied to the lock, the outside handle is engaged and remains engaged as long as current is flowing (fail-secure principle). As soon as the voltage supply stops, the outside handle is disabled and the door can no longer be opened using the handle. The panic function is retained. Thanks to the exchange function integrated in all our locks, the lock can be opened using the matching key (e.g. by the fire brigade). Automatic locking mechanism in the event of a power failure In the event of a power failure, the motor is activated via the capacitor integrated in the control unit in such a way that the slide bolt in the lock can move to the "night mode" position. This automatically pre-closes the bolt when the door is closed. If the door is still open at this point, the bolt projection is controlled via the auxiliary latch when the door is closed. Input for fire alarm system The automatic locking mechanism of the motor lock in the event of a fire is activated via the input for the fire alarm system on the motor lock control unit. This takes place automatically no matter which mode of operation is selected (night mode, secured by day or permanently unlocked). Feedback contacts for lock states The number and type of signals as well as the maximum load of the switch contacts can be found in chapters … and … . Sabotage monitoring The power supply cable is monitored to check for interruptions in the cable. In addition, the cover of the motor lock control can be integrated in the monitoring process by means of a cover lift-off contact. … IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … Technical data … IQ lock Technical data ID no. See price list IQ lock function àà Panic function àà Mechanical self-locking àà Divided cross latch Additional function IQ lock EL àà Motor-driven unlocking < … second àà Three modes of operation (night mode / secured by day / permanently unlocked) àà Electrical timeout function àà Feedback contacts for lock states àà Optional sabotage monitoring or cylinder contact Additional function IQ lock EM àà Outside handle, can be electrically engaged àà Feedback contacts for lock states àà Optional sabotage monitoring or cylinder contact Additional function IQ lock C àà Feedback contacts for lock states àà Optional sabotage monitoring or cylinder contact Dimensions (without face plate) àà Solid leaf: … mm × 165 mm × (backset+ … mm) (W × H × D) àà Tubular frame: … mm × 177 mm × (backset+ … mm) (W × H × D) Operating voltage IQ lock EL: 12–24 V DC IQ lock EM: 12 V DC, 24 V DC, 48 V DC Current consumption IQ lock EL 160 mA at 12 V DC max. … A briefly at 12 V DC 80 mA at 24 V DC max. 500 mA briefly at 24 V DC (incl. MST 210) Current consumption IQ lock EM 350 mA at 12 V DC 210 mA at 24 V DC 105 mA at 48 V DC Max. contact rating of the relays 30 V DC / 500 mA Resistance to forcing 10,000 N Technical specification àà àà àà àà àà Climate / surroundings àà àà àà àà àà Statements of approval àà àà àà àà àà àà àà Perfectly closing doors with door closer Always use genuine GEZE strike plate Clearance between face plate and strike plate 3–7 mm No door seals which cause pressure Bolt projection must be horizontal Service temperature: –10 … +50 °C, max. 75 % rel. hum., no condensation Storage temperature: –20 … +50 °C, max. 75 % rel. hum., no condensation Sprinkling not permissible Not suitable for use in very dusty atmosphere (e.g. corn mills) Not suitable for use in aggressive or highly corrosive atmosphere (e.g. chlorinated swimming baths) àà Not suitable for vibration (e.g. vehicles) àà Cannot be used in potentially explosive atmospheres EN 179 Emergency exit devices EN 1125 Panic exit devices EN 12209 Mechanical locks EN 14846 Electro-mechanical locks EN 1634 Fire resistance and smoke protection test VdS CE … Technical data … Rod drive IQ AUT ID no. Function Dimensions (without face plate) Operating voltage Current consumption Resistance to forcing Climate / surroundings Statements of approval … Guidelines/standards 089862 Power supply for IQ lock EL / IQ lock EL DL 230 V AC (+10 / –15 %) 250 mA 24 V DC (±5 %) 800 mA … W 92 × 32 × 32 mm (W × H × D) Flush-mounted installation Wire sleeves type 10CC IP54 - according to data sheet IP20 II àà Ambient temperature –10 °C … +50 °C ; àà Storage temperature –40 °C … +70 °C EN 60950-1; EN 55022 , EN 55024 Power supply NT … -24 ID no. Function Input voltage Input current Output voltage Output current Output power Dimensions Type of installation Connection IP rating Protection class Environmental conditions Guidelines/standards 10 153755 Motor-driven unlocking of the passive leaf (< … seconds) 42 × 400 × … mm (W × H × D) 24 V DC (±15 %) max. … A at 24 V DC 10,000 N àà Service temperature: –20 … +60 °C, max. 75 % rel.hum., no condensation àà Sprinkling not permissible àà Not suitable for use in very dusty atmosphere (e.g. corn mills) àà Not suitable for use in aggressive or highly corrosive atmosphere (e.g. chlorinated swimming baths) àà Not suitable for vibration (e.g. vehicles) àà Cannot be used in potentially explosive atmospheres àà EN 179 Emergency exit devices àà EN 1125 Panic exit devices àà EN 1634 Fire resistance and smoke protection test àà CE Power supply NT … -24 ID no. Function Input voltage Input current Output voltage Output current Output power Dimensions Type of installation Connection IP rating Protection class Environmental conditions … IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL 109637 Power supply for IQ lock EM/ IQ lock EM DL 230 V AC (±15 %) 150 mA (short-term 300 mA) 24 V DC (–8 %, +5 %) 260 mA … W 88 × 88 × 53 mm (W × H × D) (dimensions of the surface-mounted casing) Flush-mounted installation (scope of delivery, pre-mounted in surface-mounted casing ID 103662) Screw terminals … ... … mm² IP20 II àà Service temperature: … .... +60 °C àà Storage temperature: -20 ... +60 °C àà Relative humidity max. 93 % (at 40 °C) DIN EN 50 081-1, DIN EN 55011, EN 50082-2 DIN EN 61 000-4-2, -3, -4, -5, -6, -11 IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … Power supply NT HDR-30-24 ID no. Function Input voltage Input current Output voltage Output current Output power Dimensions Type of installation Connection IP rating Protection class Environmental conditions Guidelines/standards … 151425 Power supply for IQ AUT 230 V AC (±15 %) 480 mA 24 V DC (±10 %) … A 36 W 78 × 93 × 56 mm (W × H × D) Top hat rail (DIN-TS35/ … or 15 possible) Screw terminals IP54 II Service temperature: -20 .... +60 °C Relative humidity 20 ... 90 % UL60950-1 : EN 55011, EN 55032 Power supply NT HDR-60-24 ID no. Function Input voltage Input current Output voltage Output current Output power Dimensions Type of installation Connection IP rating Protection class Environmental conditions Guidelines/standards … Technical data 151424 Power supply for several components 230 V AC (± 15 %) … A 24 V DC (±10 %) … A 60 W 78 × 93 × 56 mm (W × H × D) top hat rail Screw terminals … mm² IP54 II Service temperature: -10 .... +50 °C UL60950-1; UL508 Motor lock control MST 210 XX Follow the mechanical installation instructions for motor lock IQ lock. ID no. 103671 Function Control unit for motor lock IQ lock EL / IQ lock EL DL Dimensions 140 × 140 × 79 mm (W × H × D) Weight … kg Operating voltage 12–24 V DC (–10 %, +15 %) Current consumption àà àà àà àà Terminals Plug/screw terminals, max. cable cross-section … mm² Max. contact rating of the relays (X2) 30 V DC / … A Max. lock switch contact load (X3) 30 V DC / 500 mA 160 mA at 12 V DC max. … A briefly at 12 V DC 80 mA at 24 V DC max. 500 mA briefly at 24 V DC (incl. IQ lock) Max. length of connection cable to the lock 10 m IP rating in accordance with DIN 40050 IP54 Environmental conditions in accordance with DIN 40040 àà Service temperature: JWF (–10…+50 °C, max. 75 % rel. hum., no condensation) àà Storage temperature: HPE (–25…+85 °C, max. 95 % rel. hum., no condensation) 11 Electrical connection … IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Electrical connection XX Use wire-end ferrules for wire cores. àà Work on the electrical equipment (IQ AUT, IQ lock EL, IQ lock EL DL, IQ lock EM, IQ lock EM DL) may only be performed by a qualified electrician. àà The electrical connection work must be carried out in accordance with the relevant regulations of the VDE and local utility companies. The electrical connection for the motor locks (IQ AUT, IQ lock EL, IQ lock EL DL) and lever locks (IQ lock EM, IQ lock EM DL) must be carried out according to the enclosed wiring diagrams. The technical data listed (see chapter 4) must be taken into account: àà The nominal voltage of the motor / magnet in the lock with the output voltage of the power supply or device to be activated. àà The power consumption of the motor / magnet with the output power of the power supply or device to be activated. àà The maximum switching power of the switch contacts with the respective power to be switched. … Motor lock control MST 210 in connection with IQ lock EL / IQ lock EL DL … .1 Connections X10 Cover monitoring (OUT) 23 NC 22 COM 22 23 X7 24 25 X8 X1 … 6 X5 … 9 X4 LED2 LED3 LED4 21 20 X3 ON X6 LED5 X9 … 5 … 4 … 2 … 4 Light emitting diodes LED1 Supply voltage LED2 Day/night mode (day=on) LED3 Release LED6 LED1 X11 X2 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 12 27 28 … 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 X6 Mode of operation (IN) … Day / night mode … 24V ext. … Release … 24V ext. … X3 Bolt switch contact (OUT) 21 COM 20 NO JP2 … X4 Smoke detector (IN) … NC … COM XX A jumper must be inserted if no smoke detector is used. See the following pages for further application options (24V) JP1 X7 Supply … GND in … 12V / 24V DC in F1 X5 Door contact (IN) … NO / NC … 24V ext. X10 F2 X8 Cylinder contact / Sabotage (OUT) 25 NO / NC 24 COM Jumper JP1 Smoke detector function JP2 12 V / 24 V LED4 Fault/alarm LED5 Door handle LED6 Door status X1 Lock 27 Cable black 28 Cable red … Cable blue 31 Cable pink 32 Cable grey 33 Cable yellow 34 Cable green 35 Cable brown 36 Cable white 37 Cable violet 38 Cable red/blue 39 Cable grey/pink X2 Outputs 10 Relay day/night mode COM 11 Relay day/night mode NO 12 Relay release COM 13 Relay release NO 14 Relay fault/alarm COM 15 Relay fault/alarm NC 16 Relay door handle COM 17 Relay door handle NO 18 Relay door status COM 19 Relay door status NO X9 RS485 interface X11 Programming interface IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Electrical connection Light emitting diode displays Function LED1 off LED1 on Cause Power supply interrupted LED1 flashing evenly LED2 on Day circuit active LED2 off Night mode circuit active LED3 on LED3 off Activation active Night mode circuit active Consequence No control unit function Control unit and lock are working normally Fault Remedy Check voltage source Check electrical connections Bolt not extended and latches in place Bolt extended, door locked Door can be opened Door bolt extended (locked) LED4 on LED4 off Fault-free lock function Fault/alarm LED5 on Handle is actuated LED6 on Door closed (auxiliary latch and door contact closed) Setting of the release time Opening time "x" = … s Setting options for release time: Switch … 2 … 4 Switch position ON ON ON ON Release time x+1s (x) + … s (x) + … s (x) + 10 s Example: Set release time = … s Release times of 1–19 s can thus be set with a pulse control of the release input terminals X6.2 and X6.5. If a longer release time or continuous release is required, this is to be realised by a correspondingly long activation time or a continuous contact. Setting of the release time is also used to set the duration of the contacting of the release relay (X2.12 and X2.13). Inputs Terminal X7.1 X7.3 X5.2 X5.6 X4.8 X4.9 X6.2 X6.5 X6.2 X6.4 Signal GND in 12 V / 24 V in 24 V external External door contact Smoke detector Smoke detector 24 V external Release 24 V external Night mode / day Function GND supply 12 V / 24 V DC supply Contact connected: Door closed Connection of smoke detector with potential-free contact or as 24 V supply voltage (see page 3) Contact connected: Mode of operation release Contact open: Mode of operation as selected below Contact connected: Mode of operation "secured by day" Contact open: Mode of operation "night mode" 13 Electrical connection IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Outputs Terminal X2.10 X2.11 X2.12 X2.13 X2.14 X2.15 X2.16 X2.17 X2.18 X2.19 X3.20 X3.21 X8.25 X8.24 X10.23 X10.22 Signal Relay night mode / day Relay night mode / day Relay release / activation Drive unit Relay release / activation Drive unit Relay fault / power failure Relay fault / power failure Contact NO COM NO Door handle Door handle Door contact Door contact Bolt contact Bolt contact Cable monitoring NC/ cylinder contact NO Cable monitoring / Cylinder contact Cover monitoring / MST 210 Cover monitoring / MST 210 NO COM NO COM NO COM NO COM NC COM Function Contact closed: Mode of operation day Contact open: Mode of operation night mode Contact closed: Mode of operation release / door can be passed unlocked Contact open: No release Contact open: no fault/no alarm, normal operating state Contact closed with: power failure, system failure, alarm Contact closed: Door handle actuated Contact open: Door handle not actuated Contact closed: Door contact and auxiliary latch actuated Contact open: Door contact or auxiliary latch not actuated Contact closed when bolt extended 95 %. Contact is not evaluated by control unit. Cylinder contact closes a contact when the installed cylinder is turned or optional cable monitoring takes place COM NC Casing cover monitoring, closes a contact when the casing cover of the MST 210 is opened. COM Setting daytime operation If the contact between terminals X6.2 and X6.4 is closed (permanent contact) the lock runs in daytime operation. If the contact is opened, the lock runs in permanently night mode. This means that the lock automatically locks every time the door is closed. Setting permanently unlocked If the contact between terminals X6.5 and X6.2 is closed (permanent contact) the motor lock runs in permanently unlocked mode of operation. If the contact is opened, the lock runs in daytime or permanently night mode depending on the pre-set (contact between the terminals X6.2 and X6.4 closed or open). … .2 14 Terminal assignment for connection cable lock IQ lock EL to MST 210, terminal strip X1 Terminals MST 210 X1.27 X1.28 X1.2 X1.31 X1.32 X1.33 X1.34 X1.35 X1.36 X1.37 X1.38 Cable colour Cable black Cable red Cable blue Cable pink Cable grey Cable yellow Cable green Cable brown Cable white Cable violet Cable red/blue Connector IQ lock EL PIN … PIN … PIN … PIN … PIN … PIN … PIN … PIN … PIN … PIN 10 PIN 11 X1.39 Cable grey/pink PIN 12 Description/function Motor – Motor + 24 V Basic setting (permanently night) daytime operation Release Door handle Auxiliary latch NO Locked Locked Cable monitoring or cylinder contact can be selected via switch Sabotage or cylinder contact can be selected via switch IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Electrical connection Connector IQ lock EL PIN … 12 … 7 … 12 … 7 Connector power supply cable (2) black red blue pink grey Yellow green brown white violet red/blue grey/pink Low-pass filter (TPF) New from mid-2014. The low-pass filter (TPF) ensures improved activation of the motor lock IQ lock EL / IQ lock EL DL. Here, the motor control cable (red and black cables) are not connected directly to the motor lock control MST 210, they are connected with terminal X12 of the additional PCB TPF. The TPF has been optimised for the new motor drive unit in the lock and for the new software (see chapter … .4 and chapter … .6). Taking the conditions listed in chapter … .7 into account, the TPF can also be used for locks with an older building design. Insert TPF board on MST 210 JP1 JP2 X7 … 22 23 X10 … F1 F2 24 25 X8 X1 27 28 … 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 … 6 X5 … 9 X4 … X12 LED2 X11 LED3 LED4 21 20 X3 ON X6 LED5 … 1 … 3 … 5 … 2 XX X9 LED6 LED1 X11 Low-pass filter X11 Low-pass filter X11 X2 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 X13 … .3 … 2 … 4 … 6 … 8 … 10 11 12 Connector IQ lock EL / IQ lock EL DL (1) black red blue orange grey Yellow green brown white violet white/black white/brown Insert the TPF board (1) onto slot X9 of the motor lock control MST 210 (2). 15 23 22 … 3 X8 X1 … 6 X5 … 9 X4 JP1 LED2 24 25 … 21 20 … 9 … X9 … 2 LED5 … 2 … 4 LED6 … 5 ON LED1 X11 LED2 X13 LED4 20 21 X12 28 27 ON X6 … 4 XX X9 … Connect the red and black cables from motor lock IQ lock EL / IQ lock EL DL with X12. Connect all the other cables from motor lock IQ lock EL / IQ lock EL DL to terminal X1 of the motor lock control MST 210. LED5 … 2 … 4 … XX LED6 LED1 X11 X2 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 X11 27 28 LED3 X3 Wire TPF with motor lock IQ lock EL / IQ lock EL DL X1 27 28 … 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 LED4 X4 … X2 X5 X6 X7 … LED3 X8 X3 JP2 F2 23 22 X10 27 28 … 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 F1 Wire terminal X11 (TPF) to terminal X1 (MST 210). F1 XX JP2 IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL,X7C / C DL, M / M DL F2 Wire TPF to MST 210 JP1 X10 24 25 Electrical connection X13 X11 27 28 X12 28 27 BK RD Cable IQ lock EL / Cable IQ lock EL DL … .4 Motor lock control MST 210 with new software from version … In order to improve the performance of the GEZE motor locks IQ lock EL / IQ lock EL DL even further, GEZE will be delivering the motor lock control MST 210 with new software from mid-2014. XX For optimum use of this new version, take the respective combination possibilities between old and new products as listed in chapter … .7 into account. 16 IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … .5 Electrical connection Install the MST210 printed circuit board under the cover extension kit … c … For installation of the printed circuit board under a cover extension kit, the hatched printed circuit board elements must be broken off. XX Use a pair of pliers to break off the hatched printed circuit board elements (1) at the breaking point. XX Install the printed circuit board on the mounting bracket under the cover extension kit. … .6 IQ lock EL / IQ lock EL DL with new motor HW 11504x, C0 In order to improve the performance of the GEZE motor locks IQ lock EL / IQ lock EL DL even further, GEZE will be integrating a new motor from mid-2014. XX For optimum use of this new version, take the respective combination possibilities between old and new products as listed in chapter … .7 into account. … .7 Combination possibilities between old and new components Due to the changes described in chapters … .3 to … .6 different combination possibilities can occur. For you to be able to identify the optimum solution for your application, the following table lists the combination possibilities with respective effect on the function. Motor in the lock new new old Software new old old Low-pass filter (TFP) with with without Comment optimal permissible only without function "secured by day" current status The following combinations are not permissible: Motor in the lock new old old new Software old old new new Low-pass filter (TFP) without with with without Comment not permissible not permissible not permissible not permissible 17 Electrical connection … .8 IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Smoke detector A smoke detector can be connected via terminal X4, signal numbers … and 9. The smoke detector disconnects the control unit from its supply voltage and thus makes the lock – no matter which mode of operation is currently set – return to its safe initial position (night mode) via the built-in power storage device. Connection possibilities If the system is operated without smoke detectors, a jumper must be installed between terminals … and 9. Connection for smoke detector X4 Description Connection via external 24 V supply voltage (protected against reverse polarity) Connection via potential-free opener contact … 9 X4 … 8 Jumper position JP1 Operating voltage Jumper position JP2 Description 12 V operating voltage 24 V operating voltage Safety fuses Designation F1 F2 … .9 Value … A, SMF 125 V, fast-acting … A, SMF 125 V, fast-acting Description Input fuse, 24 V internal Fuse for smoke detector external supply Sabotage monitoring or cylinder contact 24 25 A switch (see chapters … .1 and … .2) on the motor lock is used to select between the modes of operation sabotage and cylinder contact. (On delivery the switch is set to cylinder contact). There is a rectangular recess in the lock case approx. … mm above the handle follower at the right of the lock case edge. Here you can use a screwdriver (size 1) to switch the mode of operation (S = Sabotage, Z = Cylinder contact). Cylinder contact In the mode of operation cylinder contact, actuation of the lock cylinder is reproduced at terminals X8.25 and X8.24. The cover is also monitored at terminals X10.23 and X10.22. Cylinder contact 24 25 18 Cover monitoring 22 23 IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Electrical connection Cable and cover monitoring MST 210 Terminal X10.22 is connected with terminal X8.25 to use sabotage monitoring (comprising cable and cover monitoring). The sabotage monitoring signal is then tapped via terminals X10.23 and X8.24. The circuit is opened in the event of a fault (cover open or cable fault). Cover monitoring/cable monitoring Connections X1 - connection for power supply device, inputs and outputs Connection Wire colour Signal Function X1.1 blue – BU GND in Power supply X1.3 red – RD 24 V (DC in) X1.2 – – 24 V DC X1.5 brown – BN Input Release X1.20 white – WH Output … (locked) Output … X1.21 grey – GY COM X1.22 pink – PK Unlocked Output … X1.21 grey – GY COM X1 … 20 21 22 … .1 … Rod drive IQ AUT … X4 … 1 X10 22 23 … 42 41 43 42 41 X8 24 25 X5 Input A potential-free contact (normally open contact) must be connected to pins X1.2 and X1.5. If the contact is activated, IQ AUT moves to the unlocked position where it remains for the hold-open time. The time starts once the contact has been disconnected. Output IQ AUT has two outputs with the potential which is connected to pin X1.21. The output "unlocked" is closed when the drive rod is in the unlocked position. Output … can be set (see Service menu). X4 - connection for ST220 ConnecSignal tion X4.1 X4.2 X4.42 Connection for ST220 X4.41 X4.43 Function GND 24V DC RS485-A RS485-B – X5 - connection for GEZE-BUS (e.g.: IO 320) Connection Wire colour Signal X5.42 yellow – YE GEZE-BUS X5.41 green – GN Function RS485-A RS485-B 19 Electrical connection IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL DIP switch (back of PCB) àà The DIP switch (1) can be used to switch the terminating resistor for RS485 on and off. àà If there are more than two bus devices, the resistance must be switched on in the first and last device. … X4 ON 43 41 42 … 1 22 21 20 … x1 … 3 … OFF … .2 Service menu Level … Configuration Level … Speed Hold-open time Language Level … Output … Fire protection System information Maintenance Value range 45% to 85% … to 60 sec àà German àà French àà English àà Locked àà SW + … sec àà Alarm Yes/no Yes/no System init. Yes/no Motor replaced Yes/no Cycle [Number of cycles] Product information HW ver. SW ver. Ser. no. Vx.x Vx.x xxxxxx Diagnosis Motor state Sensor state Alarm memory Command 20 Start motor Acknowledge alarm Factory setting Current (A) Temperature Duration (sec) Current state [see below] [Cycle] [Alarm description] Factory setting 60% 10 sec German Comment Locked See below no See below Yes: When maintenance is due Yes: When system is initialised Yes: When the motor was replaced The current number of cycles The value is updated as long as the enter key on ST220 is kept pressed. See fault description IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Electrical connection Configuration/output … Output … is set permanently to the feedback "unlocked". Output … can be configured. àà "Locked": The output is closed when the drive rod of IQ AUT is in the locked position. àà "SW + … sec": The output is closed when the input button is pressed. The output is reset after … seconds. àà "Alarm": The output is closed when an alarm is pending. Configuration/fire protection When this option is active, IQ AUT can only be controlled via the BUS interface so that it can establish faults in transmission (e.g. cable break, short-circuit etc.). For this, you need an IO 420 which is able to send suitable commands to IQ AUT and to control it. Diagnosis/sensor state The rod drive IQ AUT has … sensors inside. This menu shows which sensor is currently active. To update the table: XX Keep the "Enter" key pressed. This menu is relevant for service technicians. … Rod Lckd.: Wheel * Unlckd. 1: Unlckd. 2: – * Lever lock IQ lock EM Power supply cable If polarity is reversed the outside handle cannot be engaged (reverse polarity protection). … 2 Connector IQ lock EM / IQ lock EM DL Connector power supply cable … 12 … 7 … 12 … PIN Connector IQ lock EM (1) … 2 black red Connector power supply cable (2) black red … 7 blue green blue green Function Door handle contact (NO) Contact closed: Door handle actuated Magnet – GND supply Magnet + 24 V DC … Contact – GND + 24 V DC PIN … PIN … PIN … PIN … 4 … 5 … orange Yellow grey brown pink Yellow grey brown Release contact (NO) Contact closed: Door handle engaged - door can be unlocked by actuating the handle PIN … Auxiliary latch (NO) Contact closed: Auxiliary latch actuated (door closed) PIN … Release PIN … PIN … 21 Electrical connection … 10 white violet IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL white violet Bolt contact (NC) Contact closed: Bolt extended Contact open: Bolt retracted PIN … PIN 10 11 12 white/black white/brown red/blue grey/pink Cylinder contact (NO) Contact closed: Cylinder contact actuated PIN 11 PIN 12 … Contact lock IQ lock C Power supply cable … 2 Connector IQ lock C / IQ lock C DL Connector power supply cable … 12 … 7 … 12 … PIN Connector IQ lock C (1) … 7 blue green Connector power supply cable (2) blue green … 8 grey brown grey brown Function Auxiliary latch (NO) Contact closed: Auxiliary latch actuated (door closed) Door handle contact (NO) Contact closed: Door handle actuated … Contact PIN … PIN … PIN … PIN … 9 10 white violet white violet Bolt contact (NC) Contact closed: Bolt extended Contact open: Bolt retracted PIN … PIN 10 11 12 white/black white/brown red/blue grey/pink Cylinder contact (NO) Contact closed: Cylinder contact actuated PIN 11 PIN 12 22 IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … Wiring diagrams Wiring diagrams Designation IQ lock EL with motor lock control MST 210 Standard connection IQ LOCK EL / MST 210 with low-pass filter from HW 159073 IQ lock EL with programme switch and activation IQ lock EL with EMD (-F, -I) and activation IQ lock EL with EMD (-F, -I), TZ 320 SN and activation IQ lock EL with TSA160 NT (-F, -I) and activation IQ lock EL with TSA160 NT (-F, -I), TZ 320 SN and activation IQ lock EL with EMD (-F, -I) and smoke control unit IQ lock EL with TSA160 NT (-F, -I) & smoke control unit IQ lock EL with smoke control unit (RSZ 6) IQ lock EL with smoke control unit (RSZ 5) IQ lock EL with smoke control unit FA GC 150/160 IQ lock EL with TZ 320 SN and activation IQ lock EL with K600 and activation IQ lock EL with K600, TZ 320 SN and activation IQ lock AUT with K600 and activation IQ lock AUT with K600, TZ 320 SN and activation IQ lock AUT with EMD (-F, -I) and activation IQ lock AUT with TSA160 NT (-F, -I) and activation IQ lock AUT with Powerturn IS … Chapter … Page Page 23 Page 24 Page 25 Page 26 Page 28 Page 30 Page 32 Page 34 Page 35 Page 36 Page 37 Page 38 Page 40 Page 42 Page 44 Page 46 Page 48 Page 50 Page 52 Page 54 IQ lock EL with motor lock control MST 210 24V DC NT … -24 BN BN BU BU GN / YE N PE JP2 BK / RD … RD 27 28 … 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 F1 F2 … X7 22 23 X10 JP1 L1 BK RD BU PK GY YE GN BN WH VT RD / BU GY / PK 24 25 X8 NO … X4 … When the door is closed the contact is closed X1 X5 … COM … Door contact LE D2 LE D3 21 20 ON X6 LE D5 … 1 … 3 … NO … COM … 2 Push button / ZUKO / SCT X9 LE D6 LE D1 X11 X2 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 LE D4 X3 23 Wiring diagrams … 24 IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Standard connection IQ LOCK EL / MST 210 with low-pass filter from HW 159073 IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … Wiring diagrams IQ lock EL with programme switch and activation XX Follow the installation instructions for IQ lock. 24V DC NT … -24 MST 210 X7 GND in … 24 V DC in … BK / RD RD MPS-D / potential-free switch X6 24 V DC … 1 24 V DC … Release … 2 Hold open 24 V DC … 3 Day Day … / night mode … X8 … cylinder contact COM 24 NO4 cylinder contact 25 COM NO X2 … Release COM Push button / ZUKO / SCT 12 NO6 Release 13 … Door handle COM 17 NO8 Door handle 16 Door contact X5 24 V DC … 9 contact (IN) Door … COM NO When the door is closed the contact is closed 25 Wiring diagrams … IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL IQ lock EL with EMD (-F, -I) and activation XX XX XX XX Follow the installation instructions for IQ lock. Heed the wiring diagram for EMD, EMD-F, EMD Invers. With 2-leaf door drives connect the control unit to the active leaf. Set the parameters on the DCU2, DCU2-F, DCU-I control unit: àà With DPS: Set a1 to … 8 (day-night mode switchover), parameter ®® (bolt message) to … 2 (normally closed contact) and TO (electric strike) to … 3 (motor lock) àà With ST220: Set Signals Output signals PA1 to day/night mode switchover Set Signals Input signals Bolt contact type to electric strike Set Door parameters Electric strike type to motor lock. àà Voltage supply of the MST 210 from separate power supply NT … -24 or from the DCU2 control unit EMD Invers àà If the parameter setting for the door opening output of the EMD-Invers is motor lock, the door is only held in the closing position by the IQ lock EL, no longer by the door drive. àà The door opens through spring force in the event of manual opening using the door handle in the event of a panic. àà After the hold-open time has expired, the door closes electromechanically and the IQ lock EL locks. àà The EMD also recognises without an activation signal when the door is opened. 26 IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Wiring diagrams Push button / ZUKO / SCT 24V DC NT … -24 COM NO MST 210 X7 GND in 24 V DC in … 3 Release RD DCU2, control unit Slimdrive EMD active leaf PS Voltage from power supply or from DCU2 X6 24 V DC BK / RD … 5 24 V DC … Day / night mode … 24 NO Cylinder contact 25 DO hold open … AUT automatic … NA night mode … 24 V DC KB X8 COM Cylinder contact … 2 24 V DC 20 Mechanical contact TOE … GND COM Release 12 … 24 V DC NO Release 13 31 TOEA COM Door handle 17 32 TOEB NO Door handle 16 33 RM X2 X5 PA1 24 V DC … 55 PA1A Door contact (IN) … 56 PA1B … 24 V DC Door contact COM NO When the door is closed the contact is closed 27 Wiring diagrams … IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL IQ lock EL with EMD (-F, -I), TZ 320 SN and activation XX XX XX Follow the installation instructions for IQ lock. Heed the wiring diagram for EMD, EMD-F, EMD Invers. Heed the wiring diagram for GEZE SecuLogic RWS (TZ 320). Disconnect the internal programme switch of the door drive. With 2-leaf door drives connect the control unit to the active leaf. XX Set the parameters on the DCU2, DCU2-F, DCU-I control unit: àà With DPS: Set a1 to … 8 (day-night mode switchover), parameter ®® (bolt message) to … 2 (normally closed contact) and TO (electric strike) to … 3 (motor lock). àà With ST220: Set Signals Output signals PA1 to day/night mode switchover. Set Signals Input signals Bolt contact type to electric strike. Set Door parameters Electric strike type to motor lock. The following settings must be made on the TZ 320: XX Set Output … to "BA drive". XX Set Output … to "Activation drive". XX XX àà Voltage supply of the MST 210 from separate power supply NT … -24 or from the DCU2 control unit 28 … 46 45 42 41 24 V DC- Supply CAN-H (GEZE-Bus) CAN-L (GEZE-Bus) RS485-A RS485-B 11 Unlock SCT, acknowledge 50 51 … 24 V DC COM output … (max. 30 V, 1A) NO output … (act.-drive) … 21 22 GND COM output … (max. 30 V, 1A) NO output … (BA drive) 24 V DC … 12 Lock SCT, KZF, acknowledge X 108 (blue terminal strip) … 24 V DC X 105 (black terminal strip) NO 56 … 55 33 32 31 … 1 NO COM COM 24 V DC Mechanical contact NO - + COM PA1B PA1A PA1 RM TOEB TOEA 24 V DC GND TOE 20 24 V DC … Indirect activation … 24 V DC … 7 KB NA night mode … 1 GND PS Indirect activation 24 V DC X 107 (green terminal strip) optional DCU2, control unit Slimdrive EMD active leaf SA … 3 15 … 14 … 5 FTV 320 PE N L1 … NO COM Push button / ZUKO / SCT GN / YE BU 6A AUT automatic BU BN … 24V DC NT … -24 BN DO hold open RD BK / RD … 53 … 24 V DC Input … (fire alarm system) 15 Door closed … 2 24 V DC 52 14 Door locked Input … (short-term unlocked) … Locking mechanism- Input … (short-term unlocked) … Locking mechanism+ X 106 (orange terminal strip ) … GND-Supply X 104 (red terminal strip ) TZ 320 Voltage from power supply or from DCU2 24V DC NT … -24 RD BK / RD 24 V DC NO Door handle Door contact (IN) COM Door handle 16 … NO Release 17 … COM Release 13 NO Cylinder contact 12 COM Cylinder contact 24 V DC Day / night mode … 25 Release … 24 24 V DC … 24 V DC in GND in … 3 … When the door is closed the contact is closed NO COM Door contact X5 X2 X8 X6 X7 MST 210 IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Wiring diagrams 29 Wiring diagrams … IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL IQ lock EL with TSA160 NT (-F, -I) and activation XX XX XX XX XX Follow the installation instructions for IQ lock. Heed the wiring diagram for TSA160 NT, TSA160 NT-F, TSA160 NT Invers. Disconnect the internal programme switch of the door drive. With 2-leaf door drives connect the control unit to the active leaf. Set the parameters on the DCU5 control unit: àà With DPS: Set parameter ®® ( 21 ) (bolt message) to … 2 (normally closed contact) and TO ( … 0 ) (electric strike type) to … 3 (motor lock). àà With ST220: Set Input signals Bolt message to electric strike. Set Door parameters Electric strike type to motor lock àà Voltage supply of the MST 210 from separate power supply NT … -24 or from the DCU5 control unit. àà The GND of DCU5 (terminal TOE no. 1) must be connected with the GND in the MST 210 (terminal X7 no. 1), even when a separate power supply is used. àà The day function on the lock cannot be used with analogue programme switches (DPS / TPS / MPS). 30 IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Wiring diagrams Push button / ZUKO / SCT 24V DC NT … -24 COM NO MST 210 X7 GND in … 24 V DC in … DCU5, control unit TSA 160 NT active leaf RD Voltage from power supply or from DCU5 X6 24 V DC BK / RD *) PS … Release … 24 V DC … Day / night mode … 24 NO Cylinder contact 25 DO Hold open … AUT automatic … 24 V DC KB X8 COM Cylinder contact … 2 24 V DC 20 Mechanical contact TOE … GND COM Release 12 … 24 V DC NO Release 13 31 TOEA COM Door handle 17 32 TOEB NO Door handle 16 33 RM X2 X5 24 V DC … Door contact (IN) … Door contact *) DCU5 GND must be connected to MST 210 GND, even when a separate power supply is used COM NO When the door is closed the contact is closed 31 Wiring diagrams … IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL IQ lock EL with TSA160 NT (-F, -I), TZ 320 SN and activation XX XX XX Follow the installation instructions for IQ lock. Heed the wiring diagram for TSA160 NT, TSA160 NT-F, TSA160 NT Invers. Heed the wiring diagram for GEZE SecuLogic RWS (TZ 320). Disconnect the internal programme switch of the door drive. With 2-leaf door drives connect the control unit to the active leaf. XX Set the parameters on the DCU2, DCU2-F, DCU-I control unit: àà With DPS: Set parameter ®® ( 21 ) (bolt message) to … 2 (normally closed contact) and TO ( … 0 ) (electric strike type) to … 3 (motor lock). àà With ST220: Set Input signals Bolt message to electric strike. Set Door parameters Electric strike type to motor lock àà Voltage supply of the MST 210 from separate power supply NT … -24 or from the DCU5 control unit. àà The GND of the DCU5 (terminal TOE no. 1) The following settings must be made on the TZ 320: àà Set Output … to "BA drive" àà Set Output … to "Activation drive" àà Voltage supply of the MST 210 from separate power supply NT … -24 or from the DCU5 control unit. àà The GND of DCU5 (terminal TOE no. 1) must be connected with the GND in the MST 210 (terminal X7 no. 1), even when a separate power supply is used. àà The day function on the lock cannot be used with analogue programme switches (DPS / TPS / MPS). XX XX 32 IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Wiring diagrams 33 Wiring diagrams … IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL IQ lock EL with EMD (-F, -I) and smoke control unit XX XX Follow the installation instructions for IQ lock. Heed the wiring diagram for EMD, EMD-F, EMD Invers. With 2-leaf door drives connect the control unit to the active leaf. Set the parameters on the DCU2, DCU2-F, DCU-I control unit: àà With DPS: Set a1 to … 8 (day-night mode switchover), parameter ®® (bolt message) to … 2 (normally closed contact) and TO (electric strike) to … 3 (motor lock) àà With ST220: Set Signals Output signals PA1 to day/night mode switchover. Set Signals Input signals Bolt contact type to electric strike Set Door parameters Electric strike type to motor lock àà Voltage supply of the MST 210 from separate power supply NT … -24 or from the DCU2 control unit. àà Set Jumper (J1) of the MST 210 to 2/3 ("Connection via external 24 V supply voltage"). XX XX EMD Invers àà If the parameter setting for the door opening output of the EMD-Invers is motor lock, the door is only held in the closing position by the IQ lock EL, no longer by the door drive. àà The door opens through spring force in the event of manual opening using the door handle in the event of a panic. àà After the hold-open time has expired, the door closes electromechanically and the IQ lock EL locks. àà The EMD also recognises without an activation signal when the door is opened. 24 V DC NT … -24 Manual trigger switch "Close door" MST 210 COM X7 GND in … 24 V DC in … NC BK / RD RD Smoke control unit - output alarm X4 JP1 COM smoke detector … + 24 V DC NC smoke detector … - GND X5 24 V DC … Door contact (IN) … DCU2-F RSZ SF DCU2-F RSZ GF RSZ_GND 61 61 RSZ_GND RSZ_24 V DC 62 62 RSZ_24 V DC Second drive 63 63 Second drive RSZ_GND 61 61 RSZ_GND Door contact COM NO When the door is closed the contact is closed 34 IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … Wiring diagrams IQ lock EL with TSA160 NT (-F, -I) & smoke control unit XX XX XX XX XX àà àà àà àà àà Follow the installation instructions for IQ lock. Heed the wiring diagram for TSA160 NT, TSA160 NT-F, TSA160 NT Invers. Disconnect the internal programme switch of the door drive. With 2-leaf door drives connect the control unit to the active leaf. Set the parameters on the DCU5 control unit: àà With DPS: Set parameter ®® (bolt message) to … 2 (normally closed contact) and TO (electric strike) to … 3 (motor lock) àà With ST220: Set Input signals Bolt message to electric strike. Set Door parameters Electric strike type to motor lock. Voltage supply of the MST 210 from separate power supply NT … -24 or from the DCU5 control unit. The GND of DCU5 (terminal TOE no. 1) must be connected with the GND in the MST 210 (terminal X7 no. 1), even when a separate power supply is used. The day function on the lock cannot be used with analogue programme switches (DPS / TPS / MPS). When the mode of operation "permanently open" or "day" is used, the jumper (J1) of the MST 210 must be set to 2/3 ("Connection via external 24 V DC supply voltage"). When the mode of operation "night mode" is used, the smoke detector on the MST 210 must be bridged. As an option, the lock can be switched off via an on-site fire alarm system 24V DC NT … -24 Manual trigger switch "Close door" MST 210 COM X7 GND in 24 V DC in … 3 RD DCU5 X4 JP1 NC BK / RD COM smoke detector … 2 24 V DC NC smoke detector … 1 GND X5 24 V DC … Door contact … Smoke control unit - output alarm Mains switch-off board (ID no. 067581) … RSZ_24 V DC … RSZ_GND Reset 24 V DC + GND - Reset button … COM … NO Door contact COM NO When the door is closed the contact is closed 35 Wiring diagrams IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … IQ lock EL with smoke control unit (RSZ 6) XX XX XX XX XX XX XX Follow the installation instructions for IQ lock. Heed the wiring diagram for the smoke control unit RSZ 6. Remove the red jumper from the smoke control unit (RSZ 6). Set the jumper J1 on the MST 210 to 2/3. Set the jumper on the smoke switch (RS 5) to 1/2. Press the reset button for commissioning. After release by the smoke control unit (RSZ 6) or the smoke switch (RS 5), press the reset button. 24 V DC NT … -24 RSZ6 MST 210 KL1 24 V DC in … GND in … GND … HOD / Hold-open device … X7 RD BK / RD … MRB / Manual trigger switch … 24 V DC … GND in … 24 V DC in X6 KL2 24 V DC … 2 24 V DC … Release … 24 V DC … Day / night mode X4 GND … 8 COM smoke detector AS / Ceiling-mounted detector … 9 NC smoke detector NC Alarm 10 COM Alarm 11 … 24 V DC NO Alarm 12 … Door contact (IN) JP1 X5 Door contact Reset button COM COM NO NO When the door is closed the contact is closed RS5 JP1 … 2 … 36 RS5 24 V DC in … 1 24 V DC in GND in … 2 GND in … 6 … 8 … 9 JP1 … 2 … IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Wiring diagrams … IQ lock EL with smoke control unit (RSZ 5) XX XX XX XX XX XX XX Follow the mechanical installation instructions for IQ lock. Heed the wiring diagram for the smoke control unit RSZ 5. Set the jumper on the smoke control unit (RSZ 5) to 2/3. Set the jumper J1 on the MST 210 to 2/3. Set the jumper on the smoke switch (RS 5) to 1/2. Press the reset button for commissioning. After release of the smoke control unit or the smoke switches, press the reset button. Cables IQ lock MST 210 X1 Lock 27 28 X2 Outputs COM day/ Night mode NO day/night mode 10 11 BU … COM Release 12 NO Release 13 PK 31 GY 32 YE 33 GN 34 NO Door handle 16 L1 L BN 35 COM Door handle 17 N N WH 36 COM door status 18 VT 37 NO door status 19 RD/BU 38 X3 RSK (OUT) GY/PK 39 COM RSK 20 NO RSK 21 … X4 Smoke detector (IN) … COM fault/ Alarm NC fault/ Alarm 17 RSZ5 15 + - J1 … 2 … 4 … 10 AL_NC … 9 AL_COM … AL_NO X6 Mode of operation (IN) X11 27 28 24 V DC … Release … 4 24 V DC … 5 … 3 X10 Cover mon. (OUT) … 24 … 25 Day / night mode X13 X12 COM Cylinder contact BK 27 NO Cylinder contact RD 28 TPF X9 J1 GND in … 24 V DC in … 1 … X8 Cyl.con./sabo (OUT) COM Cylinder contact 24 NO Cylinder contact 25 … 2 X5 Door contact (IN) TK … 2 … X7 Supply … J1 … 2 … 2 24 V DC NO … Door contact (IN) … 4 … 5 … 6 NT 24V DC + - … 5 … COM J1 … 2 … 9 … 10 … RS … 9 10 Reset RS … COM NO 37 Wiring diagrams IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … IQ lock EL with smoke control unit FA GC 150/160 XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX 38 Follow the mechanical installation instructions for IQ lock. Heed the wiring diagram for the hold-open system FA GC 150. Set jumper J3 on the smoke control unit (RSZ6) to 2/3. Separate the breaking point in the first relay base. Do not separate the breaking point in the last relay base. Set jumper J1 on the MST 210 to 2/3. Press the reset button for commissioning. After release of the smoke control unit or the smoke switches, press the reset button. IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Cables IQ lock Wiring diagrams MST 210 X1 Lock 27 28 X2 Outputs COM day/ Night mode NO day/night mode 10 - 11 + BU … COM Release 12 PK 31 NO Release 13 RSZ6 KL1 17 … 24V 15 … GND GY 32 YE 33 COM fault/ Alarm NC fault/ Alarm GN 34 NO Door handle 16 … GND BN 35 COM Door handle 17 … HOD ext. WH 36 COM door status 18 KL2 VT 37 NO door status 19 … RD/BU 38 X3 RSK (OUT) … MRB GY/PK 39 COM RSK 20 … 24V DC NO RSK 21 … GND X4 Smoke detector (IN) … AS … 10 AL_NC … 11 AL_COM 12 AL_NO J1 … 2 … 4 X6 Mode of operation (IN) 27 28 X12 27 RD 28 … KL3 Release … 1 GND 24 V DC … 2 HOD int. … J1 … 2 X10 Cover mon. (OUT) J2 … 2 J3 … 2 … Day / night mode X13 X9 TPF COM Cylinderrk.contact 24 nderk. NO Cylinder contact 25 X7 Supply GND in … 24 V DC in … X8 Cyl.con./sabo (OUT) COM Cylinderrk.contact 24 nderk. NO Cylinder contact 25 24 V GND 24 V R … 2 ASin ASout GC 152/153 X5 Door contact (IN) TK 24V DC 24 V DC Klemmdose X11 BK NT 24V DC COM … 24 V DC NO … Door contact (IN) 24 V GND NT 24V DC + - 24 V R … 2 ASin ASout GC 152/153 Reset COM NO 39 Wiring diagrams IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … IQ lock EL with TZ 320 SN and activation XX XX Follow the installation instructions for IQ lock. Heed the wiring diagram for GEZE SecuLogic RWS (TZ 320). The following settings must be made on the TZ 320: XX Set Output … to "BA drive". XX Set Output … to "TOE working current" Voltage supply of the MST 210 is from separate power supply NT … -24 or from the TZ 320 control unit Option … If the motor lock is to be in mode of operation "day" when the door control unit is "permanently unlocked", output "1" of the TZ 320 must be connected to the "day/night mode" input of the MST 210. Parameter setting for output … must be "BA drive" for this function. Option … As an option, the output "cylinder contact" (terminals 24 + 25) of the MST 210 can be connected to a configurable input of the TZ 320 (terminals … and 52 or 53). Function: When the cylinder is actuated by the key, a short-term release is triggered at the door control unit. If only short-term release is desired, the parameter setting for the input of the TZ 320 must be "short-term unlocked". Option … As an option, the output "door handle" (terminals 16 and 17) of the MST 210 can be connected to a configurable input of the TST320 (terminals … and 52 or 53). Function: If the door handle is pressed when the control unit is locked, a "pre-alarm" is triggered. For this, the input of the TZ 320 must be configured to "door handle". 40 Option … 14 Door locked Option … 11 Unlock SCT, acknowledge COM output … (max. 30 V, 1A) NO output … (act.-drive) … 24 V DC 50 51 … 21 22 GND COM output … (max. 30 V, 1A) NO output … (BA drive) 24 V DC … 12 Lock SCT, KZF, acknowledge Door contact (IN) 24 V DC NO Door handle COM Door handle NO Release COM Release NO cylinder contact COM cylinder contact Day / night mode 24 V DC Release 24 V DC 24 V DC in GND in When the door is closed the contact is closed NO COM Door contact … X 108 (blue terminal strip) … 2 24 V DC … Indirect activation X 105 (black terminal strip) 16 … Indirect activation X5 17 … X2 GND NO 13 Option … 25 24 … 2 … 2 … 1 12 53 Input … (fire alarm system) COM X8 X6 X7 … 52 Input … (short-term unlocked) Push button / ZUKO / SCT RD BK / RD MST 210 X 107 (green terminal strip) … NO Voltage from power supply or from TZ 320 24V DC NT … -24 24 V DC … 24 V DC Input … (short-term unlocked) … SA … 15 24 V DC Door closed COM optional NO COM NO - + COM PE N L1 … 15 … 6 … 41 RS485-B … Locking mechanism- 42 RS485-A 6A FTV 320 GN / YE BU BN … 45 CAN-L (GEZE-Bus) BU BN Locking mechanism+ 46 CAN-H (GEZE-Bus) 24V DC NT … -24 14 … 24 V DC supply RD BK / RD X 106 (orange terminal strip) … GND Supply X 104 (red terminal strip) TZ 320 IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Wiring diagrams 41 Wiring diagrams IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … IQ lock EL with K600 and activation XX XX XX 42 Follow the installation instructions for IQ lock. Heed the wiring diagram of the retractable arm drive RWA K600. Heed the wiring diagrams of the control panels (E260 N / THZ / MBZ 300). … 24 V DC in N L1 Alarm output 91 92 NO Alarm NC Alarm … 24 V DC in NO … Release NO … Door contact (IN) When the door is closed the contact is closed COM … 24 V DC X5 COM Push button / ZUKO / SCT … 24 V DC X6 … GND in X7 MST 210 90 COM Alarm NO electric strike COM electric strike … 5 80 Activation … 3 … X5 Motor CLOSED - (open + ) … 1 24 V DC Motor open + (CLOSED -) Motor assembly - Motor assembly + GND X4 K600 E 260 N / THZ / MBZ … 6A 11 BU BN RWA control unit - Door contact BU BN … 24V DC NT … -24 10 RD BK / RD RWA control unit + X3 … GND in X2 MST 212 IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Wiring diagrams 43 Wiring diagrams IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … IQ lock EL with K600, TZ 320 SN and activation XX Follow the installation instructions for IQ lock. Heed the wiring diagram of the retractable arm drive RWA K600. Heed the wiring diagrams of the control panels (E260 N / THZ / MBZ 300). Heed the wiring diagram for GEZE SecuLogic RWS (TZ 320). XX On the TZ 320, set output … to "TOE working current". XX XX XX 44 … 46 45 42 41 24 V DC supply CAN-H (GEZE-Bus) CAN-L (GEZE-Bus) RS485-A RS485-B … 15 … 9 52 53 Door locked 24 V DC Door closed 24 V DC Input … (short-term unlocked) Input … (short-term unlocked) Input … (fire alarm system) NO NC COM NO + 58 54 53 55 52 51 12 11 … 22 21 Lock SCT, KZF, acknowledge Unlock SCT, acknowledge X 108 (blue terminal strip) 24 V DC COM output … (max. 30V, 1A) NO output … (TOE-fail-secure) … 24 V DC 50 51 … GND COM output … (max. 30V, 1A) NO output … (alarm) COM 56 NO COM … RP220 GN / YE BU BN 6A PE N L1 N L1 NO electric strike COM electric strike Motor CLOSED - (open + ) Motor open + (CLOSED -) SA … 3 15 … 14 … 5 FTV 320 NC Alarm COM Alarm NC COM … 1 … 3 … Motor assembly - NO COM COM NO COM NO - + BU BN … optional 6A Motor assembly + E 260 N / THZ / MBZ K600 Push button / ZUKO / SCT 24 V DC … Indirect activation BU NC … Indirect activation 24V DC NT … -24 BN 57 … GND RD BK / RD X 105 (black terminal strip) … 24 V DC X 107 (green terminal strip) … 14 Locking mechanism- … Locking mechanism+ X 106 (orange terminal strip) … GND Supply X 104 (red terminal strip) TZ 320 BU BN MST 212 24V DC NT … -24 X4 X3 X2 Activation Alarm output … 80 … 2 … 2 … Door contact (IN) 24 V DC Release 24 V DC 24 V DC in GND in 24 V DC … GND … RWA control unit - … RWA control unit + 11 24 V DC in GND in 10 … 1 When the door is closed the contact is closed NO COM Door contact X5 X6 X7 MST 210 RD BK / RD IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Wiring diagrams 45 Wiring diagrams IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … IQ lock AUT with K600 and activation XX XX XX 46 Follow the installation instructions for IQ lock. Heed the wiring diagram of the retractable arm drive RWA K600. Heed the wiring diagrams of the control panels (E260 N / THZ / MBZ 300). Door contact … 24 V DC in COM IQ AUT … N L1 Plug-in drip loop 8-pole THZ / MBZ 90 91 92 COM Alarm NO Alarm NC Alarm … 24 V DC in … Release … Door contact (IN) NO NO COM Push button / ZUKO / SCT When the door is closed the contact is closed … 24 V DC X5 … 24 V DC X6 … GEZE BUS YE GN 41 PK GR WH BN RD BU 42 22 Unlocked X5 21 COM … Release 20 … 24 V DC Output … (locked) … 24 V DC in GND in X1 … 2 X7 GND in … MST 210 … K600 passive leaf NO electric strike COM electric strike Motor CLOSED - (open + ) Motor open + (CLOSED -) NO electric strike COM electric strike 80 Alarm output … 2 … Activation X5 Motor CLOSED - (open + ) … 2 24 V DC Motor open + (CLOSED -) … 1 K600 active leaf Motor assembly - Motor assembly + GND X4 … 6A … BU BN 11 BU BN 10 24V DC NT … -24 RWA control unit - RD BK / RD RWA control unit + X3 … GND in X2 MST 212 IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Wiring diagrams 47 Wiring diagrams IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … IQ lock AUT with K600, TZ 320 SN and activation XX XX XX XX Follow the mechanical installation instructions for IQ lock. Heed the wiring diagram of the retractable arm drive RWA K600. Heed the wiring diagrams of the control panels (E260 N / THZ / MBZ 300). Heed the wiring diagram for GEZE SecuLogic RWS (TZ 320). The following settings must be made on the TZ 320: XX Set Output … to "TOE-fail-secure". 48 … 46 45 42 41 24 V DC supply CAN-H (GEZE-Bus) CAN-L (GEZE-Bus) RS485-A RS485-B … 14 … 15 … 2 SA … 14 … 15 … 9 52 53 Locking mechanism- Door locked 24 V DC Door closed 24 V DC Input … (short-term unlocked) Input … (short-term unlocked) Input … (fire alarm system) … Indirect activation RP220 NO COM COM NO COM GEZE BUS X5 Unlocked COM COM output … (max. 30V, 1A) NO output … (TOE-fail-secure) … 1 NO electric strike 51 50 24 V DC … K600 passive leaf COM electric strike … GND Motor CLOSED - (open + ) + 51 21 … 2 - 52 22 NO electric strike … 3 COM electric strike … Motor CLOSED - (open + ) GN YE PK GR WH BN RD BU … NO 55 … 24 V DC BU BN Plug-in drip loop 8-pole 6A Motor open + (CLOSED -) 41 42 22 21 20 … 2 … 1 PE N N L1 L1 Motor open + (CLOSED -) NC COM 53 11 Unlock SCT, acknowledge 54 NO 58 X 108 (blue terminal strip) COM 56 … 12 Lock SCT, KZF, acknowledge 6A K600 active leaf Output … (locked) Release 24 V DC 24 V DC COM output … (max. 30V, 1A) NO output … (alarm) GN / YE BU BN 24 V DC in GND in X1 IQ AUT X 105 (black terminal strip) … Indirect activation - + NO BU NC … GND optional 24V DC NT … -24 BN 57 … 24 V DC X 107 (green terminal strip) … 5 FTV 320 RD BK / RD Locking mechanism+ X 106 (orange terminal strip) … GND Supply X 104 (red terminal strip) TZ 320 BU BN MST 212 24V DC NT … -24 X4 X3 X2 Door contact (IN) COM Alarm NC Alarm NC Motor assembly - COM … 2 Motor assembly + 24 V DC … Release … 2 24 V DC … 24 V DC in Alarm output GND in Activation 80 … 24 V DC … 1 GND … RWA control unit - RWA control unit + 24 V DC in GND in … 11 10 … 1 E 260 N / THZ / MBZ X5 X6 MST 210 X7 RD BK / RD IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Wiring diagrams 49 Wiring diagrams IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … IQ lock AUT with EMD (-F, -I) and activation XX XX Follow the mechanical installation instructions for IQ lock. Heed the wiring diagram for EMD, EMD-F, EMD Invers. With 2-leaf door drives connect the control unit to the active leaf. Set the parameters on the CU2, DCU2-F, DCU-I control units as follows: With DPS: àà Set A1 to 18 (day and night mode switchover), parameter rr (bolt message) to 02 (normally closed contact) and to (electric strike) to 03 (motor lock). With ST220: àà Set Signals Output signals PA1 to day/night mode switchover. àà Set Signals Input signals Bolt contact type to electric strike. àà Set Door parameters Electric strike type to motor lock. XX XX Voltage supply of the MST 210 from separate power supply NT … -24 or from the DCU2 control unit. Voltage supply of the rod drive IQ AUT from separate 24 V DC … A power supply. EMD Invers: àà If the parameter setting for the door opening output of the EMD-Invers is motor lock, the door is only held in the closing position by the IQ lock EL, no longer by the door drive. àà The door opens through spring force in the event of manual opening using the door handle in the event of a panic. àà After the hold-open time has expired, the door closes electromechanically and the IQ lock EL locks. àà The EMD also recognises without an activation signal when the door is opened. 50 … 24 V DC in … 2 … Release 24 V DC Day / night mode 25 NO cylinder contact 13 17 16 NO Release COM Door handle NO Door handle GEZE BUS YE GN PK 22 Unlocked 41 GR 21 COM 42 WH X5 BN … 20 … 24 V DC Output … (locked) RD … 24 V DC in Release BU … Plug-in drip loop 8-pole GND in X1 IQ AUT NO … Door contact (IN) When the door is closed the contact is closed COM … Door contact 24 V DC X5 12 COM Release X2 24 COM cylinder contact X8 … 24 V DC X6 … GND in X7 MST 210 + 24 V DC NT … 1 20 … GND 24V DC PA1A PA1B PA2 … 55 56 57 RM TOEB … PA1, PA2 33 32 TOEA 24 V DC GND Mechanical contact 24 V DC 24 V DC … 31 TOE KB NA night mode … PA2 PA1B PA1A 24V DC GND PA1, PA2 RM TOEB TOEA 24 V DC GND TOE Mechanical contact 24 V DC KB 24 V DC 57 56 55 … 1 33 32 31 … 1 20 … 2 … 8 AUT automatic AUT automatic NA night mode … DO hold open DO hold open GND 24V DC … 1 … GND RS 485-A RS 485-B SCR … 2 … 24V DC PS 42 42 RS 485-A PS 41 41 RS 485-B 43 43 RS 485 DCU2, control unit Slimdrive EMD passive leaf SCR RS 485 DCU2, control unit Slimdrive EMD active leaf NO COM Push button / ZUKO / SCT IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Wiring diagrams 51 Wiring diagrams IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … IQ lock AUT with TSA160 NT (-F, -I) and activation XX XX Follow the mechanical installation instructions for IQ lock. Heed the wiring diagram for TSA160 NT, TSA160 NT-F, TSA160 NT Invers. Disconnect the internal programme switch of the door drive. With 2-leaf door drives connect the control unit to the active leaf. Set the parameters on the DCU5 control unit as follows: XX With DPS: àà Set parameter rr (21)(bolt message) to 02 (normally closed contact) and to (20) (electric strike type) to 03 (motor lock). XX With ST220: àà Set Input signals Bolt message to electric strike. àà Set Door parameters Electric strike type to motor lock. Voltage supply of the MST 210 from separate power supply NT … -24 or from the DCU5 control unit. The GND of DCU5 (terminal TOE no. 1) must be connected with the GND of the MST 210 (terminal X7 no. 1), even when a separate power supply is used. Voltage supply of the rod drive IQ AUT from separate 24 V DC … A power supply. The day function on the lock cannot be used with analogue programme switches (DPS / TPS / MPS). 52 … 24 V DC in … 2 … Release 24 V DC Day / night mode 13 17 16 NO Release COM Door handle NO Door handle When the door is closed the contact is closed … 1 … 6 … 9 GEZE BUS PK GR GN 22 Unlocked WH 41 21 COM YE 20 Output … (locked) BN RD BU Plug-in drip loop 8-pole 42 … X5 … 24 V DC Release … RM TOEB … 33 32 TOEA 24 V DC GND 24 V DC NA night mode AUT automatic DO hold open Mechanical contact 31 TOE PS 20 GND … 1 GND 24 V DC 24V DC … 2 24V DC … RS 485-A 42 42 RS 485-A RM TOEB TOEA 24 V DC GND TOE 24 V DC NA night mode AUT automatic DO hold open PS Mechanical contact 24 V DC KB RS 485-B 41 41 RS 485-B KB SCR 43 43 RS 485 + - 33 32 31 … 1 … 6 … 9 20 … 24 V DC NT DCU2, control unit Slimdrive EMD passive leaf SCR RS 485 DCU2, control unit Slimdrive EMD active leaf 24 V DC in GND in NO IQ AUT X1 … Door contact (IN) COM … 24 V DC X5 12 COM Release Door contact 25 NO cylinder contact X2 24 COM cylinder contact X8 … 24 V DC X6 … GND in X7 MST 210 NO COM Push button / ZUKO / SCT IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Wiring diagrams 53 Wiring diagrams IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … IQ lock AUT with Powerturn IS XX XX Follow the mechanical installation instructions for IQ lock AUT. Heed the Powerturn wiring diagram. Parameters DCU8xx àà Set configurable output … to day/night mode switchover: àà DPS: Set a1 to … 8 (mode of operation message “Day/night mode”). àà ST220: Set "PA1 function" to "Day/night mode switchover”. àà Set bolt message contact type to normally closed contact: àà DPS: Set ®® to … 2 (normally closed contact). àà ST220: Set the "Signals", "Input signals", "Bolt contact type", "Bolt contact type" to "NC". àà Set the electric strike type to motor lock: àà DPS: Set TO to … 3 . àà ST220: Set “Door parameters” “Electric strike type” to “Motor lock”. Power supply àà Take the voltage supply MST 210 from a separate power supply or from the DCU8xx control unit. àà Take the voltage supply rod drive (IQ AUT) from a separate power supply. Abbreviation on illustration on page 55 BGS BS DPS IQ AUT IQ lock EL (DL) KÜ MST 210 NT Key switch xxx TK Component Opposite hinge side Hinge side Display programme switch Rod drive Self-locking motor lock with panic function (2-leaf) Drip loop Motor lock control Power supply Key switch Door contact Cable recommendation No. … 2 … 4 … 10 54 Management NYM-J 3x … J-Y (ST)Y 2×2× … J-Y (ST)Y 3×2× … J-Y (ST)Y 4×2× … Empty pipe inner diameter 10mm Supplied by GEZE: àà IQ lock XX 10 m LiYY 12× … mm² àà IQ AUT 10 m LiYY 8× … mm² àà TK (ID:106133) 6m LiYY 4× … mm² àà K600 5m FRNC-LSIHSI FE90 on site IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Wiring diagrams … 230 V/ 50Hz … Radar BS … 1 VT #NT #MST 210 … Radar BGS 10 Powerturn … Powerturn IS TK … 10 … 9 10 10 … 9 KÜ KÜ KÜ IQ AUT 10 KÜ IQ lock EL-DL DPS SCT Reference to previous page 55 Wiring diagrams IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL DCU802/Powerturn (GF) SIS KB 10 TST 24 V DC … 4 24VSens Mechanical contact 20 … GND KI 11 SIS KI 21 COM 24VSens … NO GND … SIO 13 SIO … GND KA … 14VSens GND 10 TST 24VSens … KA 23 RSZ/DCU801(optional) 61 Ac va on innen Ac va on außen … COM NO RSZ GND TOE 63 2nd drive GND … 62 RSZ 24V DC TOEB 32 … 24 V DC 27 61 RSZ GND TOEA 31 … Release 28 … GND RM 33 … 24 V DC … BU … 24V DC 24 V DC … 4 Day / night mode 31 PK 32 GY RS485 PS X6 Mode of opera on (IN) X2 Ausgänge 43 SCR DO … 10 41 RS485-B AU … 11 42 RS485-A LS … 2 24 V DC NA … 1 GND OFF … 14 24V DC … 15 PE … GND PA … 24V DC GND 51 PE1 52 PE2 53 PE3 … 24VSens Free/DCU800 COM day/ night mode YE NO day/night mode 34 GN 12 COM Release 35 BN 13 NO Release 36 WH COM fault/ alarm NC fault/ alarm 16 NO door handle 17 COM door handle 24V DC … 18 COM door status PA1A 55 19 NO door status PA1B 56 PA2 57 37 VT 38 RD/BU 39 GY/PK J1 … 2 … 4 X3 RSK (OUT) 20 COM RSK 21 NO RSK 95 Free Free 95 96 Free Free 96 … 97 Free Free 97 … 98 Free Free 98 … 24 V DC … GND X4 Smoke detector (IN) X11 27 X13 X10 Cover mon. (OUT) 24 COM Cylinder con. 25 NO cylinder con. X7 Supply DCU802/Powerturn (SF) KB X9 28 X12 27 BK 28 RD TPF … GND in … 24 V DC in 10 TST 24 V DC … 4 24VSens Mechanical contact 20 … GND KI 11 SIS KI 21 X5 Door contact (IN) 24VSens … 24 V DC … COM … Door contact (IN) … NO SIO 13 SIO GND … GND KA … 14VSens GND 10 TST 24VSens … KA 23 RSZ/DCU801(optional) X8 Cyl.con./sabo (OUT) 24 COM Cylinder con. 25 NO cylinder con. + NT 2,5A-24V L 32 + N TOEA 31 - GND … GND RM 33 24V DC 24 V DC … 43 SCR GND … 41 RS485-B 24V DC … 42 RS485-A PA1A 55 … 24 V DC PA1B 56 … GND PA2 57 RSZ GND TOE 63 2nd drive TOEB 62 RSZ 24V DC 61 RSZ GND … 2 Door contact … - 61 RS485 KÜ 8-polig PA PE … GND DO … 2 24V DC AU … 1 GND RD … 24 V DC in … 24 V DC out BN … Release WH 20 Verr. GR 21 COM 22 Entr. PK 51 PE1 LS … 52 PE2 NA … 53 PE3 OFF … 4 24VSens 24V DC … Free/DCU800 Free 95 Free Free 95 96 Free Free 96 97 Free Free 97 98 Free Free 98 … 24 V DC … GND VT IQ AUT X1 BU PS Drive 56 X1 Lock 33 … Free SIS Cables IQ lock MST 210 X5 YE 42 RS485-A GN 41 RS485-B IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … What if? What if? XX You can remedy most of the problems and faults which occur in day-to-day operation yourself. The following overview should help you with this. If you cannot find the reason for a fault or remedy it, please contact GEZE. Never open the lock casing yourself. àà Installation and maintenance work or repairs may only be carried out by the manufacturer and their authorised specialists. àà Improper installation and maintenance work or repairs can lead to considerable risk for the user or the product for which the manufacturer neither accepts liability nor provides a warranty. XX Rod drive IQ AUT Alarm/fault OVR_TEMP Wh_L_ON Wh_UL1_ON Wh_UL2_ON Bar_L_ON Bar_UL_ON Wh_L_OFF Wh_UL1_OFF Wh_UL2_OFF Cause Temperature at the motor too high. The Hall sensor at the locking position of the toothed wheel cannot be activated. The fault is only triggered during retraction. The first Hall sensor at the unlocking position of the toothed wheel cannot be activated. The fault is only triggered during electric unlocking. The Hall sensor at the locked position of the drive rod is active in the unlocked state. This fault is only triggered in the unlocked state. The Hall sensor at the unlocked position of the drive rod cannot be activated during unlocking. This fault is only triggered during electric unlocking. The Hall sensor at the locked position of the toothed wheel remains active during unlocking. This fault is only triggered during electric unlocking. The Hall sensor at the locked position of the toothed wheel remains active during retraction. This fault is only triggered during retraction. The Hall sensor at the locked position of the toothed wheel remains active during retraction. This fault is only triggered during retraction. Consequence Remedial action XX Return to GEZE Service. Poss. short-circuit at the motor. XX Acknowledge fault and test àà WH lock Hall sensor is defective. again. àà Toothed wheel is blocked. If the fault occurs again: XX Return to GEZE Service. àà The drive rod at the edge of the door is blocked. àà Toothed wheel is blocked. àà The face plate of the strike box is blocked. XX Unlock the passive leaf manually. Check whether excessive force must be used for unlocking. XX Make sure that the drive rod is not blocked. àà Attempted manipulation. XX Check whether the door has Some has tried to generbeen manipulated. XX Leave the voltage switched off ate a locked signal. àà The bar lock Hall sensor is for 10 sec and then switch it defective. back on again. XX Make sure that the drive rod is àà Drive pin is defective. àà Drive rod is blocked. not blocked. XX Check the load on the drive rod àà Magnet of the drive rod has failed. manually. XX Acknowledge fault and test again. XX Acknowledge fault and test Toothed wheel blocked. again. If the fault occurs again: XX Return to GEZE Service. Toothed wheel blocked. Acknowledge fault and test again. If the fault occurs again: XX Return to GEZE Service. Toothed wheel blocked. Acknowledge fault and test again. If the fault occurs again: XX Return to GEZE Service. XX XX 57 What if? IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Alarm/fault Bar_L_OFF OC_2UL OC_2UL_BAR OC_2L Cause The Hall sensor at the locked position of the drive rod remains active during unlocking. This fault is only triggered in the unlocked state. "OverCurrent to unlock" The max. current limit has been exceeded during unlocking, although the drive rod has already reached the unlocked position. "OverCurrent to unlock" The max. current limit has been exceeded during unlocking. Consequence àà Drive rod is blocked. àà Bar lock sensor is defective. "OverCurrent to lock" The current limit has been exceeded during locking. Toothed wheel blocked. Toothed wheel blocked. àà Drive rod or toothed wheel is blocked. àà The load is too high Remedial action XX Make sure that the drive rod is not blocked. XX Check the load on the drive rod manually. XX Acknowledge fault and test again. XX Acknowledge fault and test again. If the fault occurs again: XX Return to GEZE Service. Make sure that the drive rod is not blocked. XX Check the load on the drive rod manually. XX Acknowledge fault and test again. XX Acknowledge fault and test again. If the fault occurs again: XX Return to GEZE Service. XX Motor lock IQ lock EL / IQ lock EL DL Alarm/fault Cause Manual unlocking of the Mechanical fault on the lock or lock using panic device bolt jammed in extended state possible, but not using motor activation Power supply cable defective Consequence Remedial action Bolt can no longer be re- XX Reset the activation and start tracted by motor, and/or activation of the lock again, error message is pending error message will go out if at the control unit successful. XX Check continuity and replace Lock is not being supplied with 24 V DC the power supply cable of the lock if necessary. Control unit is not being supplied In the event of attempt- XX Check the polarity of the 24 V with 24 V DC ed manipulation, the bolt DC input on the control unit and of the auxiliary latch is change if necessary. closed and can no longer be retracted by motor The door can be pushed or The cross latch cannot be poBolt blocked in retracted XX Position the strike plate corpulled open by hand sitioned or the lock cylinder is state rectly. XX Check activation of the exjammed change function using the key. XX Loosen the screws, lubricate the Door handle is jammed in actiThe door handle does vated position or handle return not return to its initial handle guide, correct fastening. spring is broken position after activation The error message is reset once the The signal is sent via fault handle is mobilised again. relay after … min – or – XX Replace the lock. Auxiliary latch is not activated Bolt is not extended with XX Check the clearance of the door door closed leaf and shim the strike plate if necessary. Lock in permanently unlocked Lock does not lock when XX Check permanently unlocked mode the door is closed activation. Power supply cable has been in- Lock does not lock when XX Check power supply cable for terrupted during the release time the door is closed continuity. XX Open the door and replace the The auxiliary latch closes with Strike plate has been reworked – door closed with "Off" and hollowed out too much strike plate. 58 IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL What if? Alarm/fault No signal from the Reed contact Cause Sensing distance of the Reed contact exceeded or power supply cable for the Reed contact defective – or – Input external door contact on the control unit defective Lock no longer locks Door leaf cannot close Power supply cable defective Cross latches hit the strike plate hard Auxiliary latch can no longer be activated Consequence Remedial action Electrical timeout func- XX Check Reed contact, sensing tion still working. distance observed? Door locks during door XX Check continuity, check input closing process or reof external door contact on the mains locked when door control unit. is closed. Door mode "door closed" is not signalled. Bolt no longer extends XX Replace power supply cable. Door leaf cannot close, XX Lubricate the cross latches lightlatches grind at the strike ly with a lubricant approved by plate GEZE. XX Mobilise the auxiliary catch carefully. Lever lock IQ lock EM / IQ lock EM DL Alarm/fault Manual unlocking via the outer door handle not possible Cause Magnet is not energised Consequence Outside handle is not engaged and is disabled The door can be pushed or pulled open by hand Cross latch cannot be positioned – or – Lock cylinder is jammed Bolt blocked in retracted state Door handle is jammed in activated position – or – Handle return spring is broken Auxiliary latch is not activated Bolt shoots out again imme- Door handle has not been diately after the door has pressed down completely. been opened – or – Auxiliary latch is jammed The door handle does not return to its initial position after activation and there is no locking signal given Lock does not lock when the door is closed Face plate is not held in permanently unlocked position, door cannot close and be locked properly The auxiliary latch closes with Strike plate has been re– door closed with "Off" worked and hollowed out too much Door leaf cannot close Cross latches hit the strike Door leaf cannot close, latchplate hard es grind at the strike plate Contacts are not signalling Remedial action XX Check the polarity of the 24 V DC input and replace if necessary. – and/or – XX Check the continuity of the power supply cable. If the power supply cable and polarity are both OK: XX Replace the lock. XX Position the strike plate correctly. – or – XX Check activation of the exchange function using the key. XX Loosen the screws, lubricate the handle guide, correct fastening. – or – XX Replace the lock. Check the clearance of the door leaf. XX Press the door handle as far as it will go. XX Check the tension-free fit of the lock. Rework the lock recess if necessary. If there is no change in lock behaviour: XX Replace the lock. XX Open the door and replace the strike plate. XX XX Auxiliary latch can no longer be activated Fittings set installed twisted – or – Lock case fitted in the recess under mechanical tension – XX Contacts in the lock are not activated by the integrated face plate XX Power supply cable is defective Relaying of contacts not possible XX XX XX Lubricate the cross latches lightly with a lubricant approved by GEZE. Mobilise the auxiliary catch carefully. Remove the fittings set. Check the tension-free fit of the lock. Rework the lock recess if necessary, mobilise the lock or replace the lock. Check power supply cable through or replace lock. 59 What if? IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Mechanical contact lock IQ lock C / IQ lock C DL and mechanical lock IQ lock M / IQ lock M DL Alarm/fault The door can be pushed or pulled open by hand Consequence Remedial action XX Position the strike plate corBolt blocked in retracted state rectly. XX Check activation of the exchange Bolt blocked in retracted state function using the key. XX Loosen the screws. Door handle is jammed in The door handle does not activated position return to its original position XX Lubricate the handle guide. XX Correct fastening – or – after activation Handle return spring is – or – XX Replace the lock. broken Auxiliary latch is not activated Lock does not lock when the XX Check the clearance of the door door is closed leaf. Bolt shoots out again imme- Door handle has not been Face plate is not held in per- XX Press the handle down as far as diately after the door has pressed down completely manently unlocked position, it will go XX Check the tension-free fit of the been opened – or – door cannot close and be Auxiliary latch is jammed in locked properly lock. XX Rework the lock recess activated position if necessary. If there is no change in lock behaviour: XX Replace the lock. XX Open the door and replace the The auxiliary latch closes with Strike plate has been re– door closed with "Off" worked and hollowed out too strike plate. much Door leaf cannot Cross latches hit the strike Door leaf cannot close, latch- XX Lubricate the cross latches lightclose plate hard es grind at the strike plate ly with a lubricant approved by – or – GEZE. XX Mobilise the auxiliary catch Auxiliary latch can no longer be activated carefully. 60 Cause Cross latch cannot be positioned Lock cylinder is jammed IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … Maintenance Maintenance Lock maintenance work must be carried out once a year by GEZE or an authorised GEZE partner. Maintenance instructions These maintenance instructions are part of the installation and operating instructions and have to be made available to the owner/operator of the building. In addition, we recommend monthly checks on the locks by the owner/operator as follows: àà Make sure by inspecting and activating the emergency exit device that all parts of the lock are in a satisfactory operating conditions. àà Use a dynamometer to measure and record the operating forces required to release the panic exit device/ emergency exit lock. àà Ensure that the operating forces have not changed substantially in comparison to the operating forces recorded during initial commissioning. àà Ensure that bolt heads or keepers are not blocked or clogged up. àà Ensure that the panic exit device has been lubricated according to the manufacturer's instructions and that the operating element has been tightened properly. àà Ensure that no additional locking devices are added to the door after initial installation. àà Check whether all the components of the panic exit device still comply with the list of approved components originally supplied with the system. àà Ensure that these documents are made available to the owner/operator of the panic exit device/escape door lock. 61 Maintenance 62 IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Maintenance 63 Germany GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Süd-West Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 594 E-Mail: leonberg.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Süd-Ost Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6440 E-Mail: muenchen.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Ost Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6840 E-Mail: berlin.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Mitte/Luxemburg Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6888 E-Mail: frankfurt.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung West Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6770 E-Mail: duesseldorf.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Nord Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6600 E-Mail: hamburg.de@geze.com GEZE Service GmbH Tel. +49 (0) 1802 923392 E-Mail: service-info.de@geze.com Austria GEZE Austria E-Mail: austria.at@geze.com www.geze.at Hungary GEZE Hungary Kft. E-Mail: office-hungary@geze.com www.geze.hu Scandinavia – Sweden GEZE Scandinavia AB E-Mail: sverige.se@geze.com www.geze.se Baltic States – Lithuania / Latvia / Estonia E-Mail: baltic-states@geze.com Iberia GEZE Iberia S.R.L. E-Mail: info.es@geze.com www.geze.es Scandinavia – Norway GEZE Scandinavia AB avd. Norge E-Mail: norge.se@geze.com www.geze.no Benelux GEZE Benelux B.V. E-Mail: benelux.nl@geze.com www.geze.be www.geze.nl India GEZE India Private Ltd. E-Mail: office-india@geze.com www.geze.in Scandinavia – Denmark GEZE Danmark E-Mail: danmark.se@geze.com www.geze.dk Bulgaria GEZE Bulgaria - Trade E-Mail: office-bulgaria@geze.com www.geze.bg Italy GEZE Italia S.r.l. Unipersonale E-Mail: italia.it@geze.com www.geze.it Singapore GEZE (Asia Pacific) Pte, Ltd. E-Mail: gezesea@geze.com.sg www.geze.com China GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE Engineering Roma S.r.l E-Mail: italia.it@geze.com www.geze.it South Africa GEZE South Africa (Pty) Ltd. E-Mail: info@gezesa.co.za www.geze.co.za GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Shanghai E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Guangzhou E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Beijing E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn France GEZE France S.A.R.L. E-Mail: france.fr@geze.com www.geze.fr Korea GEZE Korea Ltd. E-Mail: info.kr@geze.com www.geze.com Poland GEZE Polska Sp.z o.o. E-Mail: geze.pl@geze.com www.geze.pl Romania GEZE Romania S.R.L. E-Mail: office-romania@geze.com www.geze.ro Russia OOO GEZE RUS E-Mail: office-russia@geze.com www.geze.ru Switzerland GEZE Schweiz AG E-Mail: schweiz.ch@geze.com www.geze.ch Türkiye GEZE Kapı ve Pencere Sistemleri E-Mail: office-turkey@geze.com www.geze.com Ukraine LLC GEZE Ukraine E-Mail: office-ukraine@geze.com www.geze.ua United Arab Emirates/GCC GEZE Middle East E-Mail: gezeme@geze.com www.geze.ae United Kingdom GEZE UK Ltd. E-Mail: info.uk@geze.com www.geze.com GEZE GmbH Reinhold-Vöster-Straße 21–29 71229 Leonberg Germany Tel.: 0049 7152 203 … Fax.: 0049 7152 203 310 www.geze.com
PDF | 2 MB